CDMA Performance Parameters (1X) V3.3 For Customers

CDMA Performance Parameters (1X) V3.
3 for Customers
Issue Date
01 2009-11-10
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2009. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided AS IS without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China Website: Email: http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com
CDMA Performance Parameters (1X)
Internal
Revision Record
Date 2006-03 Release 1.0 Description Completed the first draft based on the parameter configuration guide for network planning. Modified the contents of V1.0 and added the new algorithms of V2.3. Modified the contents of V1.1, added the changes in algorithms of V2.3 and V3.1, and added the description on parameter layer. Modified the contents of V2.0 and added the new algorithms of V3R6C02. Added the new algorithms of BSCV3R6C0 and BTSV4R6C05. Author CDMA & WiMAX Network Performance Research Department, CDMA Solution Test Department, cBSS Product Development Department CDMA & WiMAX Network Performance Research Department, CDMA Solution Performance Test Division, CDMA BSS Development Department CDMA & WiMAX Network Performance Research Department, CDMA Solution Performance Test Division, CDMA BSS Development Department CDMA & WiMAX Network Performance Research Department, CDMA BSS Development Department, CDMA Network Planning Department CDMA & WiMAX Network Performance Research Department, CDMA BSS Development Department, CDMA Network Planning Department CDMA Performance Research Department, CDMA BSS Development Department, CDMA Network Planning Department
2006-08-16
1.1
2007-10-02
2.0
2008-08-04
3.0
2009-03-23
3.2
2009-09-15
3.3
Added the new algorithms of BSCV3R6C08.
2009-11-6
Huawei Confidential No Spreading Without Permission
Page 3 of 438
Internal
Contents
1 Preface ...........................................................................................................................................21
1.1 Introduction to This Document ...................................................................................................................... 21 1.1.1 Scope..................................................................................................................................................... 21 1.1.2 Intended Audience ................................................................................................................................ 21 1.1.3 Organization.......................................................................................................................................... 21 1.1.4 References............................................................................................................................................. 22 1.2 Conventions and Descriptions........................................................................................................................ 23 1.3 Acronyms and Abbreviations ......................................................................................................................... 24 1.4 Introduction to IDs Used in the Network ....................................................................................................... 25 1.4.1 MSCID.................................................................................................................................................. 25 1.4.2 Entity ID ............................................................................................................................................... 25 1.4.3 LACODE .............................................................................................................................................. 25 1.4.4 REG_ZONE.......................................................................................................................................... 25 1.4.5 SID........................................................................................................................................................ 25 1.4.6 NID ....................................................................................................................................................... 25 1.4.7 PZID...................................................................................................................................................... 25 1.4.8 CellId, SectorId, and Bts_Id.................................................................................................................. 26 1.4.9 CGI ....................................................................................................................................................... 26 1.5 Modification of Parameters ............................................................................................................................ 26 1.5.1 Modification of Basic Parameters......................................................................................................... 26
2 Basic System Parameters............................................................................................................27

2.1 Synchronization Channel Parameters............................................................................................................. 27 2.1.1 LPSEC .................................................................................................................................................. 27 2.1.2 PRAT (Paging Channel Rate)................................................................................................................ 27 2.1.3 CDMABSN (CDMA Channel No.) ...................................................................................................... 28 2.1.4 EXTCDMABSN (Extended CDMA Channel No.)............................................................................... 29 2.1.5 LOCTMOFF (Local Time Offset)......................................................................................................... 29 2.2 Paging Channel Parameters............................................................................................................................ 31 2.2.1 PAGECHAN (Paging Channel Number) .............................................................................................. 31 2.2.2 MAXTSPRDIDX (Max Slot Cycle Index) ........................................................................................... 32 2.2.3 MAXALTSRV (Max Number of Alternative Service Options) ............................................................ 32 2.2.4 RESELINCL (System Reselection Parameters Included Indicator) ..................................................... 33 2.2.5 BCGPSAUG (Broadcast GPS Assist Indicator).................................................................................... 34 2.2.6 CCISPT (QPCH CCI Support Indicator) .............................................................................................. 35
2009-11-6
Page 4 of 438
Internal
2.2.7 SDBSUPPORTED (Short Data Burst Support Flag) ............................................................................ 36 2.2.8 ECTHRS (Pilot Min Power Threshold) ................................................................................................ 36 2.2.9 ECIOTHRS (Pilot Min EC/IO Threshold)............................................................................................ 38 2.2.10 BSLAT (Base Latitude)....................................................................................................................... 38 2.2.11 BSLONG (Base Longitude) ................................................................................................................ 39 2.2.12 DELFORTMSI (Delete Foreign TMSI) .............................................................................................. 40 2.2.13 USETMSI (User TMSI Flag).............................................................................................................. 40 2.2.14 PMSIDTP (Preferred ACH MS ID Type) ........................................................................................... 41 2.2.15 BCMD (Broadcast Mode)................................................................................................................... 42 2.2.16 BCASEINDEX (Broadcast Slot Cycle Index) .................................................................................... 43 2.2.17 IMSITSPT (IMSI_T Support Indicator).............................................................................................. 44 2.2.18 PZID (Packet Zone ID) ....................................................................................................................... 45 2.2.19 RESCAN (Rescan Indicator) .............................................................................................................. 45 2.2.20 RCQPCHSELINCL (RC and QPCH Selection Included Indicator) ................................................... 46 2.2.21 RCQPCHSRCH (Search RC_QPCH Channel Indicator) ................................................................... 47 2.3 Access Channel Parameters............................................................................................................................ 47 2.3.2 PWRCSTEP (Power Increment) ........................................................................................................... 50 2.3.3 NUMSTEP (Number of Access Probes) ............................................................................................... 51 2.3.4 PSIST09 (Persistence Value for Access Overload Classes 0-9) ............................................................ 52 2.3.5 PSIST10 to PSIST15 (Persistence Value for Access Overload Class 10 to Persistence Value for Access Overload Class 15)......................................................................................................................................... 53 2.3.6 MSGPSIST (Persistence Modifier for Message Transmissions)........................................................... 54 2.3.7 REGPSIST (Persistence Modifier for Registrations) ............................................................................ 54 2.3.8 PRBPNRAN (Time randomization for Access Channel probes) .......................................................... 55 2.3.9 ACCTMO (Acknowledgment timeout)................................................................................................. 56 2.3.10 PRBBKOFF (ACH Probe Backoff Range) ......................................................................................... 56 2.3.11 BKOFF (ACH Probe Sequence Backoff Range) ................................................................................ 57 2.3.12 MAXREQSEQ (Max Number of Probe Sequences for an ACH Request) ......................................... 58 2.3.13 MAXRSPSEQ (Max Number of Probe Sequences for an ACH Response)........................................ 59 2.3.14 PSISTEMGINCL (Emergency Call Persistence Value Included) ....................................................... 59 2.3.15 PSISTEMG (Emergency Call Persistence Values for Access Overload Classes 0-9) ......................... 60 2.3.16 PCN (PCH No.) .................................................................................................................................. 61 2.3.17 ACHNUM (Number of Access Channels) .......................................................................................... 61 2.3.18 MAXLEN (Max Message Length) ..................................................................................................... 62 2.3.19 PAMLEN (Header Length) ................................................................................................................. 63 2.3.20 CELLMODE (Cell Mode) .................................................................................................................. 63 2.3.21 MAXCELLR (Maximum Cell Radius)............................................................................................... 64 2.3.22 MAXRANUM (Maximum number of reverse access channel).......................................................... 65 2.3.23 MAXREARCNUM (maximum number of reverse enhanced access and common control channel). 66 2.3.24 MINPAMSZ (Minimum Length of Access Channel Preamble).......................................................... 67 2.3.25 MAXSCHPAS .................................................................................................................................... 68 2.3.26 SCHSOS ............................................................................................................................................. 68
2009-11-6
Page 5 of 438
Internal
2.4 Registration Parameters.................................................................................................................................. 69 2.4.1 REGZN (Registration zone).................................................................................................................. 69 2.4.2 TOTALZN (Number of Total Registration Zones to be Retained)........................................................ 70 2.4.3 ZNTMR (Zone timer length) ................................................................................................................ 71 2.4.4 MULTSIDS (Multiple SID Storage Indicator)...................................................................................... 72 2.4.5 MULTNIDS (Multiple NID Storage Indicator) .................................................................................... 73 2.4.6 HOMEREG (Home Registration Indicator).......................................................................................... 74 2.4.7 FORSIDREG (SID Roaming Registration Flag) .................................................................................. 74 2.4.8 FORNIDREG (NID Roaming Registration Flag) ................................................................................. 75 2.4.9 PWRUP (Power-up Registration Indicator) .......................................................................................... 76 2.4.10 PWRDWN (Power-down Registration Indicator)............................................................................... 76 2.4.11 PRMREG (System Message Parameter-Change Registration Indicator)............................................ 77 2.4.12 REGPRD (Time-Based Registration) ................................................................................................. 78 2.4.13 REGDIST (Distance-Based Registration)........................................................................................... 79 2.5 System Message Control Parameters ............................................................................................................. 80 2.5.1 EXT_SYS_PARAAMETER (extended system parameter message).............................................. 80 2.5.2 EXTNBRLST (Extended Neighbor List Message Send Indicator)....................................................... 81 2.5.3 GENNBRLST (General Neighbor List Message Send Indicator)......................................................... 81 2.5.4 GLBRDRCT (Global Service Redirection Message Send Indicator) ................................................... 82 2.5.5 UZID (User Zone Identification Message Send Indicator) ................................................................... 84 2.5.6 EXTGLBRDRCT (Extended Global Service Redirection Message Send Indicator)............................ 84 2.5.7 EXTCDMACHLST (Extended CDMA Channel List Message Indicator) ........................................... 85
3 Forward Power Distribution Parameters................................................................................87

3.1 Sector Carrier Gain Parameters...................................................................................................................... 87 3.1.1 TXGAIN (RF Gain) .............................................................................................................................. 87 3.1.2 SCTGAIN (Baseband Gain) ................................................................................................................. 88 3.1.3 ADJPOWER (Rated Power Adjust Parameter) ..................................................................................... 89 3.2 Pilot Channel Gain Parameters....................................................................................................................... 90 3.2.1 PLTCHGAIN (Pilot Channel Gain) ...................................................................................................... 90 3.3 Synchronization Channel Gain Parameters .................................................................................................... 92 3.3.1 SYNCHGAIN (Sync Channel Gain Relative To Pilot)......................................................................... 92 3.4 Paging Channel Gain Parameters ................................................................................................................... 92 3.4.1 PCHGAIN (PCH Gain Relative To Pilot)............................................................................................. 92 3.5 Quick Paging Channel Gain Parameters ........................................................................................................ 93 3.5.1 QPCHNUM (Number of Quick Paging Channels) ............................................................................... 93 3.5.2 QPCHRT (QPCH Data Rate) ................................................................................................................ 94 3.5.3 PWRLEVCFG (Relative Power Level of CCI Modulation Symbol).................................................... 95 3.5.4 PWRLEVPAGE (Relative Power Level of PI Modulation Symbol) .................................................... 96
4 Power Estimation and Control Parameters ............................................................................98

4.1 Forward Power Control Based on Measurement Report................................................................................ 98 4.1.1 FWDMAXCHGAIN (Maximum Transmit Power Offset of Forward Channel)................................... 98
2009-11-6
Page 6 of 438
Internal
4.1.2 FWDMINCHGAIN (Minimum Transmit Power Offset of Forward Channel)..................................... 99 4.1.3 FWDINITCHGAIN (Forward Channel Initial Transmit Power) ........................................................ 100 4.1.4 THRSPWRDWN (Power Decrease Step)........................................................................................... 101 4.1.5 PWRRPTTHRS (Power Control Reporting Threshold )..................................................................... 102 4.1.6 PWRRPTFRMNUM (Power Control Reporting Frame Count) ......................................................... 103 4.1.7 PWRRPTDL (Power Report Delay) ................................................................................................... 104 4.1.8 FWDVCFCHFER1 (F-FCH Voice Service Expected FER1) ............................................................. 104 4.1.9 REVVCTDCCHFER1 (Expected FER1 of R-DCCH Voice Service) ................................................ 106 4.1.10 FWDDATFCHFER1 (F-FCH Data Service Expected FER1)........................................................... 107 4.1.11 REVDATFCHFER1 (R-FCH Data Service Expected FER1) ........................................................... 108 4.2 Forward EIB Power Control ........................................................................................................................ 110 4.2.1 FWDCHMAXGAIN (F-TCH Max. Transmit Power Relative To Pilot) ............................................ 110 4.2.2 FWDCHMINGAIN (F-TCH Min. Transmit Power Relative To Pilot)............................................... 111 4.3 Forward Fast Power Control Parameters...................................................................................................... 111 4.3.1 FPWRSTEP (Forward Power Control Step) ....................................................................................... 111 4.3.2 IS95SCHGAIN1 (IS95 Forward Power Control Subchannel Gain 1) ................................................ 112 4.3.3 IS95SCHGAIN2 (IS95 Forward Power Control Subchannel Gain 2) ................................................ 113 4.3.4 IS95SCHGAIN3 (IS95 Forward Power Control Subchannel Gain 3) ................................................ 114 4.3.5 IS2KSCHGAIN1 (IS2000 Forward Power Control Subchannel Gain 1) ........................................... 115 4.3.6 IS2KSCHGAIN2 (IS2000 Forward Power Control Subchannel Gain 2) ........................................... 116 4.3.7 IS2KSCHGAIN3 (IS2000 Forward Power Control Subchannel Gain 3) ........................................... 116 4.3.8 VINITFCH (Voice Service FCH Initial Eb/Nt Value) / DINITFCH (Data Service FCH Initial Eb/Nt Value)........................................................................................................................................................... 117 4.3.9 VMAXFCH (Voice Service FCH Max. Eb/Nt Value) / DMAXFCH (Data Service FCH Max. Eb/Nt Value)........................................................................................................................................................... 118 4.3.10 VMINFCH (Voice Service FCH Min. Eb/Nt Value) / DMINFCH (Data Service FCH Min. Eb/Nt Value)........................................................................................................................................................... 119 4.3.11 VFCHINITGAINFIX (Voice Service F-FCH Initial Power Correction Value) / DFCHINITGAINFIX (Data Service F-FCH Initial Power Correction Value) ................................................................................ 120 4.3.12 VFCHMAXGAINR1 (Voice Service FCH Max. Gain 1 Relative to Pilot) / DFCHMAXGAINR1 (Data Service FCH Max. Gain 1 Relative to Pilot)...................................................................................... 121 4.3.13 VFCHMINGAINR1 (Voice Service FCH Min. Gain 1 Relative to Pilot) / DFCHMINGAINR1 (Data Service FCH Min. Gain 1 Relative to Pilot) ................................................................................................ 122 4.3.14 VFCHMAXGAINR2 (Voice Service FCH Max. Gain 2 Relative to Pilot ) / DFCHMAXGAINR2 (Data Service FCH Max. Gain 2 Relative to Pilot )..................................................................................... 123 4.3.15 VFCHMINGAINR2 (Voice Service FCH Min. Gain 2 Relative to Pilot) / DFCHMINGAINR2 (Data Service FCH Min. Gain 2 Relative to Pilot) ................................................................................................ 124 4.3.16 VFCHMAXGAINR3 (Voice Service FCH Max. Gain 3 Relative to Pilot) / DFCHMAXGAINR3 (Data Service FCH Max. Gain 3 Relative to Pilot)...................................................................................... 125 4.3.17 VFCHMINGAINR3 (Voice Service FCH Min. Gain 3 Relative to Pilot ) / DFCHMINGAINR3 (Data Service FCH Min. Gain 3 Relative to Pilot) ................................................................................................ 125 4.4 Forward Power Synchronization Parameters ............................................................................................... 126 4.4.1 FWDPWRSYNSWT (Forward Power Synchronization Switch) ....................................................... 126 4.4.2 SCHPWRSYNSW (SCH Power Synchronization Switch)................................................................. 127
2009-11-6
Page 7 of 438
Internal
4.5 Reverse Power Control Parameters .............................................................................................................. 128 4.5.1 NOMPWR (Nominal Transmit Power Offset).................................................................................... 128 4.5.2 INITPWR (Access Initial Power Offset) ............................................................................................ 129 4.5.3 Access Power Increment (PWRCSTEP) ............................................................................................. 130 4.5.4 NUMSTEP (Number of Access Probes) ............................................................................................. 131 4.5.5 REVVCFCHFER1 (Expected FER1 of R-FCH Voice Service) ......................................................... 132 4.5.6 REVPWRCSTEP (Reverse Power Control Step) ............................................................................... 133 4.5.7 VFCHRLGAINADJ (Voice Service R-FCH Power Adjust Gain Relative to ACH) / DFCHRLGAINADJ (Data Service R-FCH Power Adjust Gain Relative to ACH) ..................................... 134 4.5.8 VFCHREVINIT (Voice Service Reverse Initial Set Value for FCH) / DFCHREVINIT (Data Service Reverse Initial Set Value for FCH) .............................................................................................................. 135 4.5.9 VMAXFCH (Voice Service Max. Value of FCH Outer Loop) / DMAXFCH (Data Service Max. Value of FCH Outer Loop)..................................................................................................................................... 136 4.5.10 VMINFCH (Voice Service FCH Min. Eb/Nt Value) / DMINFCH (Data Service FCH Min. Eb/Nt Value)........................................................................................................................................................... 138 4.5.11 FCHENDWNSTEP (Eb/Nt Down Step for FCH)............................................................................. 138 4.5.12 FCHENMAXSTEP (Eb/Nt Max. Adjustment Step for FCH) ........................................................... 139 4.6 F-SCH Initial Power Estimate Parameters ................................................................................................... 140 4.6.1 SCHINITGAIN1X (Forward 1X SCH Initial Tx Gain Relative to Pilot) / SCHINITGAIN2X (Forward 2X SCH Initial Tx Gain Relative to Pilot) / SCHINITGAIN4X (Forward 4X SCH Initial Tx Gain Relative to Pilot) / SCHINITGAIN8X (Forward 8X SCH Initial Tx Gain Relative to Pilot) / SCHINITGAIN16X (Forward 16X SCH Initial Tx Gain Relative to Pilot) / SCHINITGAIN32X (Forward 32X SCH Initial Tx Gain Relative to Pilot) ................................................................................................................................. 140 4.7 F-SCH Power Control .................................................................................................................................. 141 4.7.1 FWDSCHMAXGAIN1X (Forward 1X SCH Max. Tx Power Relative to Pilot) / FWDSCHMAXGAIN2 (Forward 2X SCH Max. Tx Power Relative to PilotX) / FWDSCHMAXGAIN4X (Forward 4X SCH Max. Tx Power Relative to Pilot) / FWDSCHMAXGAIN8X (Forward 8X SCH Max. Tx Power Relative to Pilot) / FWDSCHMAXGAIN16X (Forward 16X SCH Max. Tx Power Relative to Pilot)/ FWDSCHMAXGAIN32X (Forward 32X SCH Max. Tx Power Relative to Pilot)..................................... 141 4.7.2 FWDSCHMINGAIN1X (Forward 1X SCH Min. Tx Power Relative to Pilot) / FWDSCHMINGAIN2X (Forward 2X SCH Min. Tx Power Relative to Pilot) / FWDSCHMINGAIN4X (Forward 4X SCH Min. Tx Power Relative to Pilot) / FWDSCHMINGAIN8 (Forward 8X SCH Min. Tx Power Relative to PilotX) / FWDSCHMINGAIN16X (Forward 16X SCH Min. Tx Power Relative to Pilot) / FWDSCHMINGAIN32X (Forward 32X SCH Min. Tx Power Relative to Pilot)..................................... 143 4.7.3 FWDDATSCHFER1X (Forward 1XSCH Target FER) / FWDDATSCHFER2X (Forward 2XSCH Target FER) / FWDDATSCHFER4X (Forward 4XSCH Target FER) / FWDDATSCHFER8X (Forward 8XSCH Target FER) / FWDDATSCHFER16X (Forward 16XSCH Target FER) / FWDDATSCHFER32X (Forward 32XSCH Target FER) .................................................................................................................. 144 4.7.4 SCHMAX (SCH Max. Eb/Nt Value) .................................................................................................. 146 4.7.5 SCHMIN (SCH Min. Eb/Nt Value)..................................................................................................... 146 4.7.6 SCHINIT (SCH Initial Eb/Nt Value Offset Relative to FCH)............................................................. 147 4.7.7 FPCTHRSSCH (SCH Forward Outer Loop Difference Threshold) ................................................... 148 4.8 Reverse SCH Closed-Loop Power Control Parameters ............................................................................... 148 4.8.1 REVSCHPWRCTRLSW (Reverse SCH Power Control Switch)....................................................... 148 4.8.2 RLGAINSCHPLT1X (1X R-SCH Gain Offset Relative to R-PICH) / RLGAINSCHPLT2X (2X R-SCH Gain Offset Relative to R-PICH) / RLGAINSCHPLT4X (4X R-SCH Gain Offset Relative to R-PICH) / RLGAINSCHPLT8X (8X R-SCH Gain Offset Relative to R-PICH) / RLGAINSCHPLT16X
2009-11-6
Page 8 of 438
Internal
(16X R-SCH Gain Offset Relative to R-PICH) / RLGAINSCHPLT32X (32X R-SCH Gain Offset Relative to R-PICH)................................................................................................................................................... 149 4.8.3 RCAGDWNSTEP (RCAG Down Step) ............................................................................................. 150 4.8.4 MAXRCAG (Max. RCAG Value) ...................................................................................................... 151 4.8.5 MINRCAG (Minimum RCAG Value) ................................................................................................ 152 4.8.6 INITRCAG (Initial RCAG Value) ...................................................................................................... 153 4.8.7 REVDATSCHFER1X (Reverse 1X SCH Target FER) / REVDATSCHFER2X (Reverse 2X SCH Target FER) / REVDATSCHFER4X (Reverse 4X SCH Target FER) / REVDATSCHFER8X (Reverse 8X SCH Target FER) / REVDATSCHFER16X (Reverse 16X SCH Target FER) / REVDATSCHFER32X (Reverse 32X SCH Target FER) .................................................................................................................. 154 4.8.8 MAXSCH (Max. Value of SCH) ........................................................................................................ 155 4.8.9 MINSCH (Min. Value of SCH)) ......................................................................................................... 155
5 Load Control and Management Parameters ........................................................................157

5.1 Access Load Control Parameters.................................................................................................................. 157 5.1.1 ACHLDCTRLSW (Access Channel Load Control Switch) ............................................................... 157 5.1.2 ALDCTRLSWT (Access Load Control Switch)................................................................................. 158 5.1.3 ACHHIGHTHR (Access Channel High Threshold) ........................................................................... 158 5.1.4 ACHLOWTHR (Access Channel Low Threshold)............................................................................. 159 5.1.5 ACHUPSTEP (Psist Up Step) ............................................................................................................. 160 5.1.6 ACHDOWNSTEP (Psist Down Step)................................................................................................. 160 5.1.7 ACHCOLLTHD (ACH Confliction Threshold).................................................................................. 161 5.2 Forward Load Control Parameters ............................................................................................................... 162 5.2.1 FWDLDCTRLSW (Forward Load Control Algorithm Selection)...................................................... 162 5.2.2 FWDLDCTRLSWT (Forward Load Control Switch) ........................................................................ 163 5.2.3 FWDTHRADJSW (Forward Threshold Adjust Switch) ..................................................................... 164 5.2.4 FERLDCTRLSW (FER Load Control Switch)................................................................................... 164 5.2.5 RSMDLDCTRLSW (Load Control Switch for Voice Rate Reduction Mode).................................... 165 5.2.6 DELLEGLDCTRLSW (Load Control Switch of Deleting Call Legs) ............................................... 166 5.2.7 OVERLOADPOWERTHR(Overload Threshold of Forward Transmitting Power) ........................... 167 5.2.8 AVAILABLEPOWERTHR (Available Threshold of Forward Transmitting Power) .......................... 168 5.2.9 FWDINITTHR (Forward Initial Basic Threshold) ............................................................................. 169 5.2.10 FWDMAXTHR (Forward Max. Basic Threshold) ........................................................................... 170 5.2.11 FWDMINTHR (Forward Min. Basic Threshold).............................................................................. 171 5.2.12 FWDSTOBTHR (F-SCH Offset Relative to Basic Threshold)......................................................... 171 5.2.13 FWDSHOTOBTHR (Forward Soft Handoff to Basic Threshold) .................................................... 172 5.2.14 FWDFERTHR (Bad FER Threshold) ............................................................................................... 173 5.2.15 FWDTHRADJMINNUM (Forward Threshold Adjust Min. FCH Number)..................................... 174 5.2.16 EPACAVAL (EPACA Resource Threshold)...................................................................................... 175 5.3 Reverse Load Control Parameters................................................................................................................ 176 5.3.1 REVLDCTRLSW (Reverse Load Control Algorithm Selection) ....................................................... 176 5.3.2 REVMAXUSER (Max Number of Equivalent Reverse Channels) .................................................... 177 5.3.3 LOWUSERNUM (Low User Number) .............................................................................................. 177
2009-11-6
Page 9 of 438
Internal
5.3.4 HIGH_USER_NUM (High User Number) ......................................................................................... 178 5.3.5 LOWMINTHR (Low Min. Threshold) ............................................................................................... 179 5.3.6 LOWMAXTHR (Low Max. Threshold)............................................................................................. 179 5.3.7 MIDMINTHR (Mid Min. Threshold) ................................................................................................. 180 5.3.8 MIDMAXTHR (Mid Max. Threshold)............................................................................................... 181 5.3.9 HIGHMINTHR (High Min. Threshold).............................................................................................. 181 5.3.10 HIGHMAXTHR (High Max. Threshold) ......................................................................................... 182 5.3.11 FERMINNUM (FER Stat Min. FCH Number) ................................................................................. 183 5.3.12 BADFERTHR (Bad FER Threshold)................................................................................................ 183 5.3.13 BADFERPROP (Bad FER Proportion)............................................................................................. 184 5.4 Voice Access Priority Parameters ................................................................................................................. 185 5.4.1 Parameters of Voice Access Priority Based on Walsh Codes and Other Resources ............................ 185 5.4.2 VOICEACCSW (Voice Service Access Priority Switch).................................................................... 185 5.4.3 VOICEACCALG (Voice Service Access Priority Algorithm) ............................................................ 186 5.4.4 Load-Based Voice Access Preferential Parameters ............................................................................. 187 5.4.5 FWDSTOBTHR (F-SCH To Basic Threshold)................................................................................... 187 5.5 RC3/RC4 Self-Adaptive Assignment Parameters ........................................................................................ 187 5.5.1 RCVOICESW (Voice RC Switch) ...................................................................................................... 187 5.5.2 RCDATAFCHSW (Data FCH RC Switch) ......................................................................................... 188 5.5.3 RCDATASCHSW (Data SCH RC Switch) ......................................................................................... 189 5.6 Walsh Allocation Strategy ............................................................................................................................ 190 5.6.1 WALSHALLOCATE (Walsh Allocation Strategy) ............................................................................. 190 5.7 EVRC-B ....................................................................................................................................................... 191 5.7.1 FWDDYN4GVSW (Forward COP Adjustment Switch) .................................................................... 191 5.7.2 FWDADJMINCOP (Minimum Forward COP Adjustment Value) ..................................................... 191 5.7.3 FWDADJMAXCOP (Maximum Forward COP Adjustment Value) ................................................... 192 5.7.4 FWDCOPSTATH (Forward COP Adjustment Start Threshold) ......................................................... 193 5.7.5 FWDCOPLOADSTEP (Forward COP Adjustment Load Step).......................................................... 193 5.7.6 REVDYN4GVSW (Reverse COP Adjustment Switch)...................................................................... 194 5.7.7 REVADJMINCOP (Minimum Reverse COP Adjustment Value) ....................................................... 195 5.7.8 REVADJMAXCOP (Maximum Reverse COP Adjustment Value) ..................................................... 195 5.7.9 REVCOPSTATH (Reverse COP Adjustment Start Threshold)........................................................... 196 5.7.10 REVCOPLOADSTEP (Reverse COP Adjustment Load Step) ......................................................... 197 5.8 Closing Idle Carriers .................................................................................................................................... 198 5.8.1 AUTODWNCDMACH (Support of Auto Blocking Of Carriers) ....................................................... 198 5.8.2 AUTODWNFWDEQLCHANTHD (number of equivalent FCHs threshold for the CDMA2000 1X to automatically block carriers)........................................................................................................................ 198 5.8.3 AUTODWNCOUNTTHD (count threshold for the CDMA2000 1X to automatically block carriers) ..................................................................................................................................................................... 199 5.8.4 UNBLKFWDEQLCHANTHD (number of equivalent FCHs threshold for the CDMA2000 1X to automatically unblock carriers).................................................................................................................... 200 5.8.5 TRGARFCN (target frequency sequence for automatic blocking carriers) ........................................ 200
2009-11-6
Page 10 of 438
Internal
5.8.6 STRTIME (start time of the idle time to auto-block carriers) ............................................................. 201 5.8.7 STPTIME (end time of the idle time to auto-block carriers) .............................................................. 202
6 Paging and Access Parameters................................................................................................203

6.1 Access Macro Diversity ............................................................................................................................... 203 6.1.1 ACMACRODIVSW (Access Macro Diversity Switch)...................................................................... 203 6.1.2 MBRANUMAC (Maximum Number of Access Macro Diversity Branches)..................................... 204 6.2 Access Handoff ............................................................................................................................................ 204 6.2.1 PLTRPT (Pilot Reporting Indicator) ................................................................................................... 204 6.2.2 NBRSENTRY (Neighbor Set Access Entry HO Info Included Indicator) .......................................... 205 6.2.3 NBRSETACSINF (Neighbor Set Access Handoff Information Included Indicator) .......................... 206 6.2.4 ACSHO (Access Handoff Permitted Identification) ........................................................................... 207 6.2.5 ACSPRBHO (Access Probe Handoff Permitted Identification).......................................................... 208 6.2.6 ACCHOLSTUPD (Access Handoff List Update Permitted Identification) ........................................ 209 6.2.7 MAXNUMPRBHO (Maximum Number of Access Probe Handoff Permitted) ................................. 209 6.2.8 AEHOFLG (Access Entry HO Permission) ........................................................................................ 210 6.2.9 AHOFLG (Access Handoff and Access Probe Handoff Permission).................................................. 211 6.3 Multi-Carrier Hard Assignment.................................................................................................................... 212 6.3.1 ASSALW1X (Carrier Assign Allowed Indicator of CDMA2000 1X) ................................................ 212 6.3.2 REVRSSICARRASSNSW (CDMA2000 1X Reverse RSSI Carrier Assignment Switch)................. 213 6.3.3 HARDASSIGNTYPE (CDMA2000 1X Priority Assignment Type).................................................. 214 6.3.4 ASSIGNACCFREQSW (Assign Access Frequency Switch).............................................................. 215 6.3.5 CARRASSGNVAL (Carrier Assign Threshold) ................................................................................. 216 6.3.6 MSPREVASSGNTP (Assign MS Version Priority Type) ................................................................... 216 6.3.7 SERVASSGNTP (Assign Service Priority Type) ................................................................................ 217 6.3.8 PLTPL (Pilot Priority Level)............................................................................................................... 218 6.4 Paging Message Scheduling Policy Optimization........................................................................................ 219 6.4.1 PCHRSNDSWT (PCH Resending Switch)......................................................................................... 219 6.4.2 PCHLTSWT (PCH Lifetime Switch).................................................................................................. 220 6.4.3 MSGLIVETIME (Message Live Time) .............................................................................................. 220 6.5 Extended Boundary Paging.......................................................................................................................... 222 6.6 Common Parameters on the MSC Side ........................................................................................................ 225 6.6.1 Table of Cells in Neighboring Location Areas .................................................................................... 225 6.6.2 Location Area Cell Table .................................................................................................................... 226 6.6.3 Modifying Paging Policy Data............................................................................................................ 227 6.7 Common Parameters on the BSC Side......................................................................................................... 228 6.7.1 EXTBNDPAGEMODE (Expand Boundary Page Mode) ................................................................... 228 6.7.2 STRATTIME (Start Extend Boundary Page at the N time) ................................................................ 229 6.7.3 Neighboring LAC Relation Table ....................................................................................................... 230 6.7.4 IFBORDCELL (If Border Cell) .......................................................................................................... 231 6.7.5 VIRLAC1 (Expand LAC1)/ VIRLAC2 (Expand LAC2)/ VIRLAC3 (Expand LAC3)/ VIRLAC4 (Expand LAC4)/ VIRLAC5 (Expand LAC5)/ VIRLAC6 (Expand LAC6)................................................. 232 6.8 GPM Message Combination ........................................................................................................................ 232 2009-11-6 Huawei Confidential No Spreading Without Permission Page 11 of 438
Internal
6.8.1 GPMCMBNUM (GPM Combination Number).................................................................................. 233 6.9 In-Traffic Signaling Frame Power Adjustment ............................................................................................ 234 6.9.1 FWDSIGGAIN (Forward Signal Gain) .............................................................................................. 234 6.10 Common Channel Layer-2 Acknowledgement by the BTS ....................................................................... 235 6.10.1 L2ACKCTRLSWT (Layer 2 ACK Control Switch) ......................................................................... 235 6.10.2 L2ACKRSNDNUM (Layer 2 ACK Resend Number) ...................................................................... 235 6.11 Air Interface Signaling Layer-2 Sending Mechanism ................................................................................ 236 6.11.1 ASSMODE (Assured Mode)............................................................................................................. 240 6.11.2 TRANSTIMES (Transmission Times) .............................................................................................. 241 6.11.3 TRANSINTERVAL (Transmission Interval) .................................................................................... 241 6.11.4 SIGPRIO (Signaling Priority) ........................................................................................................... 242 6.11.5 Parameter Configuration Examples in Typical Scenarios ................................................................. 242 6.12 Timers in the Access Process...................................................................................................................... 244 6.12.1 Functioning Time of the Timers........................................................................................................ 244 6.12.2 Common Timers at the BSC Side ..................................................................................................... 248 6.12.3 Timer CCM0 (CCM Waiting for Allocation Request Timer)............................................................ 248 6.12.4 Timer CCM4 (CCM Waiting for TCH PREAMBLE Sent by the FMR) .......................................... 248 6.12.5 Timer CCM5 (CCM Waiting for Response from MS) ...................................................................... 249 6.12.6 Timer CCM10 (CCM Waiting for Service Connect Complete Message) ......................................... 250 6.12.7 Timer CCM43 (CCM Waiting for Paging Response Message)......................................................... 251 6.12.8 Timer CCM49 (CCM Waiting for A9-Connect-A8 Message) .......................................................... 251 6.12.9 Timer CCM51 (CCM Waiting for A9-Update-A8 Message) ............................................................ 252 6.12.10 Timer CCM55 (CCM Waiting for BS SRV RSP Message)............................................................. 253 6.12.11 Timer PCU0 (A11-Register-Request Resending Upon Timeout).................................................... 253 6.12.12 Timer PCU1 (A11-Register-Request with Charging Information Resending Upon Timeout)........ 254 6.12.13 Timer PCU5 (Waiting for A9-BS-Service-Response)..................................................................... 255 6.12.14 Timer PCU14 (Waiting for A9-Setup-A8 Message Upon Call Activation) .................................... 255 6.12.15 Timer PCU15 (Waiting for A9-Update-A8 Message Upon Call Activation) .................................. 256
7 1X Call Drop Mechanism ........................................................................................................258

7.1 Reverse Call Drop Timer Parameters ........................................................................................................... 258 7.1.1 PTHDL (Default Path Delay from DPUS to BTS) ............................................................................. 258 7.1.2 RVWIN (BTS Rx Window Size) ........................................................................................................ 259 7.1.3 RFRCVTMRLEN (Reverse Frame Rx Timer Length) ....................................................................... 259 7.1.4 RFCMBTMRLEN (Reverse Frame Combine Timer Length)............................................................. 260 7.1.5 FCHCHKERASFRMRAT (Check Voice FCH Erasure Frame Ratio) ................................................ 261 7.1.6 FCHCHKERASFRMTHD (Check Voice FCH Erasure Frame Threshold) ........................................ 262 7.1.7 FCHCHKIDLEFRMTHD (Check FCH Idle Frame Threshold)......................................................... 262 7.1.8 FCHWAITIDLEFRMTMRLEN (Wait FCH Idle Frame Timer Length) ............................................ 263 7.1.9 SCHWAITIDLEFRMTMRLEN (Wait SCH Idle Frame Timer Length) ............................................ 264 7.1.10 FCHCHKPKTERASFRMRAT (Check Data FCH Erasure Frame Ratio) ........................................ 265 7.1.11 FCHCHKPKTERASFRMTHD (Check Data FCH Erasure Frame Threshold) ................................ 265
2009-11-6
Page 12 of 438
Internal
8 Handoff Algorithm ...................................................................................................................267

8.1 Handoff Search Parameters .......................................................................................................................... 267 8.1.1 SRCHWINA (Search Window Size for Active Set and Candidate Set).............................................. 267 8.1.2 SRCHWINN (Search Window Size for the Neighbor Set) ................................................................. 269 8.1.3 SRCHWINR (Search Window Size for the Remaining Set)............................................................... 270 8.1.4 SCHWNDADJSWT (Automatic Searching Window Adjustment Switch)......................................... 271 8.1.5 FNGRMX95 (Maximum Number of IS95 Channel Searcher) ........................................................... 271 8.1.6 FNGRMX2K (Maximum Number of IS2000 Channel Searcher) ...................................................... 272 8.1.7 PNINC (PN Code Increment) ............................................................................................................. 273 8.1.8 MAXUSRSPD (Maximum User Speed)............................................................................................. 274 8.1.9 TCHSCHWSZ (TCH Search Window Size)....................................................................................... 275 8.2 Pilot Set Decision Parameters ...................................................................................................................... 275 8.2.1 MAXSHO (Max Number of SHO Branches) ..................................................................................... 275 8.2.2 TADD (Pilot Good & Available Threshold)........................................................................................ 276 8.2.3 TDROP (Pilot Min. Available Threshold)........................................................................................... 278 8.2.4 TTDROP (Pilot Removal Timer Length) ............................................................................................ 279 8.2.5 TCOMP (Pilot Worse Threshold)........................................................................................................ 280 8.2.6 NGHBRMAXAGE (Neighbor Set Maximum AGE).......................................................................... 281 8.3 Dynamic Soft Handoff ................................................................................................................................. 282 8.3.1 SOFTSLOPE (Soft Handoff Increasing Slope Ratio) ......................................................................... 282 8.3.2 ADDINTERC (Soft Handoff Pilot Adding Intercept) ......................................................................... 284 8.3.3 DROPINTERC (Soft Handoff Pilot Removing Intercept) .................................................................. 285 8.4 Handoff Punishment..................................................................................................................................... 286 8.4.1 RRM Parameter 21 (Handoff Punishment Timer) .............................................................................. 286 8.5 Weak Coverage SHO & Drop Save.............................................................................................................. 287 8.5.1 WCSHOSW (Weak Coverage SHO Total Switch) ............................................................................. 287 8.5.2 APTSW (Adjust Power Threshold Switch)......................................................................................... 288 8.5.3 AASBNSW (Adjust Active Set Branch Number Switch) ................................................................... 289 8.5.4 AHWSW (Adjust Handoff Way Switch)............................................................................................. 289 8.5.5 AHTSW (Adjust Handoff Threshold Switch) ..................................................................................... 291 8.5.6 RRM Parameter 40 (Weak Coverage Soft Handoff Latency Timer)................................................... 291 8.5.7 RRM Parameter 42 (Weak Coverage Soft Handoff Pilot Measurement Timer) ................................. 292 8.5.8 SDSW (Save Drop Switch)................................................................................................................. 293 8.5.9 PWRADJRATE (Power Adjust Rate) ................................................................................................. 293 8.6 Handoff Control Parameters......................................................................................................................... 294 8.6.1 DSERVALWHFTYPE (Data Call Supported HO Types) ................................................................... 294 8.6.2 VHOTP (CDMA2000 1X Voice Call Supported HO Type)................................................................ 295 8.6.3 DHOTP (CDMA2000 1X Data Call Supported HO Type) ................................................................. 296 8.6.4 HHOALGSWDELAY (Hard Handoff Delay Switch) ........................................................................ 296 8.6.5 Timer of RRM Parameter 43 (Hard Handoff Delay Timer) ................................................................ 297 8.7 Hard Handoff Macro Diversity .................................................................................................................... 298 8.7.1 INTRABSCHHOSW (Intra-BSC HHO Macro Diversity Switch)...................................................... 298 2009-11-6 Huawei Confidential No Spreading Without Permission Page 13 of 438
Internal
8.7.2 INTERBSCHHOSW (Inter-BSC HHO Macro Diversity Switch) ...................................................... 299 8.7.3 HHOMAXTARGNUM (Max Number of HHO Branches) ................................................................ 300 8.8 Direct Hard Handoff..................................................................................................................................... 301 8.8.1 DHHOSW (Direct HHO Switch)........................................................................................................ 301 8.8.2 ABSTHRS (Handdown HHO EC/IO Intensity Absolute Threshold).................................................. 302 8.8.3 MAXRTD (Handdown HHO Max. Loop Delay Threshold)............................................................... 302 8.8.4 Configuration Examples ..................................................................................................................... 303 8.9 Mobile Assisted Hard Handoff..................................................................................................................... 304 8.9.1 MAHHOSW (MAHHO Switch)......................................................................................................... 304 8.9.2 TADDMAHHO (MAHHO Serving Carrier EC/IO Threshold) .......................................................... 305 8.9.3 RELTHRS (MAHHO Relative EC/IO Threshold).............................................................................. 306 8.9.4 STRTSRCHTHRS (MAHHO Start Search EC/IO Threshold) ........................................................... 307 8.9.5 STOPSRCHTHRS (MAHHO Stop Search EC/IO Threshold) ........................................................... 308 8.9.6 MAHHOTHRS (MAHHO Target Carrier EC/IO Threshold) ............................................................. 309 8.9.7 STRTSRCHRTD (MAHHO Start Search Loop Delay Threshold) ..................................................... 310 8.9.8 STOPSRCHRTD (MAHHO Stop Search Loop Delay Threshold) ..................................................... 310 8.9.9 RXRELTHRS (MAHHO MS Receiving Power Relative Threshold)................................................. 311 8.9.10 STRTSRCHRTD (MAHHO Start Search Loop Delay Threshold) ................................................... 312 8.9.11 STOPSRCHRTD (MAHHO Stop Search Loop Delay Threshold) ................................................... 313 8.10 Candidate Frequency Searching Control Parameter................................................................................... 313 8.10.1 SRVFRQECTHRS (Total Receiving Power Threshold of Serving Frequency)................................ 313 8.10.2 SRVFRQECIOTHRS (Total EC/IO Threshold of Serving Frequency) ............................................ 315 8.10.3 DRXPWRTHRS (Receiving Power Difference Threshold).............................................................. 316 8.10.4 MINPLTECIO (Min. Pilot EC/IO of Candidate Frequency) ............................................................ 317 8.10.5 CFTADD (Candidate Frequency T_ADD) ....................................................................................... 318 8.10.6 TFWAITTM (Wait Period on Candidate Frequency)........................................................................ 318 8.10.7 CFPLTINC (Pilot Pseudo Noise Code Increase Step during Candidate Frequency Search)............. 319 8.10.8 CFSRCHWINN (Neighbor Set Search Window of Candidate Frequency) ...................................... 320 8.10.9 CFSRCHWINR (Remaining Set Search Window of Candidate Frequency) .................................... 321 8.10.10 SRCHPRD (Periodic Search Period) .............................................................................................. 322 8.10.11 CFSRCHMODE (Candidate Frequency Search Mode) .................................................................. 323 8.10.12 SIGPLTSRCHTYPE (Single Pilot Search Type) ............................................................................ 324 8.10.13 Timer 33 of the RRM (Single Search Interval) ............................................................................... 324 8.10.14 Configuration Examples ................................................................................................................. 325 8.11 Pseudo-Pilot Hard Handoff ........................................................................................................................ 326 8.11.1 BEACONSW (Pilot Beacon HHO Switch)....................................................................................... 326 8.11.2 HPBFLG (Frequency Hopping and Pseudo Pilot Flag) .................................................................... 327 8.11.3 IFBCDMACH (Pilot Beacon Flag)................................................................................................... 327 8.11.4 BTYPE (Pilot Beacon Type) ............................................................................................................. 328 8.11.5 HHOBPLTEXPSW (Pseudo Pilot Hard Handoff Target Extension Switch)..................................... 329 8.11.6 TADDHHOBPLT (Pilot Beacon HHO Serving Carrier Threshold).................................................. 330 8.11.7 THHOBPLTABSTHRS (Pilot Beacon HHO Target Carrier Threshold)........................................... 331
2009-11-6
Page 14 of 438
Internal
8.11.8 THHOBPLTRELTHRS (Pilot Beacon HHO Relative Threshold) .................................................... 332 8.11.9 Configuration Examples.................................................................................................................... 333 8.12 Handdown Hard Handoff ........................................................................................................................... 335 8.12.1 HDHHOSW (Handdown HHO Switch) ........................................................................................... 335 8.12.2 ABSTHRS (Handdown HHO EC/IO Intensity Absolute Threshold)................................................ 336 8.12.3 MAXRTD (Handdown HHO Max. Loop Delay Threshold)............................................................. 337 8.12.4 NEARABSTHRS (Handdown HHO EC/IO Intensity Anomalistic Handoff Absolute Threshold) .. 339 8.12.5 MINRTD (Handdown HHO Anomalistic Handoff Min. Loop Delay Threshold)............................. 340 8.12.6 Parameter Configuration Examples in Typical Scenarios ................................................................. 341 8.13 Intra-Frequency Hard Handoff ................................................................................................................... 341 8.13.1 SFHHOSW (Same-Frequency HHO Switch) ................................................................................... 341 8.13.2 TADDHHOSF (Same-Frequency HHO Serving Carrier Threshold) ................................................ 342 8.13.3 THHOSFABSTHRS (Same-Frequency HHO Target Carrier Threshold) ......................................... 343 8.13.4 THHOSFRELTHRS (Same-Frequency HHO Relative Threshold) .................................................. 344 8.13.5 THHOSFRTD (Same-frequency HHO Max. Loop Delay Threshold) .............................................. 345 8.13.6 Parameter Configuration Examples in Typical Scenarios ................................................................. 346 8.14 Load Balancing Hard Handoff ................................................................................................................... 346 8.14.1 OLBHHOFLTHRESH (Outgoing Load Balance HHO Forward Load Threshold) .......................... 346 8.14.2 ILBHHOFLTHRESH (Incoming Load Balance HHO Forward Load Threshold)............................ 347 8.14.3 LBHHOFLRTHRESH (Load Balance HHO Forward Load Relative Threshold) ............................ 348 8.14.4 OLBHHOUNTHRESH (Outgoing Load Balance HHO User Number Threshold) .......................... 349 8.14.5 ILBHHOUNTHRESH (Incoming Load Balance HHO User Number Threshold) ........................... 349 8.14.6 LBHHOUNRTHRESH (Load Balance HHO User Number Relative Threshold) ............................ 350 8.15 Hard Handoff Based on Link Quality ........................................................................................................ 351 8.15.1 THHOLQABSTHRESH (EcIo Trigger Threshold of Link Quality HHO)....................................... 351 8.15.2 THHOLQFWDFERTHRESH (Forward FER Trigger Threshold of Link Quality HHO) ................ 352 8.15.3 THHOLQREVFERTHRESH (Reverse FER Trigger Threshold of Link Quality HHO) .................. 352 8.16 Coverage of Ultra-Remote Cells ................................................................................................................ 353 8.16.1 NSRCHWINOFFSETINC (NeighborSearchWindowOffsetIncluded) ............................................. 353 8.16.2 NSRCHWINOFFSET (NeighborSearchWindowOffset) .................................................................. 354 8.16.3 SRCHMD (Search Mode)................................................................................................................. 355 8.16.4 NBRCFGPNINCL (Neighbor Configuration and Pseudo Noise Code Offset Included).................. 356 8.16.5 FRQFLDINCL (Frequency Fields Included) .................................................................................... 357 8.16.6 USETM (Use Timing Indicator) ....................................................................................................... 357 8.16.7 SRCHOFS (Neighbor PICH Search Window Size Offset Included) ................................................ 358 8.17 Hopping Pseudo Pilot (Newly Added) ....................................................................................................... 359 8.17.1 HPBFLG (Frequency Hopping and Pseudo Pilot Flag) .................................................................... 359 8.17.2 TXONDUR (HPB Transmission Sending Time) .............................................................................. 359 8.17.3 TXOFFDUR (HPB Transmission Closing Time) ............................................................................. 361 8.18 Parameters for Handoff Message Sending Policies (Newly Added) .......................................................... 361 8.18.1 CHANTYPE (Channel Type)............................................................................................................ 361 8.18.2 MSGID1 (Message Name)................................................................................................................ 362
2009-11-6
Page 15 of 438
Internal
8.18.3 ASSMODE (Assured Mode)............................................................................................................. 364 8.18.4 TRANSINTERVAL (Transmission Times) ....................................................................................... 365 8.18.5 TRANSINTERVAL (Transmission Interval) .................................................................................... 366 8.18.6 SIGPRIO (Signaling Priority) ........................................................................................................... 366
9 1X Data Service Parameters.....................................................................................................368

9.1 SCH Rate Assignment Policy Parameters .................................................................................................... 368 9.1.1 FWDCENPLTTHRS (Forward Central Pilot Threshold)/FWDTRANPLTTHRS (Forward Transition Pilot Threshold)/FWDBDR4XPLTTHRS (Forward Border 4X Pilot Threshold)/FWDBDR2XPLTTHRS (Forward Border 2X Pilot Threshold)/FWDBDR1XPLTTHRS (Forward Border 1X Pilot Threshold)...... 368 9.1.2 Reverse 1X SCH Duration (R1XDRT)/Reverse 2x SCH Duration (R2XDRT)/Reverse 4x SCH Duration (R4XDRT)/Reverse 8x SCH Duration (R8XDRT)/Reverse 16x SCH Duration (R16XDRT)/Reverse 32x SCH Duration (R32XDRT) ................................................................................ 369 9.1.3 R1XDRT (Reverse 1X SCH Duration)/R2XDRT (Reverse 2X SCH Duration)/R4XDRT (Reverse 4X SCH Duration)/R8XDRT (Reverse 8X SCH Duration)/R16XDRT (Reverse 16X SCH Duration)/R32XDRT (Reverse 32X SCH Duration) ...................................................................................................................... 370 9.1.4 FWDMINDRT (Min. Duration of F-SCH) ......................................................................................... 372 9.1.5 FWDMAXDRT (Max. Duration of F-SCH) ....................................................................................... 372 9.1.6 FWD32XMINDRT (Min. Duration of Forward 32X SCH)................................................................ 373 9.1.7 FWD32XMAXDRT (Max. Duration of Forward 32X SCH).............................................................. 374 9.1.8 SCHRELDTXDUR (DTX Duration).................................................................................................. 374 9.1.9 SPT16XREVSCHSW (16X R-SCH Support Switch) ........................................................................ 375 9.1.10 SIGDL (SCH Signaling Delay)......................................................................................................... 376 9.1.11 FWDSTOBTHR (F-SCH to Basic Threshold).................................................................................. 376 9.2 Forward SCH Soft Handoff Parameters ....................................................................................................... 377 9.2.1 FWDSCHSHOSW (F-SCH Soft Handoff Switch) ............................................................................. 377 9.2.2 FWDSASTHR (F-SCH Soft Handoff Initial Threshold) .................................................................... 378 9.2.3 FWDSASMAXNUM (F-SCH Soft Handoff Max. Leg Number)....................................................... 379 9.3 Forward SCH Extension Parameters ............................................................................................................ 380 9.3.1 FWDSCHEXTSW (F-SCH Extension Switch) .................................................................................. 380 9.3.2 FWDSCHVARRATESW (F-SCH Variety Rate Switch)..................................................................... 380 9.4 Reverse SCH Soft Handoff Parameters........................................................................................................ 381 9.4.1 REVSCHSHOSW (R-SCH Soft Handoff Switch).............................................................................. 381 9.4.2 REVSASTHR (R-SCH Soft Handoff Judging Threshold).................................................................. 382 9.4.3 REVSASMAXNUM (R-SCH Soft Handoff Max. Leg Number) ....................................................... 383 9.5 Reverse SCH Extension Parameters............................................................................................................. 384 9.5.1 REVSCHEXTSW (R-SCH Extension Switch)................................................................................... 384 9.5.2 REVSCHEXTFOREDURSW (R-SCH Extension Forever Duration Switch) .................................... 385 9.5.3 REVSCHVARRATESW (R-SCH Variety Rate Switch) ..................................................................... 385 9.6 1X Data Service QoS Parameters................................................................................................................. 386 9.6.1 QOSFUNSW (1X Data Service QoS Function Switch)...................................................................... 386 9.6.2 GOLDFSCHRATE (FSCH Limited Rate of Gold Subscriber)/SILVERFSCHRATE (FSCH Limited Rate of Silver Subscriber)/BRONZEFSCHRATE (FSCH Limited Rate of Bronze Subscriber) ................. 387
2009-11-6
Page 16 of 438
Internal
9.6.3 GOLDRSCHRATE (RSCH Limited Rate of Gold Subscriber)/SILVERRSCHRATE (RSCH Limited Rate of Silver Subscriber)/BRONZERSCHRATE (RSCH Limited Rate of Bronze Subscriber) ................ 388 9.6.4 DATASW (Data Service Scheduler Switch) ....................................................................................... 389 9.7 1X RLP ........................................................................................................................................................ 390 9.7.1 SCHLOCKTHRESHOLD (SCH Request Threshold) ........................................................................ 390 9.7.2 SCHRETRYTIME (SCH Request Retry Interval).............................................................................. 390 9.7.3 INACTIVETIMERLEN (Active-to-Dormant Inactive Timer Duration) ............................................ 391 9.7.4 REXMITFRAMETHRESHOLD (Retransmit Frame SCH Apply Threshold) ................................... 392 9.7.5 SCHSTOPTHRESHOLD (Threshold for Stopping Extension Check on the SCH) ........................... 393 9.7.6 SCHSTOPCHECKCOUNT (Times of Stopping Extension Check on the SCH) ............................... 394 9.7.7 RLPBLOBSWTICH (RLP BLOB Switch)......................................................................................... 394 9.7.8 RTT (Estimate of Round Trip Delay Between Peer RLPs) ................................................................. 395 9.7.9 NAKROUNDSFWD (Number of NAK Rounds to Send Forward).................................................... 396 9.7.10 NAKROUNDSREV (Number of NAK Rounds to Send Reverse) ................................................... 397 9.7.11 NAKPERROUNDFWD0 (Number of 1st-Round NAKs to Send Forward)/NAKPERROUNDFWD1 (Number of 2nd-Round NAKs to Send Forward)/NAKPERROUNDFWD2 (Number of 3rd-Round NAKs to Send Forward)/NAKPERROUNDREV0 (Number of 1st-Round NAKs to Send Reverse)/NAKPERROUNDREV1 (Number of 2nd-Round NAKs to Send Reverse)/NAKPERROUNDREV2 (Number of 3rd-Round NAKs to Send Reverse) ................................. 398 9.8 Inter-BSC SCH Soft Handoff Parameters (Newly Added)........................................................................... 399 9.8.1 SCHPREV (SCH Rate Request Supported)........................................................................................ 399 9.8.2 INTERSCH (CDMA2000 1X Data Call Inter BSC SCH SHO Supported)........................................ 400
10 Service Redirection .................................................................................................................401

10.1 Service Redirection Parameters (SR_CFG) ............................................................................................... 401 10.1.1 PLTTP (Pilot Type) ........................................................................................................................... 401 10.1.2 IFCELLTP (Allow Service Redirection Based on Current Cell Type).............................................. 402 10.1.3 SRLODSWT (Redirection on Congestion Switch)........................................................................... 402 10.1.4 SRSWT1 (Redirection on Illegal MS Switch) .................................................................................. 403 10.1.5 SRSID (Target Cell System ID) ........................................................................................................ 404 10.1.6 SRNID (Target Cell Network ID) ..................................................................................................... 404 10.1.7 BNDCLS (Band Class) ..................................................................................................................... 405 10.1.8 SRFRQ1 (Service Redirection Target Channel No. 1)/SRFRQ2 (Service Redirection Target Channel No. 2)/SRFRQ3 (Service Redirection Target Channel No. 3)/SRFRQ4 (Service Redirection Target Channel No. 4)/SRFRQ5 (Service Redirection Target Channel No. 5)/SRFRQ6 (Service Redirection Target Channel No. 6) ........................................................................................................................................................... 406 10.2 GSRDM (Global Service Redirection Message)........................................................................................ 407 10.2.1 RDRCTACCOLC (Redirected Access Overload Classes)................................................................ 407 10.2.2 RETFAIL (Return if Fail Indicator) .................................................................................................. 408 10.2.3 EXCPREVMS (Exclude Redirection Indicator) ............................................................................... 409 10.2.4 RECTP (Redirection Record Type)................................................................................................... 410 10.3 EGSRDM (Extended Global Service Redirection Message) ..................................................................... 411 10.3.1 RDRCTPREVINCL (Redirection Mobile Protocol Revision Included)........................................... 411 10.3.2 EXCPREV (Excluding Mobile Protocol Revision Indicator) ........................................................... 411
2009-11-6
Page 17 of 438
Internal
10.3.3 MINRDPREV (Min. Redirection Protocol Revision)....................................................................... 412 10.3.4 MAXRDPREV (Max. Redirection Protocol Revision)..................................................................... 413
11 Performance Data Collection Function...............................................................................414

11.1 CDR Tracing .............................................................................................................................................. 414 11.1.1 BAMCDR (Whether BAM Is CDR Server)...................................................................................... 414 11.1.2 TTYPE (Tracing Type)...................................................................................................................... 415 11.1.3 BAMCFC (Abnormal Call Release Type)......................................................................................... 415 11.1.4 NBAMCFC (Call Release Type)....................................................................................................... 416 11.1.5 SWT (Call Release Type Filter Switch) ............................................................................................ 418
12 Voice Parameters .....................................................................................................................419

12.1 Voice Enhancement Parameters ................................................................................................................. 419 12.1.1 ALCEN (ALC Mode)........................................................................................................................ 419 12.1.2 FWDVGAIN (Forward Level Gain)................................................................................................. 420 12.1.3 REVVGAIN (Reverse Level Gain) .................................................................................................. 420 12.1.4 AECEN (AEC Enable Switch).......................................................................................................... 421 12.1.5 AECDL (AEC Delay) ....................................................................................................................... 422 12.1.6 AECAEBW (AEC Acoustic Echo Return Loss) ............................................................................... 422 12.1.7 EECSWITCH (EEC Switch) ............................................................................................................ 423 12.1.8 EECRETURNLOSS (EEC Return Loss).......................................................................................... 424 12.1.9 EECWORKTIME (EEC Work Time) ............................................................................................... 424 12.1.10 EVRCNSSW (EVRC Algorithm Noise Suppression Switch)......................................................... 425 12.1.11 TFOEN (TFO Enabled)................................................................................................................... 426 12.1.12 RNGBKTNDCT (Whether to Check Ring Back Tone) .................................................................. 426 12.1.13 DCTDUR (Duration of Checking Ring Back Tone) ....................................................................... 427 12.1.14 RNGTSTCFRQ (Frequency of Ring Back Tone Check) ................................................................ 428 12.1.15 RNGTSTFRQOFFSET (Pilot Offsets of the Ring Back Tone)....................................................... 429 12.1.16 NLP (Nonlinear Processor) ............................................................................................................. 429 12.1.17 TD (Tone Detection) ....................................................................................................................... 430 12.1.18 AUMD (A/mu Law Mode) ............................................................................................................. 431 12.1.19 CNGMD (CNG Mode) ................................................................................................................... 431 12.2 Service Parameters ..................................................................................................................................... 432 12.2.1 DTEN (DTMF Check Switch) .......................................................................................................... 432 12.2.2 SIGLEN (DTMF Signal Length) ...................................................................................................... 433 12.2.3 SIGHIFRQ (DTMF Sends Signal Level).......................................................................................... 434 12.2.4 TTYSWITCH (TTY Switch) ............................................................................................................ 434 12.2.5 TTYLEVEL (Baudot Level) ............................................................................................................. 435 12.2.6 TTYVOTTHRESH (TTY Voting Threshold) ................................................................................... 436 12.2.7 V110SW (V110 Switch).................................................................................................................... 436 12.2.8 CEDSW (CED Detection Switch)..................................................................................................... 437
2009-11-6
Page 18 of 438
Internal
Figures
Figure 1-1 Modifying the pilot channel gain....................................................................................................... 26 Figure 2-1 Access process ................................................................................................................................... 48 Figure 2-2 Access channel request and response attempt.................................................................................... 49 Figure 2-3 Calculation of P ................................................................................................................................. 52 Figure 3-1 Forward channel ................................................................................................................................ 88 Figure 4-1 Power adjustment............................................................................................................................. 101 Figure 4-2 Relation between the Eb/Nt and the FER when the MS is still in the lab........................................ 119 Figure 4-3 Relation between the power of reverse channels ............................................................................. 135 Figure 4-4 Relation between the Eb/Nt and FER in a lab environment. ........................................................... 137 Figure 6-1 Procedure for processing extended paging ...................................................................................... 223 Figure 6-2 Extended paging service procedure (focused on the part of paging) ............................................... 224 Figure 1-1 Extended paging service procedure (focused on the part of paging) ............................................... 224 Figure 1-1 Timers in the calling access process in the CS domain.................................................................... 244 Figure 1-2 Timers in the called access process in the CS domain ..................................................................... 245 Figure 1-3 Timers in the calling access process in the PS domain .................................................................... 246 Figure 1-4 Timers in the called access process in the PS domain ..................................................................... 247 Figure 1-1 MS search center ............................................................................................................................. 270 Figure 1-1 Typical soft handoff process ............................................................................................................ 277 Figure 1-1 Parameter TCOMP triggering PSMM messages ............................................................................. 281 Figure 1-1 Typical dynamic threshold SHO process ......................................................................................... 283 Figure 1-1 Condition of sending PSMMs when the dynamic threshold is enabled on the MS ......................... 285 Figure 1-1 RTD measurement by the BTS ........................................................................................................ 339
2009-11-6
Page 19 of 438
Internal
Tables
Table 2-1 Preferred MS IDs................................................................................................................................. 41 Table 2-2 Functions of variables.......................................................................................................................... 49 Table 2-3 Values of the zone timer ...................................................................................................................... 72 Table 3-1 Relations between the bandwidth gain and the output power.............................................................. 89 Table 3-2 Quick paging channel power offset ..................................................................................................... 95 Table 3-3 Channel gains recommended by Qualcomm ....................................................................................... 97 Table 4-1 Qualcomm suggestion ......................................................................................................................... 99 Table 4-2 Power offsets of the R-SCH related to the R-PICH........................................................................... 150 Table 4-3 Target FERs at different rates ............................................................................................................ 154 Table 5-1 Mapping relations between Ec/Ior and the basic threshold when the PICH gain is -7 dB................. 170 Table 1-1 Modes, resending times, and resending intervals of signaling messages .......................................... 236 Table 1-2 Modes, resending times, resending intervals and signaling priority of signaling messages.............. 237 Table 1-1 Search window size........................................................................................................................... 268 Table 1-1 Mapping between the parameter values and Doppler bins................................................................ 274 Table 1-1 Actual expiration time corresponding to the values of TDROPTIMER............................................ 279 Table 1-1 Mapping between the parameter values and periods......................................................................... 322 Table 1-1 Search mode and values .................................................................................................................... 323 Table 1-1 Offset values corresponding to the offset indexes............................................................................. 354 Table 1-1 Relations between the bits, access overload classes, and IMSIs ....................................................... 408 Table 1-1 Redirection record type ..................................................................................................................... 410
2009-11-6
Page 20 of 438
Internal
1
1.1 Introduction to This Document
1.1.1 Scope 1.1.2 Intended Audience
Preface
This document describes the functions of performance parameters related to Huawei CDMA2000 1X cBSS system. It provides the description, type, related commands, value range, default value, setting tradeoff, and remarks on each parameter. It also provides configuration examples of some parameters.
This document is intended for Huawei engineers who are familiar with the basic concepts of the CDMA2000 system. It serves as a reference for parameter configuration and reconfiguration or a manual for training.
1.1.3 Organization
This document describes the performance parameters of the 1X system. It contains 12 chapters. Section 1 Preface 2 Basic System Parameters 3 Forward Power Distribution Parameters 4 Power Estimation and Control Parameters Describes The purpose, intended audience, and organization of this document. The parameters related to the synchronization channel, paging channel, and access channel. The parameters related to power configuration of channels. The parameters related to forward and reverse power control algorithms, initial power estimation of the forward SCH, and closed-loop power control of the reverse SCH. The parameters related to access load control, forward load control, reverse load control, and preferential access of voice service.
5 Load Control and Management Parameters
2009-11-6
Page 21 of 438
Internal
Section 6 Paging and Access Parameters
Describes The parameters related to performance algorithms (such as access macro diversity, access handoff, multi-carrier hard assignment, and optimized scheduling of paging messages) used during the paging and access process. reverse power control algorithms. The parameters related to the reverse call drop timer. The parameters related to soft and hard handoff algorithms, pilot pollution, and absent configuration of neighboring cells. The parameters related to key RRM algorithms (such as SCH rate assignment, forward and reverse SCH soft handoff, forward and reverse SCH extension, and QoS) of data services. The parameters related to redirection and extended redirection. The parameters related to tracking of CDRs. The parameters related to the voice enhancement functions and services.
7 1X Call Drop Mechanism 8 Handoff Algorithm
9 1X Data Service Parameters
10 Service Redirection 11 Performance Data Collection Function 12 Voice Parameters
1.1.4 References
[1]. Upper Layer (Layer 3) Signaling Standard for cdma2000 Spread Spectrum Systems TIA/EIA/IS-2000-5 ,Ballot Resolution Version 1.06Version Date: July 11, 1999 [2]. Physical Layer Standard for cdma2000 Standards for Spread Spectrum Systems TIA/EIA/IS-2000-2 [3]. CSM5000?Parameter Settings Guidelines for Software Release 2.2 Commercial 80-V1282-1 X5 April 5, 2001 [4]. CSM5000?Forward-Link Power Settings Application Note 80-V0119-8 X4 April 4, 2001 [5]. CDMA2000 BSC RRMdB Data Configuration 020207 by Algorithm Development Division [6]. CDMA2000 BSC ALG Service Resource Management Specifications by Algorithm Development Division, 2000.07.28 [7]. Introduction to the C2k System Messages from CDMA2000 BSC Training Documents [8]. Research on CDMA2000 System Forward Capacity, by Coverage and Capacity Division, 2002.03.29 [9] . CDMA2000 BTS3612-800 V100R001 Configuration Script [10]. Basic Principles to Apply the Wireless Resource Management Algorithms, by Algorithms and Parameters Division, 2002.05.16
2009-11-6
Page 22 of 438
Internal
[11]. CDMA2000 Power Control Parameter Configuration Proposals, by Algorithms and Parameters Division [12]. CDMA2000 Power Control Air Interface Parameters, by Xia Bin from Algorithms and Parameters Division, 2002.4.29 [13]. CDMA2000 Channel Assignment and Load Control Parameter Configuration Proposals, by Algorithms and Parameters Division, 2002.5.27 [14]. Configuration of the Forward Channel Gain of the ETS450D BTS, 2002.12.16 [15]. CBSC Service Data Configuration Guide V1.231, 2003 [16]. CDMA Quick Paging Guide, by Maintenance Division, 2003.1 [17]. CBTS3612 V100R001B02D008 Service Configuration and Operation Guide V1.0 [18]. CDMA2000 1X Data Service Optimization Guide [19]. CDMA2000 1X Load Control Guide [20]. CDMA2000 1X Paging Optimization Guide [21]. CDMA2000 1X Access Guide
1.2 Conventions and Descriptions

This document is applicable to V300R006C08 of the BSC. This document is based on CDMA Performance Parameters (1X) V3.2. In this document, parameters related to new algorithms of cBSC/cBTS V300R006C08 are added, and parameters that are different from those of cBSC/CBTS V3R1 are modified. This document is subject to the latest technical recommendations and notifications. The following describes the modules in this document:
Chapter Name: provides a classification of parameters based on functions. For example, parameters described in chapter "Forward Load Control" are related to forward power control. Parameter Name: provides the name of a parameter described in the Help of the Service Maintenance System. Description: describes the function of the parameter. Type: describes the type of the parameter, for example, internal algorithm parameter and air interface parameter. The system messages that contains an air interface parameter are also described. Related Commands: lists the commands that are used to modify or query the parameter. Value Range: lists the value range of the parameter. The value range is closely related to the specific data structure used by the parameter. The recommended value ranges of some parameters are also listed. Default Value: lists the value that is applicable to most cases (not any cases). The default value is determined according to setting tradeoff and actual situations. Setting Tradeoff: describes the effects of a high or low value beyond the recommended range. Remarks: introduces the background information of the parameter.

2009-11-6
Page 23 of 438

Internal
Configuration Example: provides configuration examples of multiple parameters in different situations. The examples must not be directly copied into commands for parameter modification.
1.3 Acronyms and Abbreviations

Acronym or Abbreviation BTS BSC CDMA ECAM Ec/Io EIB ESCAM FCH FER FMR FW TFC MS OMU PMRM RC Rx RV TFC SCH SCCH SPU SDU Tx Description Base Transceiver System Base Station Controller Code Division Muti Access Extended Channel Assignment message Pilot energy accumulated over one PN chip period (Ec) to the total power spectral density (Io) in the received bandwidth Erase Indication Bit Extended Supplemental Channel Assignment Message Fundamental Channel Frame Error Ratio Frame Processing Board Forward Traffic Channel Mobile Station Operation Maintenance Unit Power Measurement Report Message Radio configuration Received Power Reverse Traffic Channel Supplemental Channel Supplemental Code Channel Signal Processing Unit Selection/Distribution Unit Transmit Power
2009-11-6
Page 24 of 438
Internal
1.4 Introduction to IDs Used in the Network

1.4.1 MSCID
The definition of MSCID is provided in section 6.5.2.82 of the D interface TIA/EIA-41.5-D protocol. MSCID is composed of MarketID (2 bytes) and SwitchNo (1 byte). According to the TIA/EIA TSB29 protocol, MarketID is defined by operators. It can be SID or any other ID that identifies the operator. SwitchNo is the ID of a set of cell addresses and circuit resources that are associated with MarketID. For example, China Unicom uses SID as MarketID. SwitchNo is a value related to the exchanger. In some cases, the value of SwitchNo is equal to NID at the BSC side. According to Table 6-1 of the TIA/EIA TSB29 protocol, SID is divided into segments, among which the segments (decimal notation) for China are 13568 to 14335, and 25600 to 26111. The first two bytes of MSCID provided by the telecom operators must be within the two segments.
1.4.2 Entity ID
Entity ID is the identity of the entity that generates the Call Connect Reference (CCR). In this document, it is used to identify the BSC.
1.4.3 LACODE
LACODE is the code of the location where the MS resides. Paging messages are sent to the MS according to LACODE. For example, if MS1 is located in LACODE_1, paging messages are forwarded by all the BTSs in LACODE_1 to MS1.
1.4.4 REG_ZONE
REG_ZONE is the code of a registration zone. It is included in NID, that is, an NID contains one or more REG_ZONEs. A registration zone is identified by SID, NID, and REG_ZONE. If zone based registration is enabled, location update is performed when the MS moves from one area to another. For details, see the SPM table described in later sections.
1.4.5 SID
SID is the identity of the system. In versions earlier than R001B02D405, SID, NID, and PZID are system-level parameters and are assigned to the BSC. In R001B02D405 and later versions, SID, NID, and PZID are sector-level parameters and are stored in the CELL table.
1.4.6 NID
NID is the identity of the network. Multiple NIDs can be included in an SID. But this may affect the roaming experience of MSs.
1.4.7 PZID
PZID identifies a PCF in a system. An MS in dormant state initiates a dormant handoff when it detects any changes in PZID.
2009-11-6
Page 25 of 438
Internal
1.4.8 CellId, SectorId, and Bts_Id

CellId and SectorId are used to identify a sector. Cell Identifier, which is described in the protocol, is composed of CellId (12 bits) and SectorId (4 bits). For example, if CellId is 10 and SectorId is 0, then Cell Identifier is 0xa0, that is, 160. Bts_id is used only in BSC scripts. It is associated with BTS scripts. For settings of CellId, SectorId, and Bts_Id that meet requirements of other manufacturers, see the Guide to Cooperation with Motorola and the Indoor Coverage Guide.
1.4.9 CGI
CGI uniquely identifies a cell globally. It is composed of MCC, MNC, LAC, and CI. MCC is the mobile country code. The MCC for China is 460. MNC is the mobile network code. It is provided by the operator. LAC is the location area code. It is planned by the operator and is used to define a group of cells. CI is the cell identifier. It is composed of CellId (12 bits) and SectorId (4 bits).
1.5 Modification of Parameters

1.5.1 Modification of Basic Parameters
Basic parameters can be added, queried, modified, and deleted on the Service Maintenance System. For example, to modify the pilot channel gain, input the MOD PLTCH command, and then modify the pilot channel gain, as shown in Figure 1-1. Figure 1-1 Modifying the pilot channel gain
2009-11-6
Page 26 of 438
Internal
2
2.1.1 LPSEC
Description
Basic System Parameters
2.1 Synchronization Channel Parameters
This parameter specifies the period of time (measured in seconds) elapsed after the system clock starts. The value of this parameter is fixed within a year. It indicates how much time the GPS time is faster than the actual earth time. The BTS clock module automatically adjusts the value of this parameter according to received satellite signals. Configurations of this parameter on the BSC or the maintenance console are invalid or unavailable. Other similar parameters include LCSTATE and SYSTIME in the SCHM message.
2.1.2 PRAT (Paging Channel Rate)

Description
This parameter specifies the paging channel rate of sector level. Modification of this parameter requires re-allocation of the power on the PCH. For details, see 3.4 "Paging Channel Gain Parameters."
Type
Air interface parameter (SCHM). Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
MOD SCHM LST SYSMSGPARA: CCMINF=SCHM;
Value Range
BPS9600/BPS4800.
Default Value
9600.
2009-11-6
Page 27 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
This parameter is set according to the capacity of the PCH and the requirement on service capacity of the forward link. If this parameter is set to 9600 bit/s, partial capacity of the forward link is sacrificed to increase the capacity of the PCH. If this parameter is set to 4800 bit/s, the capacity of the PCH decreases, and the capacity of the forward link increases.
Remarks
To reduce the power consumption of the PCH, you can decrease the rate of the PCH when you increase the power of the pilot channel. This can reduce the effects of increased power of the common channel on the forward capacity of the system. When you decrease the rate of the PCH, ensure that the capacity of the PCH meet the requirement. For details, see related operation guides.
2.1.3 CDMABSN (CDMA Channel No.)

Description
This parameter specifies the number of the CDMA channel that corresponds to the frequency used by a carrier.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 2047.
Default Value
This parameter is configured according to the frequency point of the carrier used by an IS95 MS. If the frequency point of the carrier used by an IS95 or IS2000 MS is not specified, this parameter can be configured to any normal frequency point of the carrier of the sector.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
This parameter together with BAND_CLASS determines the central frequency of CDMA carriers. This parameter is named CDMABSN (CDMA channel number) on the Service Maintenance System.
2009-11-6
Page 28 of 438
Internal
2.1.4 EXTCDMABSN (Extended CDMA Channel No.)

Description
This parameter specifies the number of the extended CDMA channel that corresponds to the frequency used by a carrier. This parameter is available to IS2000 MSs.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 2047.
Default Value
This parameter is configured according to the frequency point of the carrier used by an IS2000 MS. If the frequency point of the carrier used by an IS95 or IS2000 MS is not specified, this parameter can be configured to any normal frequency point of the carrier of the sector.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
This parameter together with BAND_CLASS determines the central frequency of CDMA carriers.
2.1.5 LOCTMOFF (Local Time Offset)

Description
This parameter specifies the offset of the local time to the Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). China is located at GMT+8, which has an offset of 32 to the GMT. Therefore, set this parameter to LF48 on the Service Maintenance System. Some countries still use the daylight saving time. If the Qualcomm chip does not use this parameter to enable the daylight saving time, modify LTM_OFF to enable the daylight saving time. For example, to apply daylight saving time at GMT+8, one hour is faster than the usual time. Therefore, set LTM_OFF to LF50 (namely, GMT+9) on the Service Maintenance System.
2009-11-6
Page 29 of 438
Internal
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
LF8 to LF56. The offsets of different time zones are:

LF8-8(GMT12:00) LF10-10(GMT11:00) LF12-12(GMT10:00) LF14-14(GMT09:00) LF16-16(GMT08:00) LF18-18(GMT07:00) LF20-20(GMT06:00) LF22-22(GMT05:00) LF24-24(GMT04:00) LF26-26(GMT03:00) LF28-28(GMT02:00) LF30-30(GMT01:00) LF32-32(GMT+00:00) LF34-34(GMT+01:00) LF36-36(GMT+02:00) LF38-38(GMT+03:00) LF40-40(GMT+04:00) LF42-42(GMT+05:00) LF44-44(GMT+06:00) LF46-46(GMT+07:00) LF48-48(GMT+08:00) LF50-50(GMT+09:00) LF52-52(GMT+10:00) LF54-54(GMT+11:00) LF56-56(GMT+12:00)
Default Value
LF48 (GMT+08:00).
2009-11-6
Page 30 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
This parameter is set according to the time zone where the system is located.
Remarks
None.
2.2 Paging Channel Parameters

2.2.1 PAGECHAN (Paging Channel Number)
Description
In the current version, this parameter does not have a parameter ID in the commands of the Service Maintenance System. When a sector carrier is added to the BSC, this carrier automatically obtains a primary PCH. To add other PCHs to this carrier, run the ADD PCH command.
Type
Air interface parameter (SPM). Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
ADD PCH / RMV PCH LST CMFINF: CMFINF=PCH;
Value Range
1 to 7.
Default Value
1.
Setting Tradeoff
This parameter is set according to the capacity of a PCH. Generally, the parameter is set to 1. If the capacity of a half-rate PCH is insufficient, increase the rate of the PCH first. If the capacity of a half-rate PCH is insufficient, add PCHs. If PCHs are added, more code resources are assigned to the PCHs, thus affecting the assignment of SCHs.
Remarks
Adding or deleting PCHs results in reset of carriers. Therefore, perform such operations when the traffic is low.
2009-11-6
Page 31 of 438
Internal
2.2.2 MAXTSPRDIDX (Max Slot Cycle Index)

Description
This parameter specifies the maximum slot cycle index when the PCH uses timeslot mode. The timeslot cycle is equal to 1.28 * 2^ i. The SLOTCYCLEINDEXF parameter configured on the MS is the preferred slot cycle index of the MS. The actual timeslot cycle index (i) is the smaller value between MAXTSPRDIDX and SLOTCYCLEINDEXF.
Type
Related Commands
MOD SPM LST SYSMSGPARA: CCMINF=SPM;
Value Range
0 to 7.
Default Value
1.
Setting Tradeoff
If this parameter is set to an excessively low value, the delay in call setup decreases, but the MS consumes more power and its standby time is shortened. If this parameter is set to an excessively high value, the delay in call setup increases, but the MS consumes less power.
Remarks
The configuration of the timeslot cycle must match the time interval when the MSC sends paging messages. For example, when the maximum paging cycle index is 2, and the corresponding timeslot cycle is 5.12 second, MSs may fail to receive some paging messages if the time interval when the MSC sends paging messages is 5 second. Thus, the paging success rate of the BSC is affected. In this case, the time interval when the MSC sends paging messages can be set to a value higher than 1.28 * 2^ i (for example, 7 second). Other vendors that set the maximum slot cycle index to 2 include Motorola.
2.2.3 MAXALTSRV (Max Number of Alternative Service Options)

Description
This parameter specifies the maximum number of alternative service options that can be chosen by the MS in the origination messages and paging response messages.
2009-11-6
Page 32 of 438
Internal
Type
Air interface parameter (ESPM). Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
MOD ESPM LST SYSMSGPARA: CCMINF=ESPM;
Value Range
0 to 7.
Default Value
1.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
2.2.4 RESELINCL (System Reselection Parameters Included Indicator)

Description
This parameter determines whether the system reselection parameters are contained in messages. If this parameter is set to 1, system reselection parameters are contained. If this parameter is set to 0, system reselection parameters are not contained.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
YES (contained), or NO (not contained).
2009-11-6
Page 33 of 438
Internal
Default Value
NO.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
2.2.5 BCGPSAUG (Broadcast GPS Assist Indicator)

Description
This parameter determines whether the broadcast GPS assist function is supported. If this parameter is set to 1 on the BTS, the broadcast GPS assist function is supported. If this parameter is set to 0 on the BTS, the broadcast GPS assist function is not supported.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
YES (supported), or NO (not supported).
Default Value
NO.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
2009-11-6
Page 34 of 438
Internal
2.2.6 CCISPT (QPCH CCI Support Indicator)

Description
This parameter determines whether QPCH CCI is supported. In current versions, the QPCH_SUPPORTED parameter is configured by configuring the number of QPCHs. If the number of QPCHs is 0, this parameter is set to NO. If the number of QPCHs is not 0, this parameter is set to YES. If more QPCHs need to be added, ensure that the MSC supports the QPCH function and that another table is configured at the BSC side.
Type
Related Commands
MOD QPCH LST SYSMSGPARA: CCMINF=QPCH;
Value Range
YES, or NO.
Default Value
YES.
Setting Tradeoff
To support QPCHs, set this parameter to YES.
Remarks
If the QPCH is not available, the MS monitors the PCH in a cycle of 1.28s x 2(max_cycle_slot) seconds when it uses timeslot mode. If the QPCH is available, the MS monitors the QPCH in the same cycle as the MS monitors the PCH. By monitoring 1 bit (2 bits in practice due to retransmission) on the QPCH, the MS determines if there is a paging message for itself. If there is a paging message, the MS turns to the PCH at the next paging channel timeslot to receive the paging message. If the QPCH is not available, the MS must monitor the PCH for a minimum of one paging channel timeslot (80 ms) in each cycle. Therefore, the MS consumes less power and has longer standby time if the QPCH is used. For details on versions that support the QPCH, the method for using the QPCH, and the method for checking whether the MS monitors the QPCH, see the Guide to CDMA Quick Paging. Some MSs in default configuration may not support the QPCH. You can enable the QPCH on the MSs manually.
2009-11-6
Page 35 of 438
Internal
2.2.7 SDBSUPPORTED (Short Data Burst Support Flag)

Description
This parameter specifies the flag that indicates whether short data burst is supported.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
YES, or NO.
Default Value
NO
Setting Tradeoff
If the SDB can be sent on the common channel, this parameter is set to YES.
Remarks
None.
2.2.8 ECTHRS (Pilot Min Power Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the ECTHRESH in the ESPM message. This parameter is available when RESLECT_INCLUDE is set to 1. If Rx + 10 log10 (PS) < EC_THRESH 115, the conditions for reselecting the power threshold are met.
Type
Air interface (ESPM). Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
2009-11-6
Page 36 of 438
Internal
Value Range
0 to 31.
Default Value
31.
Setting Tradeoff
If the value of RESLECT_INCLUDE is 0, the parameters are not used for reselection. If the reselection function is enabled, that is, RESLECT_INCLUDE is 1, ECTHRESH is calculated according to the formula listed in the remarks.
Remarks
This describes the reselection mechanism when RESELECT_INCLUDE is 1. If the MS supports multiple operating modes (such as CDMA, analog, and multiple CDMA frequencies), or if the neighboring set/remaining set contains pilots on frequencies different from the current frequency, the MS implements system reselection according to the following principles: If RESELECT_INCLUDED = 1 (1), And 20 x log10 (Ec/Io) > ECIOTHRESH (2), And pilot_power < ECTHRESH 115 (3), the MS enters the System Determination Substate of the initialization state. Inequation (2) indicates that the pilot strength of the active set is below a threshold. Generally, the pilot strength (for example, the pilot strength of PN1 is 10dB) is 10 x log10 (Ec/Io) = 10 dB. The unit of ECIOTHRESH is 0.5 dB. Therefore, the real Ec/Io is ECIOTHRESH/2. The actual meaning that inequation (2) indicates is: 10 x log10 (Ec/Io) <ECIOTHRESH/2 For example, if ECIOTHRESH is 20 and the pilot strength of the active set of the MS is below 10 dB, inequation (2) is satisfied. Inequation (3) indicates that when the pilot power is below a threshold, pilot_power (dBm/1.23 MHz) = 10 x log10 (PS) (dB) + RX(dBm/1.23 MHz). 10 x log10 (PS) is the pilot strength of the active set. RXmean input power is the average receive power. Then, inequation (3) is equivalent to: 10 x log10 (PS) (dB) + RX (dBm/1.23 MHz) < ECTHRESH 115 115 is an offset of ECTHRESH. If the pilot strength of the active set is 5 dB and Rx is 85 dBm, then pilot_power is 90 dBm. If EC_THRESH is 30 and EC_THRESH 115 = 85 dBm, inequation (3) is satisfied.
2009-11-6
Page 37 of 438
Internal
2.2.9 ECIOTHRS (Pilot Min EC/IO Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the ECIOTHRESH in the ESPM message. This parameter is available when RESLECT_INCLUDE is set to 1. If 20 x log10 (Ec/Io) > ECIOTHRESH, the conditions for reselecting the Ec/Io are met. For details, see the remarks of ECTHRESH.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 31
Default Value
20
Setting Tradeoff
If the value of RESLECT_INCLUDE is 0, the parameters are not used for reselection.
Remarks
None.
2.2.10 BSLAT (Base Latitude)

Description
This parameter specifies the latitude where the BTS is located. This parameter is input in the format of degree&minute&second, where + presents north latitude, presents south latitude, and the minimum unit of second is 0.25 second.
Type
Related Commands
MOD CELL
2009-11-6
Page 38 of 438
Internal
LST SYSMSGPARA: CCMINF=SPM;
Value Range
Range of the latitude.
Default Value
This parameter is set according to the actual latitude of the BTS.
Setting Tradeoff
An accurate latitude of the BTS is recommended, which is required in the detection of absent neighboring cells in the current version. If the accurate value cannot be obtained, this parameter should be disabled.
Remarks
On the Service Maintenance System, run the SAV CBTSLONGLAT command to obtain the latitude and longitude information of the BTS from the clock module. The latitude and longitude information is automatically written to the BSC database.
2.2.11 BSLONG (Base Longitude)

Description
This parameter specifies the longitude where the BTS is located. This parameter is input in the format of degree&minute&second, where + presents east longitude, presents west longitude, and the minimum unit of second is 0.25 second.
Type
Related Commands
MOD CELL LST SYSMSGPARA: CCMINF=SPM;
Value Range
Range of the longitude.
Default Value
This parameter is set according to the actual longitude of the BTS.
2009-11-6
Page 39 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
An accurate longitude of the BTS is recommended, which is required in the detection of absent neighboring cells in the current version. If the accurate value cannot be obtained, this parameter should be disabled.
Remarks
On the Service Maintenance System, run the SAV CBTSLONGLAT command to obtain the latitude and longitude information of the BTS from the clock module. The latitude and longitude information is automatically written to the BSC database.
2.2.12 DELFORTMSI (Delete Foreign TMSI)

Description
This parameter determines whether the MS deletes the TMSI contained in the TMSI ZONE. This parameter is permanently set to YES, indicating that the MS deletes the TMSI.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
YES, or NO
Default Value
YES
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
2.2.13 USETMSI (User TMSI Flag)

Description
This parameter determines whether the TMSI is supported.
2009-11-6
Page 40 of 438
Internal
Table 2-1 Preferred MS IDs USETMSI (bin) 0 0 0 1 1 PREFMSIDTYPE (bin) '00' '10' '11' '10' '11' Description IMSI_S and ESN IMSI IMSI and ESN TMSI (valid allocated TMSI) IMSI (unallocated TMSI) TMSI (valid allocated TMSI) IMSI and ESN (unallocated TMSI) Other values are reserved.
Type
Related Commands
MOD A41SPM LST SYSMSGPARA: CCMINF=A41SPM;
Value Range
YES, or NO.
Default Value
NO.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
This parameter is not contained in the commands on the Service Maintenance System.
2.2.14 PMSIDTP (Preferred ACH MS ID Type)

Description
This parameter specifies the preferred MS ID type. IMSI and ESN are used to identify an MS.
2009-11-6
Page 41 of 438
Internal
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 3. See PREFMSIDTYPE in the table of preferred MS IDs.
Default Value
3
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
2.2.15 BCMD (Broadcast Mode)

Description
This parameter specifies the broadcast mode (multi-timeslot mode or periodical broadcast mode) of the paging channel. When the mobile station is operating in the slotted mode and monitoring the paging channel, the BTS should send the broadcast message by using either of the multi-timeslot mode or the broadcast mode. Currently, the BSS only supports the multi-timeslot mode.
Type
Air interface parameter (BCASTINDEX field (Broadcast slot cycle index) in the ESPM message). Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
MOD PCH LST CMFINF: CMFINF=PCH;
Value Range
Multi-timeslot mode, or periodical broadcast mode.
2009-11-6
Page 42 of 438
Internal
Default Value
Multi-timeslot mode.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
When using this multi-timeslot mode, the BTS sends the broadcast message in sufficient consecutive paging time slots. In this way, the broadcast messages can be received by any MS that is operating in the slotted mode. For example, the BTS may send the broadcast message in the slots of a maximum paging cycle. To deliver a broadcast message in periodical broadcast mode, the BTS performs following actions:
If multiple broadcast messages are waiting for transmission and their number and size can be sent in a single slot, the BTS should send the broadcast messages in the first slot of the next broadcast paging cycle (see BCASTINDEX). If one broadcast message is waiting for transmission, the BTS should send the broadcast message in the first slot of the next broadcast paging cycle (see BCASTINDEX).
Otherwise, the BTS generates a broadcast paging in the GPM for each broadcast message. The GPM is sent through the first time slot in the next broadcast paging cycle. The BTS should then send all broadcast messages in the paging slots that are defined in the GPM. Broadcast page is an indication. It specifies the timeslot that is sent by broadcast message. The MS determines if it should receive the message related to the broadcast page according to the burst type and broadcast address contained in the message. The broadcast message, rather than the GPM, contains the significant data.
2.2.16 BCASEINDEX (Broadcast Slot Cycle Index)

Description
If the periodic broadcast paging is allowed, this parameter is used to identify the broadcast time slot cycle index. The value range is 1 to 7. If periodic broadcast paging is prohibited, this parameter is set to 0. Broadcast period = 1.28 * 2^ i + 0.24.
Type
Air interface parameter (ESPM/MCRRPM). Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 7. 0 indicates that the periodic broadcast paging is prohibited.
2009-11-6
Page 43 of 438
Internal
Default Value
0.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
The function of this parameter is similar to that of the MAXSLOTCYCLEINDEX parameter, except that this parameter is used only for broadcasting of messages, such as, broadcasting short messages. For common control channel, broadcast paging cycle index is received through MC RR parameter message. The corresponding broadcast cycle = 1.28 * 2^ i + 0.24.
2.2.17 IMSITSPT (IMSI_T Support Indicator)

Description
This parameter is not used currently. If this parameter is set to YES, 15-digit IMSI_T is supported.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
YES, or NO.
Default Value
NO
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
2009-11-6
Page 44 of 438
Internal
2.2.18 PZID (Packet Zone ID)

Description
This parameter specifies the packet zone ID. If packet services are supported, the BTS sets this parameter to a non-zero value that indicates the packet zone ID. If packet services are not supported, the BTS sets this parameter to 0.
Type
Related Commands
MOD CELL LST CELL
Value Range
0 to 255
Default Value
This parameter is set according to actual situations.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
2.2.19 RESCAN (Rescan Indicator)

Description
If this parameter is set to 1, the MS reselects the system after receiving the message. If the MS still uses this sector carrier to access the network after rescanning sector carriers but this message is still transmitted through the paging channel, the MS rescans sector carriers again. This parameter is originally designed for the AMPS system. This parameter is effective only when the contents of sync channel message change.
Type
2009-11-6
Page 45 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
Value Range
YES, or NO.
Default Value
NO
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
2.2.20 RCQPCHSELINCL (RC and QPCH Selection Included Indicator)

Description
This parameter determines whether the RC and QPCH selections are included. If the number of RC_QPCH_CAP_INDs is the value of NUM_FREQ, this parameter is set to 1 on the BTS. If the number of RC_QPCH_CAP_INDs is not the value of NUM_FREQ, this parameter is set to 0 on the BTS. If the QPCH is used, this parameter must be set to 1.
Type
Air interface parameter (ECCLM). Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
MOD ECCLM: SUBITEM=CRR_CLASS, RCQPCHSRCH=YES; LST SYSMSGPARA: CCMINF=ECCLM;
Value Range
YES, or NO.
Default Value
YES
2009-11-6
Page 46 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
2.2.21 RCQPCHSRCH (Search RC_QPCH Channel Indicator)

Description
This parameter specifies the RC_QPCH HASH indicator. If RCQPCHSELINCL is set to 1, the number of times that the BTS includes this field must be the value of NUM_FREQ, and this field must be set as the following described. If RCQPCHSELINCL is not set to 1, the BTS ignores this field. If CDMA_FREQ is included in the HASH list of MSs that support RC > 2 or the QPCH, set this parameter to 1. If CDMA_FREQ is not included in the HASH list of MSs that support RC > 2 or the QPCH, set this parameter to 0. When extended CDMA channel list messages are sent on the broadcast control channel, and CDMA_FREQ is included in the HASH list of MS supporting quick paging, set this field to 1.
Type
Air interface parameter (ECCLM). Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
MOD ECCLM LST SYSMSGPARA: CCMINF=ECCLM;
Value Range
YES, or NO.
Default Value
YES
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
2.3 Access Channel Parameters

Figure 2-1 shows the access process.
2009-11-6 Huawei Confidential No Spreading Without Permission Page 47 of 438
Internal
Figure 2-1 Access process
2009-11-6
Page 48 of 438
Internal
Figure 2-2 Access channel request and response attempt
Table 2-2 describes the functions of variables shown in Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-2. Table 2-2 Functions of variables Variable IP Description Initial open loop control power Persistent delay Power increase of two adjacent probes Access channel number Relation IP = 73 Mean Input Power (dBm) + NOMPWR +INITPWR The delay persists until the pseudo persistence test is successful. PI = PWRSTEP Value Range See the Access Parameter Table. Unit dBm
PD
Time slot dB
PI
0 to 7
RA
Random number among 0 to ACC_CHAN (name of the variable of the product) (number of access channels), which is generated at the front of the sequence
0 to 31
2009-11-6
Page 49 of 438
Internal
Variable RN
Description PN random delay
Relation Hash using ESN between 0 and 2PROBE_PN_RAN 1; generated once at beginning of attempt. Random number among 0 to (1 + BKOFF), which is generated at the front of the probe sequence, except the first one. Random number among 0 to (1 + probe_bkoff), which is generated at the front of the continuous probes. TA = 80* (2 + ACCTMO);
Value Range 0 to 511
Unit Chip
RS
Sequence delay
0 to 16
Time slot
RT
Probe delay
0 to 16
Time slot
TA
Response timeout
0 to 16
80 ms
2.3.2 PWRCSTEP (Power Increment)

Description
This parameter specifies the power increases for two sequential access probes, Actual increased transmit power = Times of access attempts x Access power increment step. In a good radio environment, for example, in the cells in the open areas, the power increment can be small because the MS access power is stable. (After the setting of the parameters INITPWR and NOMPWR, the power of the first probe is weaker than the required access power. After sending two or three access probes with several small power increments, the MS can access the system. Therefore, the reverse transmit power and the interference on the system are minimized.) In an adverse radio environment, the power increment should be larger.
Type
Air interface parameter (APM). Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
MOD APM LST SYSMSGPARA: CCMINF=APM;
Value Range
0 to 7 (dB).
2009-11-6
Page 50 of 438
Internal
Default Value
4
Setting Tradeoff
If this parameter is set to a high value, the reverse transmit power is larger and reverse interference increases. Conversely, if this parameter is set to a small value, the MS can successfully access the system only after sending multiple access probes. Ideally, the MS can access the system after sending two or three access probes. In actual practice, you can conduct a test under the BTS to decide whether the open loop power control parameters are set properly. If the MS can access the system only after sending multiple access probes, modify the parameters that may be set improperly. The recommended value is 0 to 5.
Remarks
None.
2.3.3 NUMSTEP (Number of Access Probes)

Description
This parameter specifies the number of access probes allowed for each access probe sequence, that is, NUMSTEP + 1.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 15.
Default Value
5.
Setting Tradeoff
The higher the value of this parameter is, the higher the possibility of successful accesses through an access probe sequence is. The reverse link interference, however, may increase, because access failure may also be caused by collisions. If the access fails, the call attempt interval is longer. Parameters such as NUMSTEP, PWR_STEP, and INIT_PWR determine the access performance.
2009-11-6
Page 51 of 438
Internal
Remarks
The setting of PWRSTEP and NUMSTEP are related. When PWRSTEP is set to a lower value, NUMSTEP should be set to a higher value. If PWRSTEP is set to a higher value, NUMSTEP should be set to a lower value.
2.3.4 PSIST09 (Persistence Value for Access Overload Classes 0-9)

Description
This parameter specifies the persistence value for access overload classes 0 to 9 of common calls. This parameter determines the threshold P for persistent detection that the access attempt must pass. For details, see the IS95A-C6 protocol. In each slot after the delay RS, the MS performs the pseudo random persistent detection based on P. There is an RP ranging from 0 to 1 in each slot. If the RP < P, the persistent detection is passed. In this case, the first probe of access sequence is sent in the slot. Otherwise, the access probe sequence is detected in the next slot. If P is set to 0, the access attempt fails. When the ACH request is not triggered by the MS registration and message transmission, P is calculated as shown in Figure 2-3. Figure 2-3 Calculation of P
Type
Air interface parameter (APM/EAPM). Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 63
Default Value
0
2009-11-6
Page 52 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
If this parameter is set to 0, the MS initiates access attempts. If the system load is too heavy, the value of this parameter group increases, and the access attempt delay is longer and the collision probability is reduced.
Remarks
None.
2.3.5 PSIST10 to PSIST15 (Persistence Value for Access Overload Class 10 to Persistence Value for Access Overload Class 15)
Description
This parameter specifies the persistence value for access overload classes 10 to 15. This parameter determines the threshold P for persistent detection that the access attempt must pass. For details, see PSIST0_9.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 7
Default Value
0
Setting Tradeoff
If this parameter is set to 0, the MS initiates access attempts. When the system load is too heavy, the parameter group for emergency calls cannot be changed to keep the access speed of emergency calls access.
Remarks
None.
2009-11-6
Page 53 of 438
Internal
2.3.6 MSGPSIST (Persistence Modifier for Message Transmissions)

Description
This parameter specifies the persistence modifier for message transmissions. During access attempts of message transmissions, P*2 -MSG_PSIST and RP are compared. For details, see PSIST0_9.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 7
Default Value
0
Setting Tradeoff
If this parameter is set to 0, the MS initiates access attempts.
Remarks
None.
2.3.7 REGPSIST (Persistence Modifier for Registrations)

Description
This parameter specifies the persistence modifier for registrations. During access attempt of message transmissions, P*2 -REG_PSIST and RP are compared. For details, see PSIST0_9.
Type
Related Commands
MOD APM
Internal
LST SYSMSGPARA: CCMINF=APM;
Value Range
0 to 7
Default Value
0
Setting Tradeoff
If this parameter is set to 0, the MS initiates access attempts.
Remarks
None.
2.3.8 PRBPNRAN (Time randomization for Access Channel probes)

Description
This parameter is used to calculate the pseudo noise code random delay. During an access attempt, the accurate transmission time of a channel is determined by the pseudo noise code random delay. The transmission time is RN times of PN chips. The number of RN chips is calculated by the HASH functions and ranges from 0 to (2PROBE_PN_RAN 1) PN chips.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 9.
Default Value
0
Setting Tradeoff
When the reverse load is heavy, a greater parameter value may decrease the access collision probability.
2009-11-6
Page 55 of 438
Internal
Remarks
None.
2.3.9 ACCTMO (Acknowledgment timeout)

Description
This parameter specifies the access probe acknowledgment timeout. If an MS does not receive response from the BTS after (2 + ACCTMO) x 80 ms, you can infer that the BTS does not receive the ACH messages. The time from access and acknowledgment is about 350 ms. Therefore, the value of this parameter is 3.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 15, in the unit of 80 ms.
Default Value
3
Setting Tradeoff
If the parameter value is too small, the MS sends the access probe before the acknowledgment from the BTS, and the ACH load and collision probability increase. The reverse link interference also increases. If the parameter value is too great, the access takes a longer time when an access attempt requires multiple probes.
2.3.10 PRBBKOFF (ACH Probe Backoff Range)

Description
This parameter specifies the maximum delay for access probe in the access sequence. When multiplexing sub-layer of the common channel sends all access probes in an access sequence on the R-ACH corresponding to the current F-PCH, the next access probe is sent after an additional delay RT. The RT ranges from 0 to (1 + PROBEBKOFF). If the multiplexing sub-layer of the common channel sends access probes on any of R-ACHs corresponding to the current F-PCH, the next access probe is also sent after an additional delay RT. The RT ranges from 0 to PROBEBKOFF (according to the 3GPP2 C.S0003 protocol).
2009-11-6
Page 56 of 438
Internal
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 15 (a maximum of 1 to 16 timeslots).
Default Value
3
Setting Tradeoff
If the parameter value is too great, the MS access is delayed when many access attempt probes exist. If the system load is small, the value can be small. If the system load is heavy, the value can be great.
Remarks
None.
2.3.11 BKOFF (ACH Probe Sequence Backoff Range)

Description
This parameter specifies the remainder of the maximum delay of ACH probe sequence backoff minus 1. The access probe sequence (except the first) has a sequence delay RS that ranges from 0 to 1+ BKOFF.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 15 (a maximum of 1 to 16 timeslots).
2009-11-6
Page 57 of 438
Internal
Default Value
3
Setting Tradeoff
If the parameter value is too great, the collision is reduced in the case of high reverse load, but the MS access is delayed.
Remarks
None.
2.3.12 MAXREQSEQ (Max Number of Probe Sequences for an ACH Request)

Description
This parameter specifies the maximum number of access probe sequences for an ACH response (such as origination message). The access probe sequence (except the first) has a sequence delay RS that ranges from 0 to 1+ BKOFF.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
1 to 15
Default Value
3
Setting Tradeoff
If the parameter is set to a very large value, the access success ratio increases but the access channel capacity decreases. If the parameter is set to a very small value (for example, 1), the sequence cannot be retransmitted. The radio environment fluctuates. If the first access fails, the radio environment may improve during the second access attempt. This parameter should be equal to or greater than 2.
Remarks
None
2009-11-6
Page 58 of 438
Internal
2.3.13 MAXRSPSEQ (Max Number of Probe Sequences for an ACH Response)

Description
This parameter specifies the maximum number of access probe sequences for an ACH response (such as paging response). The access probe sequence (except the first) has a sequence delay RS that ranges from 0 to 1+ BKOFF.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
1 to 15.
Default Value
3
Setting Tradeoff
For details, see MAXREQSEQ.
Remarks
None.
2.3.14 PSISTEMGINCL (Emergency Call Persistence Value Included)

Description
This parameter determines whether persistence on MSs with an access overload class of 0 to 9 during an emergency call is allowed.
Type
2009-11-6
Page 59 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
Value Range
YES, or NO.
Default Value
NO
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
2.3.15 PSISTEMG (Emergency Call Persistence Values for Access Overload Classes 0-9)
Description
This parameter specifies the persistence value for MSs with an access overload class of 0 to 9 during an emergency call. If the value of PSISTEMGINCL is 0, this parameter is invalid. If the value of PSISTEMGINCL is 1, and the MSs with an access overload class of 0 to 9 can send emergency call request on the ACH, the value of this parameter is 0. If emergency calls are not allowed, the value of this parameter is 7.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 7
Default Value
0
2009-11-6
Page 60 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
2.3.16 PCN (PCH No.)

Description
This parameter specifies the index of the table in concert with the module No. and pilot No..
Type
Related Commands
MOD ACH LST CMFINF: CMFINF=ACH;
Value Range
1 to 7.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
2.3.17 ACHNUM (Number of Access Channels)

Description
This parameter specifies the number of access channels related to this paging channel.
Type
Related Commands
MOD ACH
2009-11-6
Page 61 of 438
Internal
LST CMFINF: CMFINF=ACH;
Value Range
1 to 32.
Default Value
1.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
Adding or deleting access channels results in reset of carriers. Therefore, perform such operations when the traffic is low.
2.3.18 MAXLEN (Max Message Length)

Description
This parameter specifies the remainder of the maximum number of frames in each ACH message minus 3.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 7, that is, each message contains 3 to 10 ACH frames.
Default Value
4, that is, the maximum number of frames in each message is 7.
Setting Tradeoff
If the value of this parameter is too small, large-size access channel messages (such as Data burst Messages and origination messages that contain dialing numbers) cannot be sent. If the value of this parameter is too great, large-size messages can be sent but the access channel capacity may be reduced because the time for sending these messages prolongs. For example, if the value of this parameter is 3, the maximum number of frames of access channel message
2009-11-6
Page 62 of 438
Internal
is 6. The access channel rate is 4800 bit/s so that the maximum message length is 6 x 20 x 4800/1000 = 576 bit. The maximum length of common access message is about 100 bits to 300 bits. Some small-size short messages can be successfully sent. Large-size short messages are sent after origination messages are sent and the service channel is set up.
Remarks
None.
2.3.19 PAMLEN (Header Length)

Description
This parameter specifies the remainder of the length of the ACH preamble minus 1.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 15, in the unit of frame.
Default Value
3, that is, the maximum length of the preamble of each message is 3 frames.
Setting Tradeoff
If the parameter value is too great, the access channel capacity is wasted. This is because (1+PAM_SZ) frames do not carry the message contents and the BTS can capture the MS with few frames. If the parameter value is too small, the BTS is hard to successfully capture the MS. Consequently, more messages of the MS are sent again. The parameter adjustment is related to the size of search window used by the BTS to capture access channels.
Remarks
The number of required preamble frames increases with the size of the search window.
2.3.20 CELLMODE (Cell Mode)

Description
This parameter specifies the cell mode of the BTS. The BTS supports two cell modes: normal and large. The radiuses of the maximum-size cells in different cell modes are different. In
2009-11-6
Page 63 of 438
Internal
normal mode, the radius of the maximum-size cell must be not more than 125 km (must be more than 0 km at the same time). In large mode, the radius of the maximum-size cell must be not more than 250 km.
Type
Internal BTS parameter.
Related Commands
The commands are used to set the chip parameter of the CDMA 1X channel board. This parameter is supported only in the versions later than V200R002C04. DSP CBTSCFG: CFGID=CBTSCDMA1XCHIPPARA;
SET CBTSCDMA1XCHIPPARA
Value Range
NORMAL/LARGE
Default Value
NORMAL
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
This parameter is used in BTS V200R002C04 or a later version. When configuring this parameter, check the configuration of the cell radius. An ordinary-size cell supports 6 sectors, and a large-size cell supports three sectors. CELLMODE of the command ADD CBTSCPL: BTSID=2044, CPLID=0&1&2&3&4&5&6&7&8&9,CELLMODE=LARGE,CPLMODE=STATIC; can be set to LARGE or NORMAL. However, this operation cannot change the value of the CELLMODE parameter. To change the value of this parameter, you must run the SET CBTSCDMA1XCHIPPARA command.
2.3.21 MAXCELLR (Maximum Cell Radius)

Description
This parameter specifies the maximum radius (in kilometers) of a cell. The MS can work normally within the radius. Geographically, the value of this parameter is the longest distance covered by the BTS. That is, from the place where the BTS is located to the coverage border. It is used to set the search window size of the reverse common channel. For example, maxcellr = 39, that is, the cell radius is 39 km. Convert the value in kilometers into the number of chips, that is, convert 39 km into 160 chips. Then, the search window is 320 chips (the double of 160 chips), which is 5 x 64 chips. The search window of the common channel is equivalent to the cell radius. The BTS defines the search window of the common channel
2009-11-6
Page 64 of 438
Internal
by setting the cell radius. The center of the search window is half of the common search window.
Type
Related Commands
SET CBTSCDMA1XSECTORPARA DSP CBTSCFG
Value Range
Cell Mode Normal Large Value Range (chip) 0 to 1024 0 to 2048 Maximum Cell Radius (km) 125 250
Default Value
40.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
The recommended cell radius of a BTS in urban area is less than 15 km. The cell radius of a BTS with repeaters or wide-coverage cells is site specific.
2.3.22 MAXRANUM (Maximum number of reverse access channel)

Description
This parameter specifies the maximum number of RACHs that can be searched by the BTS. Huawei recommends that you do not modify the value of this parameter.
Type
Related Commands
The reverse chip parameters of channel boards in the same resource pool must be set to the same values.
2009-11-6
Page 65 of 438
Internal
The command in versions earlier than 3612V100R002B02 is as follows: SET BTSREVCHP: CPLID=0,MAXRANUM=2,MAXREARCNUM=2, MINPAMSZ=3, ENSCHWADJ=Enable, CFM95=6, CFM2K=8 In 3612V100R002B02 or a later version, the reverse chip parameters are configured in the .ini file.
Value Range
1 to 32
Default Value
2
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
If the parameter value is too great, the search capacity of the traffic channel is affected. If the parameter value is too small, the access success rate of the access channel is affected.
2.3.23 MAXREARCNUM (maximum number of reverse enhanced access and common control channel)
Description
This parameter specifies the maximum number of R-EACHs or R-CCCHs that can be searched by the BTS.
Type
Related Commands
The reverse chip parameters of channel boards in the same resource pool must be set to the same values. The command in versions earlier than 3612V100R002B02 is as follows: SET BTSREVCHP: CPLID=0,MAXRANUM=2,MAXREARCNUM=2, MINPAMSZ=3, ENSCHWADJ=Enable, CFM95=6, CFM2K=8 In 3612V100R002B02, the reverse chip parameters are configured in the .ini file.
Value Range
1 to 8
2009-11-6
Page 66 of 438
Internal
Default Value
The settings of this parameter is dependent on the search scope. Currently, this parameter is set to 1 because the REACH is not supported.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
If the parameter value is too great, the search capacity of the traffic channel is affected. If the parameter value is too small, the access success rate of the access channel is affected. For the R-FCH RC3 and RCR-SCH/R-DCCH channels, the resources required by one R-EACH are affected by many factors, and the resources required by the R-EACH searcher are more than those required by the traffic channel. Therefore, the number of 1S-2000 traffic channels must be limited as that of R-EACHs. Currently, the BTS does not use the R-FCH RC3 and RCR-SCH/R-DCCH channels.
2.3.24 MINPAMSZ (Minimum Length of Access Channel Preamble)

Description
This parameter specifies the length of the ACH access preamble frame (PAM_SZ + 1).
Type
Related Commands
The reverse chip parameters of channel boards in the same resource pool must be set to the same values. The command in versions earlier than 3612V100R002B02 is as follows: SET BTSREVCHP: CPLID=0,MAXRANUM=2,MAXREARCNUM=2, MINPAMSZ=3, ENSCHWADJ=Enable, CFM95=6, CFM2K=8 In 3612V100R002B02 or a later version, the reverse chip parameters are configured in the .ini file.
Value Range
0 to 15.
Default Value
3.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Internal
Remarks
If the parameter value is too great, the access speed is affected. If the parameter value is too small, the access success rate is affected.
2.3.25 MAXSCHPAS
Description
This parameter specifies the maximum search times of the preambles of R-ACH, R-EACH, or R-CCCH.
Type
Related Commands
The command in versions earlier than 3612V100R002B02 is as follows: set btssectorpara:btsid=1,localsectorid=0,maxcellr=80,maxusrspd=255,pcm=m0db, mainsct=0,divsct=255; The command in 3612V100R002B0 or later versions is as follows: SET BTSSECTORPARA: BTSID=1, LOCALCELLID=1, LOCALSECTORID=0, CRRID=11,MAXCELLR=40,MAXUSRSPD=255,MAXSCHPAS=4,TCHSCHWSZ=1,SCHS OS=0, PCM=M25DB;
Value Range
1 to 4.
Default Value
3.
Setting Tradeoff
If this parameter is set to a high value, the preamble frames of the R-ACH, R-EACH, and R-CCCH are frequently searched. This may decrease the number of searchers that can be used by other channels and may result in multi-path of fraud reports. If this parameter is set to a low value, the preamble frames may fail to be detected.
Remarks
None.
2.3.26 SCHSOS
Description
This parameter specifies the initial offset of reverse common channel searcher.
2009-11-6
Page 68 of 438
Internal
Type
Related Commands
The command in versions earlier than 3612V100R002B02 is as follows: set btssectorpara:btsid=1,localsectorid=0,maxcellr=80,maxusrspd=255,pcm=m0db, mainsct=0,divsct=255; The command in 3612V100R002B0 or later versions is as follows: SET BTSSECTORPARA: BTSID=1, LOCALCELLID=1, LOCALSECTORID=0, CRRID=11,MAXCELLR=40,MAXUSRSPD=255,MAXSCHPAS=4,TCHSCHWSZ=1,SCHS OS=0, PCM=M25DB;
Value Range
0 to 16376.
Default Value
0.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
If the value of this parameter is set based on reverse delay of the system, the search efficiency improves. It eliminates the delay due to the distance between the antenna and the optical port.
2.4 Registration Parameters

2.4.1 REGZN (Registration zone)
Description
This parameter specifies the registration zone code of the sector. The registration zone code is the identifier for registration zone with specified SID and NID. An MS can register in several registration zones that are identified by the SID, NID, and REGZONE. For details, see the IS2000-5 (2.6.5.1.5).
Type
2009-11-6
Page 69 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 4095.
Default Value
0. If the zone-based registration is used, this value should be configured according to the registration zone code.
Setting Tradeoff
A large registration zone may lead to a high paging cost and a low paging capacity, especially when the short message service is heavy. A small registration zone may lessen the paging cost and increase the paging capacity, but may lead to frequent registrations and thus may affect the reverse capacity. The access conditions of a called party at the edge of registration zone may worsen.
Remarks
Generally, the planning of the registration zone must match that of the LAC. This is because when the system pages the MS, the system determines the location of an MS and the paging area (that is, the LAC where the MS resides) based on the latest location registration information. If the MS uses zone-based registration, the current location of the MS is within the registration zone to which the MS registers the last time. Otherwise, the MS initiates a new registration. The MS can be correctly paged when the planning of the registration zone matches that of the LAC. Planning multiple registration zones under an LAC, however, is unnecessary because it may increase the paging cost of the system or increase the registration frequency of the MS.
2.4.2 TOTALZN (Number of Total Registration Zones to be Retained)

Description
This parameter specifies the number of registration zones in the zone-based registration. Zone-based registration is a basic registration method for a commercial network. It enables the MS to perform location update when the MS transverses between different registration zones and informs the network of the update information of the MS. The MSC delivers the paging based on the LAC, and the division of registration zone can be consistent with that of the LAC area.
Type
2009-11-6
Page 70 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 7. (0 indicates that the zone-based registration is not allowed.)
Setting Tradeoff
If this parameter is set to a value more than 1, MSs do not perform frequency handoffs at the boarder of the registration zone. This is helpful especially for a boarder area with seriously polluted pilots, where MSs perform frequent registration even when they are not moving. In this configuration, however, MSs may not perform location update in time, and the system may fail to send paging messages to MSs. When other paging mechanisms are not used, the value of ZONETIMER must be set to a small value such as 1 if the value of this parameter is greater than 1. In this case, the paging success ratio can be increased through methods such as extended LACs.
Remarks
After receiving a system parameter message, the MS compares the REGZONE included in the message with the ZONE stored in the ZONE_LISTS. If the ZONE_LIST has no zones, the MS registers location and the new zones are added to the ZONELIST. If the parameter changes, for example, TOTALZONES decreases, or the number of zones exceeds the number specified in the TOTALZONES because of the new zones, the MS deletes the earliest zone. For details about how to maintain the ZONE_LIST of an MS, see the TIA/EIA/IS-2000.5-A.
2.4.3 ZNTMR (Zone timer length)

Description
The MS saves REGZONE in the SPM to the zone list. If a message including the REGZONE is not received within the specified time, the MS deletes the REGZONE. When the zone-based registration is used, that is, TOTALZONES is not 0, this parameter is valid.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 7. Table 2-3 lists the values of the zone timer.
Internal
Table 2-3 Values of the zone timer Value (Binary) 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 Timer (Minute) 1 2 5 10 20 30 45 60
Default Value
7.
Setting Tradeoff
If TOTALZONES is greater than 1, this parameter can be set to a small value such as 1 to reduce the effects on paging. If TOTALZONES is 1, this parameter is not used.
Remarks
The MS assigns a timer to each REGZONE stored in the ZONELIST. According to the timers, the MS detects the time duration for receiving a system parameter message including REGZONE. If the time duration exceeds the time specified in the ZONETIMER, the MS deletes the REGZONE from ZONE_LIST. It does not mean that the MS will originate a registration. The MS determines whether to originate the zone-based registration based on whether the received SPM contains the REG_ZONE excluded from ZONE_LIST. According to the timers, the MS determines the earliest REGZONE. In short, after receiving a system parameter message, the MS stores the REGZONE. If the REGZONE is contained in the ZONE_LIST, the corresponding timer is disabled. If other REGZONEs (different from received REGZONEs) in the ZONE_LIST do not have activated timers, the MS enables a timer with the initial length of ZONE_TIMER. For details, see 2.6.5.5.4 of the TIA/EIA/IS-2000.5-A.
2.4.4 MULTSIDS (Multiple SID Storage Indicator)

Description
This parameter determines whether an MS stores the SID_NID_LIST that contains different SIDs.
2009-11-6
Page 72 of 438
Internal
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
YES, or NO.
Default Value
NO.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
2.4.5 MULTNIDS (Multiple NID Storage Indicator)

Description
This parameter determines whether an MS stores the SID_NID_LIST that contains the same SIDs and the different NIDs.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
YES, or NO.
Default Value
NO.
2009-11-6
Page 73 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
The name of this parameter on the Service Maintenance System is MNID.
2.4.6 HOMEREG (Home Registration Indicator)

Description
This parameter determines whether home registration is enabled. If this parameter is set to YES and MOB_TERM_HOME is set to YES, the MS can register automatically. The auto registration includes MS power-on auto registration, MS power-off auto registration, time-based registration, zone-based registration and distance-based registration.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
YES, or NO.
Default Value
YES (home registration enabled).
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
2.4.7 FORSIDREG (SID Roaming Registration Flag)

Description
This parameter determines whether the MS from other SIDs can register. If this parameter is set to YES and MOB_TERM_FOR_SID is set to YES, the MS can register automatically.
2009-11-6
Page 74 of 438
Internal
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
YES, or NO.
Default Value
YES
Setting Tradeoff
Adjust this parameter according to the actual conditions.
Remarks
None.
2.4.8 FORNIDREG (NID Roaming Registration Flag)

Description
This parameter determines whether the MS from other NIDs can register. If this parameter is set to YES and MOB_TERM_FOR_SID is set to YES, the MS can register automatically.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
YES, or NO.
Default Value
YES
2009-11-6
Page 75 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
Adjust this parameter according to the actual conditions and the registration allowance for the MS from other SIDs register.
Remarks
None.
2.4.9 PWRUP (Power-up Registration Indicator)

Description
This parameter determines whether the MS can register automatically upon power-on and after receiving the Overhead message. If this parameter is set to YES, the MS can register automatically. If this parameter is set to NO, the MS cannot register automatically. The MS starts the power-on registration after 20 seconds in the idle state to avoid excessive registrations due to frequent power-on and power-off.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
YES, or NO.
Default Value
YES
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
Power-up registration must be enabled unless disabled for specific tests.
2.4.10 PWRDWN (Power-down Registration Indicator)

Description
This parameter determines whether the MS can register automatically upon power-off. If this parameter is set to YES, the MS can register automatically. If this parameter is set to NO, the
2009-11-6
Page 76 of 438
Internal
MS cannot register automatically. If the MS does not register in the existing SID and NID, the MS does not perform the power-down registration. The MS powers down after the power-down registration.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
YES, or NO.
Default Value
Power-off registration must be enabled unless disabled for specific tests.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
The MS starts the power-on registration after 20 seconds in the idle state to avoid excessive registrations due to frequent power-on and power-off. The MS holds a power-up/initial timer. When the timer is activated, the MS does not perform registration access attempts. When the MS performs a power-down registration, the MS is powered down after the power-down registration.
2.4.11 PRMREG (System Message Parameter-Change Registration Indicator)

Description
Whether the MS can register automatically when connecting to a new system, or whether the system parameter messages can change the registration when the parameter values of the overhead message defined by the Um interface are changed. If the value of this parameter is YES, the registration change is allowed. If the value of this parameter is NO, the registration change is not allowed. The specified parameters set by the MS are: SLOT_CYCLE_INDEXp BTS type (SCMp) MOB_TERM_HOMEp/MOB_TERM_FOR_SIDp/MOB_TERM_FOR_NIDp MS-supported band type, power level, and radio configuration
2009-11-6
Page 77 of 438
Internal
In addition, the parameter change registration is performed when no records match with SID and NID in the SID_NID_LISTs saved by the MS. In this case, the MS deletes all the SID_ NID_LISTs. Currently, detrimental effects of such registrations are unknown. When parameters changes on the MS, the MS deletes all the SID_NID_LISTs. The deletion is mandatory irrespective of whether HOME_REG is enabled or not.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
YES, or NO.
Default Value
YES
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
The name of the parameter on the Service Maintenance System is PRMREG.
2.4.12 REGPRD (Time-Based Registration)

Description
This parameter specifies the timer-based registration cycle. Registration cycle = 2^(REG_PRD/4) x 0.08s If this parameter value is set to 0, the MS does not register periodically. The registration modes provided in the protocols must work together. The periodical registration is used when the MS does not update the location for a long time. It may be deactivated by the MS if not registered. The update of location information of an MS that moves between areas is performed according to zone-based registration or parameter-based registration.
Type
2009-11-6
Page 78 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
Value Range
0, or 29 to 85.
Default Value
58.
Setting Tradeoff
The registration cycle is 1/4 to 1/3 of deactivation timer in the length of the MSC. Otherwise, the MS may be deactivated by the MSC and cannot be paged.
Remarks
The time-based registration enables the MS to register periodically and the system to remove automatically the registration of the MS without successful power-off registration. The MS remains a time-based registration timer. When the value of the REG_COUNT is that of the REG_PRD, the MS initiates the time-based registration. When the MS is powered on or changes to other serving system, the timer resets automatically. The COUNTER_ENABLED in the MS shows the status of time-registration timer. When the COUNTER_ENABLED changes from NO to YES, the timer is a pseudorandom value from 0 to the registration cycle.
2.4.13 REGDIST (Distance-Based Registration)

Description
This parameter specifies the threshold of the distance-based registration. The MS saves the longitude and latitude of the last registration. If the distance computed from the longitude and the latitude delivered from the Overhead message exceeds the value of REGDIST, the MS initiates a registration.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 2047. 0 indicates that the distance-based registration is not allowed.
2009-11-6
Page 79 of 438
Internal
Default Value
0.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
2.5 System Message Control Parameters

2.5.1 EXT_SYS_PARAAMETER (extended system parameter message)
Description
In the current version, the maintenance console command line does not contain any mapping identifier of this parameter. If the extended system parameter message is sent on the paging channel, the value of this parameter is set to YES. Otherwise, it is set to NO.
Type
Air interface parameter (SPM).
Related Commands
LST SYSMSGPARA: CCMINF=SYSMSGCTRL;
Value Range
YES, or NO.
Default Value
YES.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
2009-11-6
Page 80 of 438
Internal
2.5.2 EXTNBRLST (Extended Neighbor List Message Send Indicator)

Description
If the extended neighbor list message is sent on the paging channel, the value of this parameter is set to YES. Otherwise, it is set to NO. The extended neighbor list message is used in BandClass 1 rather than BandClass 0. If the band class is 1, 3, or 4, and the minimum protocol revision is less than 6, the parameter is set to YES. Otherwise, it is set to NO. The value of this parameter is set according to actual networking conditions.
Type
Related Commands
MOD SYSMSGCTRL LST SYSMSGPARA: CCMINF=SYSMSGCTRL;
Value Range
YES, or NO.
Default Value
NO.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
2.5.3 GENNBRLST (General Neighbor List Message Send Indicator)

Description
If the general neighbor list message is sent on the paging channel, the value of this parameter is set to YES. Otherwise, it is set to NO. The neighbor list message can be used to specify neighbor cells at different channel numbers. If different-frequency cells exist in the network and the inter-frequency handoff is required, this parameter is set to YES.
2009-11-6
Page 81 of 438
Internal
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
YES, or NO.
Default Value
NO (If the cell is a 450 MHz cell, this parameter is set to YES.)
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
According to the protocols, GENNLST is mandatory for the 450 MHz cells, and this parameter is set to YES.
2.5.4 GLBRDRCT (Global Service Redirection Message Send Indicator)

Description
If the global service redirection message is sent on the paging channel, the value of this parameter is set to YES. Otherwise, it is set to NO. Upon receiving the global service redirection message, the MS leaves the existing sector carrier, and attempts to seize a new channel based on the contents in the message. This message may be used when the current carrier is being maintained or when the access or traffic channel of the current carrier is overloaded. This message is sent only when the version of the BTS is 6 or later (the compatible version of the BTS must be checked at the same time).
Type
Related Commands
2009-11-6
Page 82 of 438
Internal
Value Range
YES, or NO.
Default Value
NO.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
Parameter Configuration Examples in Typical Scenarios

Example 1: redirection between different sectors and different carriers The MS in idle mode resides on the paging channel of PN12 CHAN 553. To change PN 12 CHAN553 to PN348 CHAN 594, perform the following steps: Step 1 Block the carriers (expect carrier 553) of PN12, the carriers (expect carrier 594) of PN348, and these carriers of other PNs of the BTS. Step 2 Enable the sending of the GSRDM and EGSRDM messages on frequency 553 of PN12. The modification command is as follows: MOD SYSMSGCTRL: CN=5, SCTID=0, CRRID=1, GLBRDRCT=YES, EXTGLBRDRCT=YES; The query command is as follows: LST SYSMSGPARA: CN=5, SCTID=0, CRRID=1, CCMINF=SYSMSGCTRL; The restoration command is as follows: MOD SYSMSGCTRL: CN=5, SCTID=0, CRRID=1, GLBRDRCT=NO, EXTGLBRDRCT=NO; Step 3 Redirect the GSRDM and EGSRDM messages to frequency 594 of PN348. The modification command is as follows: (To be simple, all MSs are redirected. Only the SID/NID and frequency point of the target network are defined in the redirection messages. The target PN is not defined in the redirection messages.) MOD GSRDM: CN=5, SCTID=0, CRRID=1, RDRCTACCOLC="0xFFFF", RETFAIL=NO, EXCPREVMS=NO, RECTP=YES, BNDCLS=BC800, EXPSID=14655, EXPNID=20781, CHNUM=1, CDMABSN0=594; MOD EGSRDM: CN=5, SCTID=0, CRRID=1, RDRCTACCOLC="0xFFFF", RETFAIL=NO, RDRCTPREVINCL=YES, EXCPREV=NO, RECTP=YES, BNDCLS=BC800, EXPSID=14655, EXPNID=20781, CHNUM=1, CDMABSN0=594; The query command is as follows: LST SYSMSGPARA: CN=5, SCTID=0, CRRID=1, CCMINF=GSRDM;
2009-11-6
Page 83 of 438
Internal
LST SYSMSGPARA: CN=5, SCTID=0, CRRID=1, CCMINF=EGSRDM; No restoration is required. Directly disable the sending of the GSRDM and EGSRDM messages on frequency 553 of PN12.
2.5.5 UZID (User Zone Identification Message Send Indicator)

Description
Currently, this parameter is not available. If the user zone ID message indicator is sent on the paging channel, this parameter is set to YES. Otherwise, it is set to NO.
Type
System message control parameter. Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
MOD SYSMSGCTRL: LST SYSMSGPARA:
Value Range
YES, or NO.
Default Value
NO.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
2.5.6 EXTGLBRDRCT (Extended Global Service Redirection Message Send Indicator)

Description
If the extended global service redirection message is sent on the paging channel, this parameter is set to YES. Otherwise, it is set to NO. This message is sent only when the version of the BTS is 6 or later (the compatible version of the BTS must be checked at the same time).
Type
Air interface parameter (SPM).
Internal
Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
Value Range
YES, or NO.
Default Value
NO.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
2.5.7 EXTCDMACHLST (Extended CDMA Channel List Message Indicator)

Description
If the extended CDMA channel list message is sent on the paging channel, the value of this parameter is set to YES. Otherwise, it is set to NO. If the ECCLM message is sent, the IS2000 MS uses the frequency list HASH in the ECCLM, and the IS95 MS still uses the frequency list in the CCLM. In this case, IS2000 and IS95 MSs use different carriers to provide the control modes.
Type
Related Commands
MOD ECCLM: SUBITEM=SCT_CLASS, EXTCDMACHLST=YES; LST SYSMSGPARA: CCMINF=SYSMSGCTRL;
Value Range
YES, or NO.
2009-11-6
Page 85 of 438
Internal
Default Value
NO.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
2009-11-6
Page 86 of 438
Internal
3
Description Type
Forward Power Distribution Parameters
3.1 Sector Carrier Gain Parameters

3.1.1 TXGAIN (RF Gain)
This parameter is used to set the RF attenuation.
BTS internal parameter. Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
MOD CDMACH LST CDMACH
Value Range
0 to 24 (dB).
Default Value
0.
Setting Tradeoff
The value of this parameter depends on the actual output power. The recommended maximum value of this parameter is less than or equal to 20 dB. The total attenuation of RF gain and power amplitude limitation processing unit is 24 dB. Therefore, the RF gain must be less than 20 dB so that 4 dB is reserved for the power limitation-processing unit. An external attenuator is required to obtain a lower forward output power.
Remarks
Before changing the forward output power, the RF gain must be adjusted. Figure 3-1 shows the forward channel. Forward power amplitude limitation means that the module measures
2009-11-6
Page 87 of 438
Internal
digital power within periods. If the digital power is greater than 45 dBm, the digital signal is attenuated and 45 dBm of power can be secured. If digital power is less than 45 dBm, the digital signal is transmitted normally. Figure 3-1 Forward channel
3.1.2 SCTGAIN (Baseband Gain)

Description
This parameter is used to set the gain of the baseband.
Type
Internal BTS parameter. Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 4095. (unit: none)
Default Value
3000.
2009-11-6
Page 88 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
The value of this parameter depends on the actual output power. P = 20 x log(SECTOR_GAIN/3000) + 43 TX_GAIN (dBm) Table 3-1 lists the relations between the bandwidth gain of output power. Table 3-1 Relations between the bandwidth gain and the output power Sector Gain 3000 2500 2000 1500 1000 500 Output Power (dBm) 43 41.4 39.5 37 33.5 27.3
Remarks
For the BTS2900, modifying the baseband gain results in reset of carriers.
3.1.3 ADJPOWER (Rated Power Adjust Parameter)

Description
This parameter is used to adjust the nominal power of the BTS.
Type
Related Commands
SET CBTSRFPARA DSP CBTSCFG: BTSID=XX, CFGID=CBTSRFPARA;
Value Range
20 to 10, with the unit of 0.5 dB.
Default Value
In the codes of the product, the nominal power of the CMTR is set to 25 w per carrier.
2009-11-6
Page 89 of 438
Internal
In versions earlier than BTSV200R100C04B014 (with patch version SP10), this parameter is set to 0 by default. In deployments, this parameter is set to 2, indicating the nominal power of 20 w. In BTSV200R100C04B014SP10 and later versions, this parameter is set to 2 by default, indicating the nominal power of 20 w.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
If the BTS is not a high power BTS, do not increase the transmit power of the cabinet top by modifying this parameter. Alarms are generated if the power amplifier does not support the configured power. Nominal power is an increment to the rated power. The valid value range of this parameter is 20 to 10, with the adjustment range of 10 dB to 5 dB. This value range is of the greatest extent that is supported by all TRMs. The value ranges supported by different TRMs are different. The valid value range supported by the MTRM and CTRM is 8 to 4, with the adjustment range of 4 dB to 2 dB. The valid value range supported by the RRU3606 is -20 to +10, with the adjustment range of -10 dB to 5 dB. The valid value range supported by the CMTR and STRM is related to the power amplifier type, the number of carriers, and the corrected value of the DDU insertion loss. The valid value range supported by the CMTR and STRM can be presented in 20 to (AdjHighThd ceil(DDUILC/5)), with the adjustment range of 10 dB to ((AdjHighThd ceil(DDUILC/5))/2)dB.
If the power amplifier is not authorized in the license, the maximum output power of each carrier must be no more than 20 w. If the power amplifier is authorized in the license, the maximum output power of each carrier can be adjusted according to the maximum output power of the amplifier. If the amplifier is of unknown type, the system determines that the maximum output power of each carrier is 20 w.
3.2 Pilot Channel Gain Parameters

3.2.1 PLTCHGAIN (Pilot Channel Gain)
Description
This parameter specifies the pilot channel gain, with the unit of dB that indicates the percentage of the gain in the total power.
Type
BSC internal parameter.
2009-11-6
Page 90 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
MOD PLTCH LST CMFINF: CMFINF=PLTCH;
Value Range
255 to 0. Unit: 0.25 dB.
Default Value
28 (that is, 7 dB).
Setting Tradeoff
The Qualcomm recommended value of remainder of the transmit power of the pilot channel divided by the maximum transmit power of the sector carrier is 7.5 dB. When configuring the ratio of the pilot power to the total sector carriers, consider the capacity and the coverage. High transmit power on the pilot channel brings large the coverage area, but low power on the traffic channel and small capacity. When the pilot gain is high, the forward power and the reverse power must be balanced. In densely populated urban areas with small cell coverage, SECTOR_GAIN remains unchanged, and the pilot channel gain is set to a small value. In this way, the coverage can meet the requirements and the capacity increases accordingly. In network swap, the original settings should be used. In densely populated urban areas, this parameter should be set to a small value. Huawei recommends that you set this parameter to 40 or 37, which corresponds to 10% or 12% respectively.
Remarks
To modify the pilot gain, perform the following steps: Adjust the pilot gain by about 2% to 5%. 1. 2. Check and ensure that the expected coverage areas are satisfied, the uplink and downlink are balanced, and the traffic measurement indexes are improved. Repeat step 1 and step 2 until the proper pilot power is determined.
The pilot channel gain and the forward transmit power overload threshold should be modified together.
2009-11-6
Page 91 of 438
Internal
3.3 Synchronization Channel Gain Parameters

3.3.1 SYNCHGAIN (Sync Channel Gain Relative To Pilot)
Description
This parameter specifies the offset of the synchronization channel gain to the pilot channel gain. The synchronization channel gain = the pilot channel gain + the offset of the synchronization channel gain.
Type
BSC internal parameter. Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
MOD SYNCH LST CMFINF: CMFINF=SYNCH;
Value Range
200 to 55. Unit: 0.25 dB.
Default Value
40 (that is, 10 dB).
Setting Tradeoff
The synchronization channel gain = the pilot channel gain 10 dB. This formula is recommended by Qualcomm according to emulation results. This formula ensures that the coverage of the synchronization channel is about equal to the coverage of the pilot channel.
Remarks
None.
3.4 Paging Channel Gain Parameters

3.4.1 PCHGAIN (PCH Gain Relative To Pilot)
Description
This parameter specifies the offset of the paging channel gain to the pilot channel gain. The paging channel gain = the pilot channel gain + the offset of the paging channel gain.
2009-11-6
Page 92 of 438
Internal
Type
Related Commands
MOD PCH LST CMFINF: CMFINF=PCH;
Value Range
200 to 55. Unit: 0.25 dB.
Default Value
6 (that is, 1.5 dB).
Setting Tradeoff
The paging channel gain is related to the rate of the paging channel. Qualcomm offers some suggestions according to emulation results. When the rate of the paging channel is 9,600 bit/s, the paging channel gain = the pilot channel gain 1.5 dB. When the rate of the paging channel is 4,800 bit/s, the paging channel gain = the pilot channel gain 4.5 dB. The rate of the paging channel is configured in PRAT filed of the Synchronization Channel Message (SCHM). If PRAT = 0, the rate of the paging channel is 9,600 bit/s. If PRAT = 1, the rate of the paging channel is 4,800 bit/s. If this parameter is set to an excessively low value, some MSs can capture the pilot channel, but no sufficient Eb/Nt is available for demodulating paging channel. If MSs succeed in demodulating paging channel, the pilot channel power is wasted. If this parameter is set to an excessively high value, MSs can demodulate the paging channel largely, but the forward capacity decreases. Sending messages continuously on paging channel causes continuous interference. Consequently, forward power used for common channel increases, that is, the power used for traffic channel decreases.
Remarks
To ensure the power balance, the power for pilot channel, synchronization channel, and paging channel must be distributed based on their relationship.
3.5 Quick Paging Channel Gain Parameters

The quick paging channel indicates whether an MS in timeslot mode receives the paging message or system overhead message in the next paging channel timeslot on the paging channel.
3.5.1 QPCHNUM (Number of Quick Paging Channels)

Description
This parameter specifies the number of the quick paging channel.
2009-11-6
Page 93 of 438
Internal
Type
Related Commands
MOD QPCH LST CMFINF: CMFINF=QPCH;
Value Range
0 to 3. Unit: channel
Default Value
0 (the QPCH is not used).
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
In commands of the Service Maintenance System, the number of QPCHs is set to 0 if the system does not QPCHs. In this case, QPCH_SUPPORTED is set to 0 accordingly. For details, see QPCH_SUPPORTED in the extended system parameter message table. According to the protocol, this parameter should be configured with a value only when QPCH_SUPPORTED is set to 1, and this parameter is ignored if QPCH_SUPPORTED is set to 0.
3.5.2 QPCHRT (QPCH Data Rate)

Description
This parameter specifies the QPCH data rate. The values of the QPCH and PCH rate parameters indicate different meanings. For the QPCH, 0 indicates a rate of 4800 bit/s. For the PCH, 0 indicates a rate of 9,600 bit/s.
Type
Related Commands
2009-11-6
Page 94 of 438
Internal
Value Range
Bps4800, or Bps9600.
Default Value
Bps4800 (this setting helps reduce power of the QPCH).
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
3.5.3 PWRLEVCFG (Relative Power Level of CCI Modulation Symbol)

Description
This parameter specifies the transmit power relative to the pilot when the QPCH transmits CCI modulation symbol. If QPCH_SUPPORTED is set to 1 on the BTS, set this parameter based on Table 3-2. Table 3-2 Quick paging channel power offset QPCH_POWER_LEVEL_PAGE QPCH_POWER_LEVEL_CONFIG (Binary) 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 Transmit Power Level (Corresponding to Transmit Power of Pilot) 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2
(IS20005A Table 3.7.2.3.2.13-3)
Type
Air interface parameter (ESPM).
2009-11-6
Page 95 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 7 (corresponding to 5 to 2 dB).
Default Value
7.
Setting Tradeoff
QPCH transmit power is the balance between the forward link capacity and the MS standby time. If the transmit power of the QPCH is excessively high, the forward link capacity decreases, but the success rate of the MS detection increases and the MS standby time is prolonged. If the transmit power of the QPCH is excessively low, the forward link capacity increases, but the success rate of the MS detection decreases and the MS standby time is shortened. For a sector carrier with light load, this parameter value can be larger. If the forward load is heavy, this parameter value can be smaller. To leverage the load and the paging success rate, set the parameter value properly.
Remarks
None.
3.5.4 PWRLEVPAGE (Relative Power Level of PI Modulation Symbol)

Description
This parameter specifies the transmit power relative to the pilot when the QPCH transmits the PI modulation symbol. If QPCH_SUPPORTED is set to 1 on the BTS, set this parameter based on Table 3-2.
Type
Related Commands
2009-11-6
Page 96 of 438
Internal
Value Range
0 to 7, with an offset of 5 dB. The actual value range is 5 dB to 2 dB.
Default Value
7, corresponding to 2 dB.
Setting Tradeoff
Generally, the parameter value is set to 2 to ensure the paging success rate, and then can be reduced based on the actual conditions. For a sector carrier with light load, this parameter value can be larger. If the forward load is heavy, this parameter value can be smaller. To leverage the load and the paging success rate, set the parameter value properly.
Remarks
Table 3-3 lists channel gains recommended by Qualcomm. Table 3-3 Channel gains recommended by Qualcomm Channel F_PICH F_SYNC F_PAGING F_QPCH Channel Gain 7.5 dB, compared with carrier power 17.5 dB, compared with carrier power 9 dB, compared with carrier power 5 dB to 2 dB, compared with pilot
2009-11-6
Page 97 of 438
Internal
Power Estimation and Control Parameters
4.1 Forward Power Control Based on Measurement Report

4.1.1 FWDMAXCHGAIN (Maximum Transmit Power Offset of Forward Channel)
Description
This parameter specifies the offset between the maximum transmit power of the forward channel and the pilot channel gain. Maximum transmit power of the forward channel = Pilot channel gain + Offset of the maximum transmit power of the forward channel.
Type
BSC internal parameter. Ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
MOD FSLOWPC: LST PWRINF: QRYINF=FSLOWPC;
Value Range
200 to 55 (unit: 0.25 dB)
Default Value
0.
Setting Tradeoff
This parameter limits the maximum transmit power of the forward channel and prevents the single TCH from using too much forward power because of the power control. In adverse radio environment, if this parameter is set to a large value, the voice quality is normal, but the forward capacity decreases. However, if this parameter is set to a small value, the voice quality deteriorates and call drops may occur, but the forward capacity increases.
2009-11-6
Page 98 of 438
Internal
Remarks
See Qualcomm suggestion (Table 4-1). Table 4-1 Qualcomm suggestion Channel F-FCH, RC1 F-FCH, RC2 F-FCH, RC3 F-FCH, RC4 F-FCH, RC5 MINPWR Relative to Pilot 9 dB 15 dB 24 dB 24 dB 24 dB MAX_PWR Relative to Pilot 3 dB 1dB 4 dB 4 dB 4 dB
4.1.2 FWDMINCHGAIN (Minimum Transmit Power Offset of Forward Channel)

Description
This parameter specifies the offset between the minimum transmit power of the forward channel and the pilot channel gain. Minimum transmit power of the forward channel = Pilot channel gain + Offset of the minimum transmit power of the forward channel.
Type
BSC internal algorithm parameter. Ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
Value Range
200 to 55 (unit: 0.25 dB)
Default Value
36
Setting Tradeoff
In a good radio environment, if this parameter is set to a large value, the voice quality is improved to some extent, but the forward capacity decreases. However, if this parameter is set to a low value, the voice quality deteriorates to some extent, but the forward capacity
2009-11-6
Page 99 of 438
Internal
increases, provided that the power can increase promptly when the radio environment deteriorates.
Remarks
None.
4.1.3 FWDINITCHGAIN (Forward Channel Initial Transmit Power)

Description
This parameter specifies the initial transmit power of forward TCH of the carrier.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
200 to 55 (unit: 0.25 dB)
Default Value
0.
Setting Tradeoff
The initial transmit power must be smaller than maximum transmit power to guarantee good voice quality of calls at the early stage. If the forward radio environment is good and FER is relatively low, the forward transmit power is reduced quickly. Figure 4-1 shows the power adjustment.
2009-11-6
Page 100 of 438
Internal
Figure 4-1 Power adjustment
Remarks
None.
4.1.4 THRSPWRDWN (Power Decrease Step)

Description
This parameter specifies the size of a step by which the power decreases when the timer waiting for the MS power control measurement report expires. The smaller the decrement step is, the higher is the possibility of call drops due to power decrement.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 255 (unit: 0.25 dB)
Default Value
2, that is, 0.5 dB.
2009-11-6
Page 101 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
The larger the value of this parameter is, the higher the possibility of call drops is due to the fast and unsteady power drop. The smaller the value of this parameter is, the more slowly the power drops and the more steadily the power changes. This also decrease the possibility of call drops, but unnecessary high power may be caused.
Remarks
None.
4.1.5 PWRRPTTHRS (Power Control Reporting Threshold )

Description
For details on the cooperation of measurement report parameters, see the bad frame timer. When the number of bad frames that an MS receives exceeds the threshold during the period specified by the PWRREPFRAMES parameter, the MS sends a power control measurement report message.
Type
Um interface, used by the MS (SPM). Ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 31 (unit: frame).
Default Value
2.
Setting Tradeoff
If this parameter is set to a large value, the power control fails to promptly respond to fast fading and power control can be delayed. If this parameter is set to a small value, measurement reports are frequently sent, thus, too much signaling affects the voice quality. If this parameter is set to 1, the MS reports a PMRM message each time when it receives a bad frame. If the target PER is 1%, it is a normal case that one of 100 received frames is a bad frame. If the Power Control Reporting Threshold is set to 1, a normal PER rate can cause an unnecessary power increment.
Remarks
None.
2009-11-6
Page 102 of 438
Internal
4.1.6 PWRRPTFRMNUM (Power Control Reporting Frame Count)

Description
This parameter specifies the measurement period Z of reports. Z = 5 x 2^ (PWRREPFRAMES/2) frames. A PMRM message is sent every Z frames when the power control reports are measured periodically. Under threshold control, if the number of bad frames in Z frames does not reach the Power Control Reporting Threshold when the measurement period expires, the bad frame counter is set to 0 and the measurement restarts. However, if the number of bad frames in Z frames reaches the Power Control Reporting Threshold before the measurement period expires, a PMRM message is reported and the measurement whose period is Z frames restarts.
Type
Um interface, used by the MS (SPM). Parameter for ordinary users.
Related Commands
Value Range
FRAME5 (5 frames)/FRAME7 (7 frames)/FRAME10 (10 frames)/FRAME14 (14 frames)/FRAME20 (20 frames)/FRAME28 (28 frames)/FRAME40 (40 frames)/FRAME56 (56 frames)/FRAME80 (80 frames)/FRAME113 (113 frames)/FRAME160 (160 frames)/FRAME226 (226 frames)/FRAME320 (320 frames)/FRAME452 (452 frames)/FRAME640 (640 frames)/and FRAME905 (905 frames).
Default Value
FRAME113 (113 frames)
Setting Tradeoff
When the report Threshold is used, the Power Control Reporting Frame Count is the measurement period. If it is set to a large value, the measurement period is long, and the measured FER is higher the actual value. When the periodical reporting is used, set the value according to the target FER and PWRREPTHRESH. For example, if the target PER is 1 and PWRREPTHRESH is 2, the period should be set to about 200 frames. According to the formula, this parameter should be set to FRAME226 (226 frames). Generally, the periodical reporting is not used.
Remarks
None.
2009-11-6
Page 103 of 438
Internal
4.1.7 PWRRPTDL (Power Report Delay)

Description
This parameter specifies the a period of time, for which the MS waits to restart the measurement after it reports a PMRM message. This parameter determines the number of frames after which the MS restarts the measurement. Therefore, this parameter is set with an aim to measure the number of forward bad frames after the forward power control triggered by the last PMRM takes effect.
Type
Um interface, used by the MS (SPM). Parameter for ordinary users.
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 31 (unit: four frames).
Default Value
1
Setting Tradeoff
The larger the value of this parameter is, the higher the possibility of missing a bad frame is. Therefore, it is recommended that this parameter is set to 1, that is, four frames.
Remarks
Generally, the parameter value should not be modified.
4.1.8 FWDVCFCHFER1 (F-FCH Voice Service Expected FER1)

Description
This parameter specifies the target FER of forward FCH voice services.
Type
BSC internal algorithm parameter. Parameter for ordinary users.
2009-11-6
Page 104 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
MOD FER: LST PWRINF: QRYINF=FER;
Value Range
Parameter FER0 FER1 FER2 FER3 FER4 FER5 FER6 FER7 FER8 FER9 FER10 FER11 FER12 FER13 FER14 FER15 FER 0.2% 0.5% 1.0% 1.5% 2.0% 2.5% 3.0% 3.5% 4.0% 4.5% 5.0% 5.5% 6.0% 6.5% 7.0% 7.5% Parameter FER16 FER17 FER18 FER19 FER20 FER21 FER22 FER23 FER24 FER25 FER26 FER27 FER28 FER29 FER30 FER 8.0% 8.5% 9.0% 9.5% 10.0% 11% 12% 13% 14% 15% 18% 21% 24% 27% 30%
Default Value
FER2 (1.0%)
Setting Tradeoff
If the target FER is set to a large value, more forward code channel power can be saved, but the actual FER at the physical layer is higher, link quality decreases, and voice quality decreases. When the forward FER ranges between 1% and 3%, forward voice quality differs a little,. Therefore, in a network with heavy forward loads, you can increase the target FER to some extent to lighten the forward loads and expand the forward capacity. If the target FER is set to a small value, the actual FER at the physical layer is lower, and voice quality is enhanced to some extent, but more forward power is used. Therefore, in a
2009-11-6
Page 105 of 438
Internal
network with light forward loads, you can decrease the target FER to some extent to enhance the voice quality.
Remarks
None.
4.1.9 REVVCTDCCHFER1 (Expected FER1 of R-DCCH Voice Service)

Description
This parameter specifies the expected FER1 of R-DCCH voice services.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
Parameter FER0 FER1 FER2 FER3 FER4 FER5 FER6 FER7 FER8 FER9 FER10 FER11 FER12 FER13 FER 0.2% 0.5% 1.0% 1.5% 2.0% 2.5% 3.0% 3.5% 4.0% 4.5% 5.0% 5.5% 6.0% 6.5% Parameter FER16 FER17 FER18 FER19 FER20 FER21 FER22 FER23 FER24 FER25 FER26 FER27 FER28 FER29 FER 8.0% 8.5% 9.0% 9.5% 10.0% 11% 12% 13% 14% 15% 18% 21% 24% 27%
2009-11-6
Page 106 of 438
Internal
Parameter FER14 FER15
FER 7.0% 7.5%
Parameter FER30
FER 30%
Default Value
FER2 (1.0%)
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
4.1.10 FWDDATFCHFER1 (F-FCH Data Service Expected FER1)

Description
This parameter specifies the target FER of F-FCH data services.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
Parameter FER0 FER1 FER2 FER3 FER4 FER5 FER6 FER 0.2% 0.5% 1.0% 1.5% 2.0% 2.5% 3.0% Parameter FER16 FER17 FER18 FER19 FER20 FER21 FER22 FER 8.0% 8.5% 9.0% 9.5% 10.0% 11% 12%
2009-11-6
Page 107 of 438
Internal
Parameter FER7 FER8 FER9 FER10 FER11 FER12 FER13 FER14 FER15
FER 3.5% 4.0% 4.5% 5.0% 5.5% 6.0% 6.5% 7.0% 7.5%
Parameter FER23 FER24 FER25 FER26 FER27 FER28 FER29 FER30
FER 13% 14% 15% 18% 21% 24% 27% 30%
Default Value
FER2 (1.0%)
Setting Tradeoff
If the target PER is set to a large value, forward code channel power is saved, but the data service transmission performance decreases. In a network with heavy loads, you can increase the target FER to some extent to lighten the forward load. If the target FER is set to a small value, the data service transmission performance is improved, but more forward power is used. In a network with light loads, you can reduce the target FER to some extent to lighten the forward load and improve the data transmission performance.
Remarks
None.
4.1.11 REVDATFCHFER1 (R-FCH Data Service Expected FER1)

Description
This parameter specifies the expected FER of R-FCH data services.
Type
Related Commands
MOD FER:
2009-11-6
Page 108 of 438
Internal
LST PWRINF: QRYINF=FER;
Value Range
Default Value
FER2 (1.0%)
Setting Tradeoff
If the target PER is set to a large value, reverse power is saved, but the data service transmission performance decreases. In a network with heavy loads, you can increase the target FER to some extent to lighten the forward load. If the target PER is set to a small value, the quality of reverse links is improved, but more reverse power is used. If the target PER is set to a large value, the quality of reverse links deteriorates, but less reverse power is used. You can adjust the reverse target FER (3%) according to the actual situation.
Remarks
None.
2009-11-6
Page 109 of 438
Internal
4.2 Forward EIB Power Control

4.2.1 FWDCHMAXGAIN (F-TCH Max. Transmit Power Relative To Pilot)
Description
This parameter specifies the offset between the maximum transmit power of the forward channel and the pilot channel gain. Maximum transmit power of the forward channel = Pilot channel gain + Offset of the maximum transmit power of the forward channel.
Type
Related Commands
MOD FEIBPC: LST PWRINF: QRYINF=FEIBPC;
Value Range
200 to 55 (unit: 0.25 dB)
Default Value
0.
Setting Tradeoff
This parameter limits the maximum transmit power of the forward channel and prevents the single TCH from seizing too much forward power because of the power control. In adverse radio environment, if this parameter is set to a large value, the voice quality is normal, but the forward capacity decreases. However, if this parameter is set to a small value, the voice quality deteriorates and call drops may occur, but the forward capacity increases.
Remarks
None.
2009-11-6
Page 110 of 438
Internal
4.2.2 FWDCHMINGAIN (F-TCH Min. Transmit Power Relative To Pilot)

Description
This parameter specifies the offset between the minimum transmit power of the forward channel and the pilot channel gain. Minimum transmit power of the forward channel = Pilot channel gain + Offset of the minimum transmit power of the forward channel.
Type
Related Commands
MOD FEIBPC: LST PWRINF: QRYINF=FEIBPC;
Value Range
200 to 55 (unit: 0.25 dB).
Default Value
72
Setting Tradeoff
In a good radio environment, if this parameter is set to a larger value, the voice quality is improved to some extent, but the forward capacity decreases. However, if this parameter is set to a smaller value, the voice quality deteriorates to some extent, but the forward capacity increases, provided that the power can increase promptly when the radio environment deteriorates.
Remarks
None.
4.3 Forward Fast Power Control Parameters

4.3.1 FPWRSTEP (Forward Power Control Step)
Description
This parameter specifies the size of the step by which the power increases or decreases.
2009-11-6
Page 111 of 438
Internal
Type
A3 and Abis interface parameter, used by the BTS. Parameter for ordinary users.
Related Commands
MOD FFASTPC LST PWRINF: QRYINF= FFASTPC;
Value Range
1 to 4 (unit: 0.25 dB)
Default Value
2, that is, 0.5 dB.
Setting Tradeoff
If this parameter is set to a very large value, power control is not precise enough and some forward transmit power is wasted. If this parameter is set to a very small value, power adjustment may be delayed to compensate for the fading.
Remarks
None.
4.3.2 IS95SCHGAIN1 (IS95 Forward Power Control Subchannel Gain 1)

Description
This parameter specifies the ratio of the power of the forward power control subchannel to the power of the F-TCH in the case of not-soft handoff branches. The forward power control subchannel consists of partial bits of the F-FCH or F-DCCH, and is part of the F-TCH. In the case of not-soft handoff branches, the requirements of power for the forward power control subchannel and F-TCH are the same. In the soft handoff state, the MS power is the maximum ratio combining of multi-branch power, but the power control subchannel gain is demodulated on each branch independently. (When a branch indicates power decrement, the MS decreases the power; when all the branches indicate power increment, the MS increases the power.) In this case, the power on the power control subchannel must be greater than the transmit power on the TCH.
Type
2009-11-6
Page 112 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 127 (unit: 0.25 dB)
Default Value
0, that is, 0 dB.
Setting Tradeoff
In the case of no soft handoff branches, it is recommended that the power of the forward power control subchannel is consistent with that of the F-TCH.
Remarks
The power control bit processing of softer handoffs is the same as that of TCHs, that is, adding the energy of two branches. Because the power control bits from the same BTS are the same, soft handoff and softer handoff are indicated by the PWR_COMB_IND field in the enhanced handoff EHDM message. This field indicates whether the value of the power control bit of the soft handoff branch is the same as that of the previous branch in the EHDM message. If the soft handoff branch and the previous branch carry the same power control bit, it indicates that the two branches belong to the same BTS and are softer handoff branches of each other, and this field is set to 1. If the soft handoff branch and the previous branch carry different power control bits, it indicates that the two branches belong to different BTSs and are soft handoff branches of each other, and this field is set to 0. For two soft handoff branches, the power control bits of the two branches are combined in logical OR mode. That is, when the power control bits of both the two branches require the MS to increase the power, the MS increases the power. If the power control bit of one branch requires the MS to decrease the power, the MS decreases the power.

Description
This parameter specifies the ratio of the transmit power of the forward power control subchannel to the transmit power of the F-TCH in the case of two soft handoff branches. For the detailed description of this parameter, see parameter IS95 Forward Power Control Subchannel Gain 1 (IS95SCHGAIN1).
Type
A3, Abis interface parameter, used by the BTS; Um interface parameter, used by the MS (ECAM). Parameter for ordinary users.
2009-11-6
Page 113 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 127 (unit: 0.25 dB)
Default Value
12, that is, 3 dB.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.

Description
This parameter specifies the ratio of the transmit power of the forward power control subchannel to the transmit power of F-TCH in the case of three or more soft handoff branches. For the detailed description of this parameter, see parameter IS95 Forward Power Control Subchannel Gain 1 (IS95SCHGAIN1).
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 127 (unit: 0.25 dB)
Default Value
19, that is, 4.75 dB.
2009-11-6
Page 114 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
4.3.5 IS2KSCHGAIN1 (IS2000 Forward Power Control Subchannel Gain 1)

Description
For the detailed description of this parameter, see parameter IS95 Forward Power Control Subchannel Gain 1 (IS95SCHGAIN1). The value of this parameter is larger than that of parameter IS95 Forward Power Control Subchannel Gain because the transmit power of the IS2000 F-TCH is generally lower than that of the IS95 F-TCH. To ensure the ratio of correct reverse power control bits, the gain of the IS2000 subchannel must be higher than that of the IS95 subchannel.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 31 (unit: 0.25 dB)
Default Value
12, that is, 3 dB.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
2009-11-6
Page 115 of 438
Internal

Description
This parameter specifies the ratio of the transmit power of the forward power control subchannel to the transmit power of the F-TCH in the case of two soft handoff branches of the IS2000 network. For the detailed description of this parameter, see parameter IS95 Forward Power Control Subchannel Gain 1 (IS95SCHGAIN1).
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 31 (unit: 0.25 dB)
Default Value
24, that is, 6 dB.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.

Description
This parameter specifies the ratio of the transmit power of the forward power control subchannel to the transmit power of F-TCH in the case of three or more soft handoff branches of the IS2000 network. For the detailed description of this parameter, see parameter IS95 Forward Power Control Subchannel Gain 1 (IS95SCHGAIN1).
2009-11-6
Page 116 of 438
Internal
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 31 (unit: 0.25 dB)
Default Value
31, that is, 7.75 dB.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
4.3.8 VINITFCH (Voice Service FCH Initial Eb/Nt Value) / DINITFCH (Data Service FCH Initial Eb/Nt Value)
Description
This parameter specifies the initial Eb/Nt value set for the FCH forward outer loop power control in the MS. The principles of forward outer loop power control is similar to that of the reverse outer loop. For details on the parameter description, see REV_INI_VOICE_FCH_SET_PT. This parameter is set separately for the voice service and the data service.
Type
Um interface, used by the MS (ECAM) Parameter for ordinary users.
Related Commands
2009-11-6
Page 117 of 438
Internal
Value Range
0 to 255 (unit: 0.125 dB)
Default Value
40, that is, 5 dB.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
4.3.9 VMAXFCH (Voice Service FCH Max. Eb/Nt Value) / DMAXFCH (Data Service FCH Max. Eb/Nt Value)
Description
This parameter specifies the maximum Eb/Nt value set in the MS for the FCH forward outer-loop power control. This parameter is set separately for the voice service and the data service.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 255 (unit: 0.125 dB)
Default Value
80, that is, 10dB. For R002B03D006 and earlier versions, this parameter can be set to 114.
Setting Tradeoff
In an adverse radio environment, if this parameter is set to a large value, the voice quality is improved to some extent, but the forward capacity decreases. However, if this parameter is set to a very small value, the voice quality deteriorates obviously, and call drops may occur.
2009-11-6
Page 118 of 438
Internal
Remarks
In a constant moving rate, RC, and transmission rate, the ratio between the Eb/Nt and FER is relatively stable. Figure 4-2 shows the relation between the Eb/Nt and the FER when the MS is still in the lab. Figure 4-2 Relation between the Eb/Nt and the FER when the MS is still in the lab
The forward outer loop power control setting value range is [VMINFCH, VMAXFCH] (for voice services) and [DMINFCH, DMAXFCH] for data services. Different RCs, rates, and FERs require different Eb/Nt values. You cannot increase the maximum value of the value range to improve the forward link quality because when interference exists, the Eb/Nt value of forward signals received by the MS may be lower than the Eb/Nt value required for the target FER even when the forward code channel power reaches the maximum value. The algorithm constantly increases the Eb/Nt value set for the outer loop, the link quality cannot be improved, but excessive increment of the Eb/Nt value affects the reduction of the Eb/Nt value to a great extent.
4.3.10 VMINFCH (Voice Service FCH Min. Eb/Nt Value) / DMINFCH (Data Service FCH Min. Eb/Nt Value)
Description
This parameter specifies the minimum Eb/Nt value set in the MS for the FCH forward outer-loop power control. See the description of the maximum FCH Eb/Nt value set for voice and data services. This parameter is set separately for the voice service and the data service.
Type
2009-11-6
Page 119 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 255 (unit: 0.125 dB)
Default Value
16, that is, 2 dB.
Setting Tradeoff
In a good radio environment, if this parameter is set to a large value, the voice quality is not improved greatly, but the capacity is decreased.
Remarks
For the network that has requirements on the forward FER distribution during the dive test, you can increase the value by 1 dB.
4.3.11 VFCHINITGAINFIX (Voice Service F-FCH Initial Power Correction Value) / DFCHINITGAINFIX (Data Service F-FCH Initial Power Correction Value)
Description
This parameter is set separately for the voice service and the data service. This parameter indicates the correction values of the initial transmit power. The system selects a PN with strongest pilot strength as reference according to the radio environment indication field in the initial paging message. Forward initial transmit power = Transmit power mapped by the strongest pilot strength + Voice Service F-FCH Initial Power Correction Value. The initial power of the soft handoff branches in the soft handoff macro diversity are the same. The system automatically maps the value ranging from 32 to 0 to the following array with a step of 0.5 dB. {206, 206, 206, 206, 205,205, 205, 205, 204, 204, 204, 204, 203, 203, 203,203, 202, 202, 202, 202, 201, 201, 201, 201, 200,200, 200, 200, 199, 199, 199, 199, 198, 198, 198,198, 197, 197, 197, 197, 196, 196, 196, 196, 195,195, 195, 195, 194, 194, 194, 194, 193, 193, 193,193, 192, 192, 192, 192, 191, 191, 191, 191} The value No.2 x (Ec/Io + 32) is the initial power of Ec/Io. For example, when Ec/Io is 6, the initial power is 194 (the N.52 value in the array). The array indicates that the greater the pilot strength is, the better the radio environment is, and the weaker the required initial power is.
Type
Internal algorithm parameter Parameter for ordinary users.
2009-11-6
Page 120 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 255 (unit: 0.25 dB)
Default Value
46
Setting Tradeoff
If this parameter is set to a large value, the conversation quality can be guaranteed at the early stage, but the initial power must be smaller than the maximum power. Generally, when the pilot ratio is high, for example, over 20%, to ensure successful access of the MSs located in different areas, the parameter value must be increased to match with the pilot power. After the R-TCH is captured, the forward power used to transmit frames at full rate decreases to the normal value quickly in the duration of several frames (the period of each frame is 20 ms) under the 8000 times/second fast power control. Therefore, during the process of sending preambles and full-rate frames, the transmit power, even equivalent to the pilot power, does not affect the forward capacity to a great extent. If this parameter is set to a very small value, even when the Ec/Io value is very small, the transmit power is not equivalent to the pilot power, and the network entry becomes difficult.
Remarks
None.
4.3.12 VFCHMAXGAINR1 (Voice Service FCH Max. Gain 1 Relative to Pilot) / DFCHMAXGAINR1 (Data Service FCH Max. Gain 1 Relative to Pilot)
Description
This parameter specifies the offset between voice or data service FCH maximum gain 1 and pilot channel gain. It is the maximum transmit power of forward TCH when the call is not in soft or softer handoff state. It is set for the voice service and the data service separately. Voice or data service FCH maximum gain 1 = Pilot channel gain + Offset of the maximum voice or data service FCH gain 1
Type
Related Commands
MOD FFASTPC
Internal
LST PWRINF: QRYINF= FFASTPC;
Value Range
200 to 55 (unit: 0.25 dB)
Default Value
0.
Setting Tradeoff
In an adverse radio environment, if this parameter is set to a large value, the voice quality is improved to some extent, but the forward capacity decreases. However, if this parameter is set to a very low value, the voice quality deteriorates obviously, and call drops may occur.
Remarks
None.
4.3.13 VFCHMINGAINR1 (Voice Service FCH Min. Gain 1 Relative to Pilot) / DFCHMINGAINR1 (Data Service FCH Min. Gain 1 Relative to Pilot)
Description
This parameter specifies the offset between voice or data service FCH minimum gain 1 and pilot channel gain. It is the minimum transmit power of forward TCH when the call is not in soft or softer handoff state. It is set for the voice service and the data service separately. Voice or data service FCH minimum gain 1 = Pilot channel gain + Offset of the minimum voice or data service FCH gain 1
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
200 to 55 (unit: 0.25 dB)
Default Value
VFCHMINGAINR1: 72 DFCHMINGAINR1: 96
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
In a good radio environment, if this parameter is set to a small value, the voice quality is affected to some extent, but the system capacity can be enhanced obviously. However, if this parameter is set to a large value, the voice quality is not enhanced obviously, but the system capacity decreases obviously.
Remarks
According to the actual applications in the existing networks, you should ensure that the absolute value of the minimum gain 1 of the FCH is 100. You should set this parameter according to the actual pilot channel gain set for the carrier. For example, if the pilot gain of the carrier is 37, the offset of the FCH minimum gain 1 is [(100) - (37)] = 63.
4.3.14 VFCHMAXGAINR2 (Voice Service FCH Max. Gain 2 Relative to Pilot ) / DFCHMAXGAINR2 (Data Service FCH Max. Gain 2 Relative to Pilot )
Description
This parameter specifies the offset between voice or data service FCH maximum gain 2 and pilot channel gain. It is the maximum transmit power of the forward TCH in the case of two soft handoff branches. It is set for the voice service and the data service separately. Voice or data service FCH maximum gain 2 = Pilot channel gain + Offset of the maximum voice or data service FCH gain 2
Type
Related Commands
MOD FFASTPC LST PWRINF: QRYINF = FFASTPC;
Value Range
200 to 55 (unit: 0.25 dB)
Default Value
0
Setting Tradeoff
See voice or data service FCH maximum gain 1.
Remarks
None.
Internal
4.3.15 VFCHMINGAINR2 (Voice Service FCH Min. Gain 2 Relative to Pilot) / DFCHMINGAINR2 (Data Service FCH Min. Gain 2 Relative to Pilot)
Description
This parameter specifies the offset between voice or data service FCH minimum gain 2 and pilot channel gain. It is the minimum transmit power of the forward TCH in the case of two soft handoff branches. It is set for the voice service and the data service separately. Voice or data service FCH minimum gain 2 = Pilot channel gain + Offset of the minimum voice or data service FCH gain 2
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
200 to 55 (unit: 0.25 dB)
Default Value
Setting Tradeoff
See voice or data service FCH minimum gain 1.
Remarks
According to the experience in applying the existing network, you should ensure that the absolute value of the minimum gain 2 of the FCH is 96. You should set this parameter according to the actual pilot channel gain set for the carrier. For example, if the pilot gain of the carrier is 37, the offset of the FCH minimum gain 2 is [(96) - (37)] = 59.
2009-11-6
Page 124 of 438
Internal
4.3.16 VFCHMAXGAINR3 (Voice Service FCH Max. Gain 3 Relative to Pilot) / DFCHMAXGAINR3 (Data Service FCH Max. Gain 3 Relative to Pilot)
Description
This parameter specifies the offset between voice or data service FCH maximum gain 3 and pilot channel gain. It is the maximum transmit power of the forward TCH in the case of three or more soft handoff branches. It is set for the voice service and the data service separately. Voice or data service FCH maximum gain 3 = Pilot channel gain + Offset of the maximum voice or data service FCH gain 3
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
200 to 55 (unit: 0.25 dB)
Default Value
0.
Setting Tradeoff
See voice or data service FCH maximum gain 1.
Remarks
None.
4.3.17 VFCHMINGAINR3 (Voice Service FCH Min. Gain 3 Relative to Pilot ) / DFCHMINGAINR3 (Data Service FCH Min. Gain 3 Relative to Pilot)
Description
This parameter specifies the offset between voice or data service FCH minimum gain 3 and pilot channel gain. It is the minimum transmit power of the forward TCH in the case of three or more soft handoff branches. It is set for the voice service and the data service separately. Voice or data service FCH minimum gain 3 = Pilot channel gain + Offset of the minimum voice or data service FCH gain 3
Internal
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
200 to 55 (unit: 0.25 dB)
Default Value
Setting Tradeoff
See offset of the minimum voice or data service FCH gain 1.
Remarks
According to the experience in applying the existing network, you should ensure that the absolute value of the minimum gain 3 of the FCH is 96. You should set this parameter according to the actual pilot channel gain set for the carrier. For example, if the pilot gain of the carrier is 37, the offset of the FCH minimum gain 3 is [(96) - (37)] = 59.
4.4 Forward Power Synchronization Parameters

4.4.1 FWDPWRSYNSWT (Forward Power Synchronization Switch)
Description
This parameter specifies the forward power synchronization switch for the BTS.
Type
BTS internal parameter
Related Commands
SET CBTSSIGSOFTPARA DSP CBTSCFG: BTSID=XXX, CFGID=CBTSSIGSOFTPARA;
2009-11-6
Page 126 of 438
Internal
Value Range
ON and OFF. (ON: enable the switch; OFF: disable the switch.)
Default Value
OFF
Setting Tradeoff
When the forward power synchronization switch is enabled, the forward load can be reduced in the case of imbalanced forward power, but the CPU load of the channel board is higher.
Remarks
For V200R002 and later versions, the switch is invalid. When the switch is enabled at the BSC side, the power synchronization function is enabled.
4.4.2 SCHPWRSYNSW (SCH Power Synchronization Switch)

Description
This parameter specifies the power synchronization switch for the F-SCHs of the BSC.
Type
Internal parameter of the BSC or RAC level. Parameter for ordinary users.
Related Commands
MOD BSCPWR LST BSCPWR
Value Range
ON and OFF. (ON: enable the switch; OFF: disable the switch.)
Default Value
OFF
Setting Tradeoff
Enabling the forward power synchronization function helps to increase the forward capacity but also increases the CPU load of the FMR and channel board.
Remarks
If forward SCH soft handoff is used in the network, it is recommended that the SCH forward power synchronization function is enabled. Before enabling the SCH forward power
2009-11-6
Page 127 of 438
Internal
synchronization function, ensure that the FCH forward power synchronization function is enabled. The preceding principles are also applicable to the RAC.
4.5 Reverse Power Control Parameters

4.5.1 NOMPWR (Nominal Transmit Power Offset)
Description
This parameter is used for the open-loop power control. NOMPWR and NOMPWREXT are used together for compensating the offset between the actual effective transmit power and the nominal power. The (NOMPWR-16*NOMPWREXT) ranges from 24 dB to +7 dB. When the MS is operating in BandClass 0, NOMPWREXT is 0. In this case, the range of the (NOMPWR-16*NOMPWREXT) is from 8 dB to 7 dB. For detailed description of the NOMPWREXT parameter, see the APM part.
Type
Um interface parameter (APM) Parameter for ordinary users.
Related Commands
Value Range
8 to 7 (unit: dB)
Default Value
4 dB
Setting Tradeoff
This parameter is determined by the offset between the actual effective radiated power and the nominal power. Once the actual radiated power is specified, the nominal power can be calculated. If this parameter is set to a larger value, the reverse transmit power is higher, and the offset between the estimated open loop power and the actual radiated power is larger, which may increase the closed loop power control load and vice versa.
Remarks
NOMPWR is the transmit power offset used during network entry and a handoff at the target side. During a hard handoff from the source cell to the target cell, the BSC at the target side sends the MSC the value of NOMPWR through the handoff request reply message. Based on this value, the BSC at the source cell can initiates the handoff indication message. If the BSC
2009-11-6
Page 128 of 438
Internal
at the target side does not send the NOMPWR parameter to the source BSC, the default value of the transmit power offset is 1101, that is, 3 dB. In addition, bit 8 of CCM parameter 11 is used to prevent Huawei BSCs from the use of NOMPWR sent by the target BSCs. Bits 4 to 7 are used to set the value of NOMPWR.
4.5.2 INITPWR (Access Initial Power Offset)

Description
This parameter is used for the open loop power control. It specifies the offset of the power of the probe sequence on the first access channel. Therefore, the transmit signal power can be weaker than the required power. In addition, this parameter can partially compensate for the path loss caused by incomplete correlation between the CDMA forward channels and reverse channels. This parameter is used together with NOMPWR, PWRSTEP, and NUMSTEP. On an actual network, because of excessive access attempts, the access may fail or all the accesses succeed. In this case, you can adjust the parameters NOMPWR, PWRSTEP, and NUMSTEP. If they are set properly, adjust INITPWR only.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
16 to 15 (unit: dB)
Default Value
0 dB
Setting Tradeoff
Set this parameter according to the actual load. If this parameter is set to a very large value, the reverse capacity may be affected and the powers are excessively large. If this parameter is set to a very small value, the MS can access the network after several attempts. However, it takes a long time in the access or may even fail to access the network.
Remarks
The relation between NOMPWR, INITPWR and the initial access power of the MS in open loop power control is as follows: Average output power (dBm) = Average input power (dBm)+ offset power + interference correction factor + NOMPWR 6xNOMPWREXT + INITPWR + PWRLVL x PWRSTEP
2009-11-6
Page 129 of 438
Internal
The actual effects of the two parameters NOMPWR, INITPWR are the same. They can be adjusted according to different purposes. The offset power varies with different frequency band classes and RCs. Its value is specified by the protocol and cannot be modified. Transmit power of the reverse TCH before the MS receives the power control bit: Average output power (dBm) = Average input power (dBm) + offset power interference correction factor + ACC_CORRECTIONS + RLGAINADJ +
In this case, ACC_CORRECTIONS represents the power correction for access probes, and RLGAINADJ represents the power adjustment value of the R-TCH relative to the power of the access channel. In an actual network, the type of the access channel may be inconsistent with that of the TCH. For example, the IS95 access channel (offset power: 73 dB) and the IS2000 TCH (offset power: 81.5 dB) are used. Therefore, the power offset is 8.5 dB. You can use the RLGAINADJ parameter to compensate for the offset.
4.5.3 Access Power Increment (PWRCSTEP)

Description
This parameter specifies the power increments for two sequential access probes. Actual transmit power = Times of access attempts x Access power increment In a good radio environment, for example, in the cells in the open areas, the power increment can be small because the MS access power is stable. (After the setting of parameters INITPWR and NOMPWR, the power of the first probe is weaker than the required access power. After sending two or three access probes with several small power increments, the MS can access the system. Therefore, the reverse transmit power and the interference on the system are minimized.) In an adverse radio environment, the power increment should be larger.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
07 (dB)
Default Value
4
2009-11-6
Page 130 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
If this parameter is set to a large value, the reverse transmit power is larger and reverse interference increases. Conversely, if this parameter is set to a small value, the MS can successfully access the system only after sending multiple access probes. Ideally, the MS can access the system after sending two or three access probes. In actual practice, you can conduct a test under the BTS to decide whether the open loop power control parameters are set properly. If the MS can access the system only after sending multiple access probes, modify the parameters that may be set improperly.
Remarks
None.
4.5.4 NUMSTEP (Number of Access Probes)

Description
This parameter specifies the number of access probes in each access probe sequence.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
015
Default Value
5.
Setting Tradeoff
The larger the value of this parameter is, the larger the possibility of successful accesses through an access probe sequence is. The reverse link interference, however, may increase, because access failure may also be caused by the collision. If the access fails, the call attempt interval is longer. Parameters such as NUMSTEP, PWRSTEP, and INITPWR together determine the access performance.
Remarks
The setting of PWRSTEP and NUMSTEP are related. When PWRSTEP is set to a lower value, NUMSTEP should be set to a larger value. If PWRSTEP is set to a larger value, NUMSTEP should be set to a lower value.
2009-11-6
Page 131 of 438
Internal
4.5.5 REVVCFCHFER1 (Expected FER1 of R-FCH Voice Service)

Description
This parameter specifies the target FER of reverse FCH voice services.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
2009-11-6
Page 132 of 438
Internal
Default Value
FER2 (1.0%)
Setting Tradeoff
The lower the reverse target FER is, the better the quality of reverse links is, and the more the required reverse power is. Conversely, The larger the reverse target FER is, the worse the quality of reverse links is, and the less the required reverse power is. Generally, when the FER ranges from 1% to 3%, the voice quality differs a little. To save MS power, you can increase the value of this parameter to enhance the reverse capacity.
Remarks
None.
4.5.6 REVPWRCSTEP (Reverse Power Control Step)

Description
This parameter specifies the power adjustment step for reverse closed-loop power control. If an MS receives a power control bit indicating raising power on the forward power control subchannel, the MS increases the transmit power by one step on the basis of the open loop estimated power value and closed loop adjustment value. According to the definition in the protocol, if the MS does not support the R-SCH or R-SCCH, the MS should support the step size of 1 dB. If the MS support both the R-SCH and the R-SCCH, the MS should support step sizes 0.5 dB and 1 dB. If the MS supports the step size of 0.25 dB, it should support both step sizes 0.5 dB and 1 dB.
Type
Um interface parameter, used by the MS (PCNM, UHDM, and GHDM) Parameter for ordinary users.
Related Commands
MOD RCLPC LST PWRINF: QRYINF=RCLPC;
Value Range
STEP1 (1dB)/STEP0.5 (0.5dB)/STEP0.25 (0.25dB).
Default Value
STEP0.5 (0.5dB)
Setting Tradeoff
If the step size is small, the power changes smoothly. If the step size is large, the power changes obviously. The reverse power control is performed 800 times per second, and therefore, can meet the requirements. The smaller the power control step size is, the more
Internal
precisely the power can be controlled, and the less the wasted power is. Therefore, a step size of 0.25 dB is most effective for saving system power. When an MS does not support a power control step size and this parameter is set to a small value, the MS automatically selects a step size that can be supported. For example, if the minimum power control step size is 0.5 dB but the reverse power control step size set by the system is 0.25 dB, the MS automatically sets the power control step size to 0.5 dB.
Remarks
None.
4.5.7 VFCHRLGAINADJ (Voice Service R-FCH Power Adjust Gain Relative to ACH) / DFCHRLGAINADJ (Data Service R-FCH Power Adjust Gain Relative to ACH)
Description
These parameters specify the power adjustment of the R-TCH in relative to the ACH, enhanced ACH, and reverse universal control channel. As shown in the following formula, after the MS accesses a system over the ACH, the initial power of the TCH is the sum of the current ACH power and the value of this parameter. mean output power (dBm) = mean input power (dBm) + offset power (from Table 2.1.2.3.1-1) + interference correction + ACC_CORRECTIONS + RLGAIN_ADJs This parameter is set separately for the voice service and the data service.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
8 to 7 (unit: dB)
Default Value
3
Setting Tradeoff
If this parameter is set to a large value, the transmission quality at the early stage of a call, as well as the call setup success rate, is enhanced, but the system capacity is affected and the MS consumes more power.
2009-11-6
Page 134 of 438
Internal
Remarks
The open loop power and closed loop power of IS95 reverse TCHs and IS2000 reverse pilot channels include the RLGAINADJ adjustment value. In version R03, this parameter is set separately for the FCH of voice services and data services. In addition, the parameter name comes from I95 and is not that accurate for the IS2000. Figure 4-3 shows the relation between the power of different channels: Figure 4-3 Relation between the power of reverse channels
4.5.8 VFCHREVINIT (Voice Service Reverse Initial Set Value for FCH) / DFCHREVINIT (Data Service Reverse Initial Set Value for FCH)
Description
For different RCs, the system automatically converts this parameter value into corresponding Ec/Io and sets this value to the BTS (see the parameter value setting for the reverse outer loop). The value of this parameter is appropriate if it does not cause an excessive overshoot. This parameter is set separately for the voice service and the data service.
Type
2009-11-6
Page 135 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 255 (unit: 0.125 dB)
Default Value
48 (Eb/Nt = 6dB in any RC)
Setting Tradeoff
If this parameter is set to a large value, the reverse outer loop power control starts at a high power level. If this parameter is set to a small value, the Eb/Nt increases through the reverse outer loop power control. In this case, the FER at the initial call stage cannot meet the target FER requirement. The parameter value affects the rate at which the Eb/Nt is adjusted to a proper value. If this parameter is set to an appropriate value, the Eb/Nt can be adjusted to the target value promptly, the network performance can meet the FER requirement, and power is not wasted. If this parameter is set to a very small value, the network FER cannot meet the specific requirement (such as FER 1%) at the initial stage. If this parameter is set to a very large value, power is wasted at the initial stage.
Remarks
In version R03, This parameter is set separately for the voice service and the data service.
4.5.9 VMAXFCH (Voice Service Max. Value of FCH Outer Loop) / DMAXFCH (Data Service Max. Value of FCH Outer Loop)
Description
This parameter specifies the maximum Eb/Nt value set for the reverse FCH outer-loop power control. This parameter is set separately for the voice service and the data service.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 255 (unit: 0.125 dB)
2009-11-6
Page 136 of 438
Internal
Default Value
96 (the maximum Eb/Nt value set for the outer loop is 12 dB in any RC.)
Setting Tradeoff
In an adverse radio environment, if this parameter is set to a large value, the voice quality is improved to some extent, but the forward capacity decreases. However, if this parameter is set to a very small value, the voice quality deteriorates obviously, and call drops may occur. When the interference is great, a large parameter value ensures normal conversation quality and reduces call drop ratio. However, the function of this parameter is limited because the maximum transmit power of the MS is limited.
Remarks
In version R03, This parameter is set separately for the voice service and the data service. In a constant moving rate, RC, and transmission rate, the ratio between the Eb/Nt and FER is relatively stable. Figure 4-4 shows the relation between the Eb/Nt and the FER when the MS is still in the lab. IS2000 is configured with reverse pilot channels, and its TCH requires lower demodulation threshold. As shown in Figure 4-4, the value of IS2000 Eb/Nt is 3 dB lower than that of IS95 Eb/Nt. Figure 4-4 Relation between the Eb/Nt and FER in a lab environment.
The range of the reverse outer loop power control is [REVMINFCHSETPT, REVMAXFCHSETPT]. The value range is required because the required Eb/Nt varies according to different RCs, rates, and FERs. You cannot increase the maximum value of the value range to improve the forward link quality because when interference exists, the Eb/Nt value of reverse signals received by the BTS may be lower than the Eb/Nt value required for the target FER even when the MS power reaches the maximum value. The algorithm constantly increases the Eb/Nt value set for the outer loop, the link quality cannot be improved, but excessive increment of the Eb/Nt value affects the prompt reduction of the Eb/Nt value.
2009-11-6
Page 137 of 438
Internal
4.5.10 VMINFCH (Voice Service FCH Min. Eb/Nt Value) / DMINFCH (Data Service FCH Min. Eb/Nt Value)
Description
This parameter specifies the minimum Eb/Nt value set for reverse FCH closed-loop power control. It is set separately for the voice service and the data service.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 255 (unit: 0.125 dB)
Default Value
VMINFCH: 16 (minimum outer loop Eb/Nt of voice services = 2 dB) DMINFCH: 32 (minimum outer loop Eb/Nt of data services = 4 dB)
Setting Tradeoff
If this parameter is set to a large value, the reverse Eb/Nt is excessively higher, the reverse power is wasted, and the reverse capacity is affected. If this parameter is set to a small value, the reverse outer-loop algorithm can function effectively to guarantee the voice quality and enhance the reverse capacity when the power control performance is good. If this parameter is set to an excessively small value, the voice quality may be affected in the case of sudden fading.
Remarks
None.
4.5.11 FCHENDWNSTEP (Eb/Nt Down Step for FCH)

Description
This parameter specifies the size of the down step by which the power is adjusted after a specific number of good frames are received in the reverse outer loop.
2009-11-6
Page 138 of 438
Internal
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 255 (unit: 0.125 dB)
Default Value
1, that is, 0.125 dB.
Setting Tradeoff
If this parameter is set to a very small value, the power control functions slowly. If this parameter is set to a very large value, the power control functions quickly, and the power is adjusted obviously. To obtain high precision of the power control, set this parameter to 1.
Remarks
None.
4.5.12 FCHENMAXSTEP (Eb/Nt Max. Adjustment Step for FCH)

Description
This parameter specifies the maximum step size. It limits the maximum step size after the UP step is calculated according to the reverse outer loop power control algorithm.
Type
BSC internal algorithm parameter.
Parameter for ordinary users Related Commands

Value Range
0 to 255 (unit: 0.125 dB)
Default Value
10 (1.25 dB)
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
This parameter limits the maximum size of the adjustment step for the outer loop power control. If this parameter is set to a very small value, the normal adjustment is not performed and normal power control performance is affected. Therefore, do not set this parameter to a very small value.
Remarks
None.
4.6 F-SCH Initial Power Estimate Parameters

4.6.1 SCHINITGAIN1X (Forward 1X SCH Initial Tx Gain Relative to Pilot) / SCHINITGAIN2X (Forward 2X SCH Initial Tx Gain Relative to Pilot) / SCHINITGAIN4X (Forward 4X SCH Initial Tx Gain Relative to Pilot) / SCHINITGAIN8X (Forward 8X SCH Initial Tx Gain Relative to Pilot) / SCHINITGAIN16X (Forward 16X SCH Initial Tx Gain Relative to Pilot) / SCHINITGAIN32X (Forward 32X SCH Initial Tx Gain Relative to Pilot)
Description
These parameters specify the offset used to calculate the initial transmit power of the SCH when the F-SCH power estimate switch is disabled. It is the offset between the initial transmit power gain of the 1x/2x/4x/8x/16x/32x F-SCH and the pilot channel gain. Initial transmit power gain of the 1x/2x/4x/8x/16x/32x F-SCH = Pilot channel gain + Offset
Type
Carrier-level internal algorithm parameter. Parameter for ordinary users.
Related Commands
Value Range
200 to 55 (unit: 0.25 dB).
2009-11-6
Page 140 of 438
Internal
Default Value
Rate 1x 2x 4x 8x 16x 32x Default Value 16 16 16 4 4 0
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
4.7 F-SCH Power Control

4.7.1 FWDSCHMAXGAIN1X (Forward 1X SCH Max. Tx Power Relative to Pilot) / FWDSCHMAXGAIN2 (Forward 2X SCH Max. Tx Power Relative to PilotX) / FWDSCHMAXGAIN4X (Forward 4X SCH Max. Tx Power Relative to Pilot) / FWDSCHMAXGAIN8X (Forward 8X SCH Max. Tx Power Relative to Pilot) / FWDSCHMAXGAIN16X (Forward 16X SCH Max. Tx Power Relative to Pilot)/ FWDSCHMAXGAIN32X (Forward 32X SCH Max. Tx Power Relative to Pilot)
Description
These parameters specify the offset between the maximum forward transmit power of the 1x/2x/4x/8x/16x/32x F-SCH and the pilot channel gain. Maximum forward transmit power of the 1x/2x/4x/8x/16x/32x F-SCH = Pilot channel gain + Offset
Type
2009-11-6
Page 141 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
Value Range
255 to 0 (unit: 0.25 dB)
Default Value
Setting Tradeoff
If this parameter is set to a larger value, the SCH can use higher code channel power to ensure that the FER over the FSCH meets the target FER requirement and to ensure the link quality, However, larger sector power is used and the system can support less number of data subscribers. Therefore, when the forward sector load is not heavy, increase the value of this parameter to guarantee the SCH link quality. If this parameter is set to a smaller value, the lower code channel power may fail to guarantee the link quality when the radio link quality deteriorates, the number of retransmission increases, and the throughput decreases, However, in this case, lower sector power is used and the system can support more number of data subscribers. Therefore, when the forward sector load is heavy, decrease the value of this parameter to reduce or stabilize the sector load. When setting this parameter, consider the number of supported data subscribers and the rate threshold.
Remarks
Through the BTS 2s-granularity IMSI channel interference tracing, the F-SCH code power can be obtained, and the distribution of the actual transmit power can be analyzed. Through the analysis of the current parameter setting and obtained information, the parameter setting can be optimized.
2009-11-6
Page 142 of 438
Internal
4.7.2 FWDSCHMINGAIN1X (Forward 1X SCH Min. Tx Power Relative to Pilot) / FWDSCHMINGAIN2X (Forward 2X SCH Min. Tx Power Relative to Pilot) / FWDSCHMINGAIN4X (Forward 4X SCH Min. Tx Power Relative to Pilot) / FWDSCHMINGAIN8 (Forward 8X SCH Min. Tx Power Relative to PilotX) / FWDSCHMINGAIN16X (Forward 16X SCH Min. Tx Power Relative to Pilot) / FWDSCHMINGAIN32X (Forward 32X SCH Min. Tx Power Relative to Pilot)
Description
These parameters specify the offset between the minimum forward transmit power of the 1x/2x/4x/8x/16x/32x F-SCH and the pilot channel gain. Minimum forward transmit power of the 1x/2x/4x/8x/16x/32x F-SCH= Pilot channel gain + Offset
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
200 to 55. Unit: 0.25 dB.
Default Value
2009-11-6
Page 143 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
The larger the value of this parameter is, the higher the code channel power threshold of the F-SCH is, and the smaller the obtained F-SCH FER is. However, more sector power is used and the sector capacity is reduced. If this parameter is set to a small value, the power adjustment range is wider, the F-SCH can be more stable, and less sector power is used. But in the case of sudden deterioration of the radio environment, if the fast power control fails to promptly increase the code channel power to an appropriate value, the SCH link quality will deteriorate suddenly, and the transmission will be disrupted.
Remarks
Through the BTS 2s-granularity IMSI channel interference tracing, the F-SCH code power can be obtained, and the distribution of the actual transmit power can be analyzed. Through the analysis of the current parameter setting and obtained information, the parameter setting can be optimized.
4.7.3 FWDDATSCHFER1X (Forward 1XSCH Target FER) / FWDDATSCHFER2X (Forward 2XSCH Target FER) / FWDDATSCHFER4X (Forward 4XSCH Target FER) / FWDDATSCHFER8X (Forward 8XSCH Target FER) / FWDDATSCHFER16X (Forward 16XSCH Target FER) / FWDDATSCHFER32X (Forward 32XSCH Target FER)
Description
This parameter specifies the target FER set for 1x, 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x, and 32x F-SCHs.
Type
Air interface parameter of the carrier level. Parameter for ordinary users.
Related Commands
MOD FER LST PWRINF: QRYINF=FER;
Value Range
Parameter FER0 FER1 FER2 FER 0.2% 0.5% 1.0% Parameter FER16 FER17 FER18 FER 8.0% 8.5% 9.0%
2009-11-6
Page 144 of 438
Internal
FER3 FER4 FER5 FER6 FER7 FER8 FER9 FER10 FER11 FER12 FER13 FER14 FER15
1.5% 2.0% 2.5% 3.0% 3.5% 4.0% 4.5% 5.0% 5.5% 6.0% 6.5% 7.0% 7.5%
FER19 FER20 FER21 FER22 FER23 FER24 FER25 FER26 FER27 FER28 FER29 FER30
9.5% 10.0% 11% 12% 13% 14% 15% 18% 21% 24% 27% 30%
Default Value
Rate 1x 2x 4x 8x 16x 32x Default Value FER2 FER4 FER4 FER6 FER6 FER10
Setting Tradeoff
If the target FER is set to a large value, some forward code channel power is saved, but the actual FER of the physical link increases and the link quality deteriorates, thus, the data transmission performance deteriorates. Therefore, in a network with heavy forward loads, setting the target FER to a large value helps to lighten the forward load. If the target FER is set to a small value, the actual FER of the physical link decreases and the data transmission performance is improved, but more forward power is used to ensure a low FER. Therefore, in a network with light forward loads, setting the FER to a small value helps to improve the transmission performance of the F-SCH.
2009-11-6
Page 145 of 438
Internal
Remarks
According to the Qualcomm test report, it is recommended that the target FER of the SCH is lower than 15%. If the target FER is higher than 15%, power can be wasted.
4.7.4 SCHMAX (SCH Max. Eb/Nt Value)

Description
This parameter specifies the maximum F-SCH Eb/Nt value set in the MS.
Type
Related Commands
MOD FFASTPC LST PWRINF
Value Range
0 to 255 (unit: 0.125 dB)
Default Value
80
Setting Tradeoff
In an adverse radio environment, if this parameter is set to a large value, the voice quality is improved to some extent, but the forward capacity decreases. However, if this parameter is set to a very low value, the forward transmission performance is affected severely.
Remarks
None.
4.7.5 SCHMIN (SCH Min. Eb/Nt Value)

Description
This parameter specifies the minimum F-SCH Eb/Nt value set in the MS.
Type
2009-11-6
Page 146 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 255 (unit: 0.125 dB)
Default Value
16
Setting Tradeoff
If this parameter is set to a large value, even in a good radio environment, the voice quality cannot be improved greatly, but the capacity is decreased.
Remarks
None.
4.7.6 SCHINIT (SCH Initial Eb/Nt Value Offset Relative to FCH)

Description
This parameter specifies the offset between the initial Eb/Nt value set for the F-SCH and that for the F-FCH.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
128 to 127 (unit: 0.125 dB)
Default Value
24
Setting Tradeoff
If this parameter is set to a large value, the initial transmit power of the SCH is excessively large, and forward capacity is reduced.
Internal
Remarks
Generally, it is recommended that this parameter is set 0, that is, the Initial Eb/Nt value of the SCH is equal to the current Eb/Nt value setting for the FCH.
4.7.7 FPCTHRSSCH (SCH Forward Outer Loop Difference Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the threshold for controlling the SCH outer loop measurement report of the MS.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 255 (unit: 0.125 dB)
Default Value
8
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
4.8 Reverse SCH Closed-Loop Power Control Parameters

4.8.1 REVSCHPWRCTRLSW (Reverse SCH Power Control Switch)
Description
This parameter determines whether the R-SCH closed-loop power control function is enabled.
2009-11-6
Page 148 of 438
Internal
Type
BSC-level internal parameter. Parameter layer: ordinary users.
Related Commands
MOD BSCPWR LST BSCPWR
Value Range
ON/OFF
Default Value
OFF
Setting Tradeoff
When the R-SCH closed-loop power control function is enabled, the system can ask the MS to dynamically adjust the R-SCH power offset related to the reverse pilot according to radio environment changes. Thus, the R-SCH FER is closer to the target value. When the R-SCH closed-loop power control function is disabled, the power offset of R-SCH related to the reverse pilot is fixed. The R-SCH FER is close to the target value only in some special cases, not in scenarios such as the active set of the RFCH is inconsistent with that of the RSCH.
Remarks
None.
4.8.2 RLGAINSCHPLT1X (1X R-SCH Gain Offset Relative to R-PICH) / RLGAINSCHPLT2X (2X R-SCH Gain Offset Relative to R-PICH) / RLGAINSCHPLT4X (4X R-SCH Gain Offset Relative to R-PICH) / RLGAINSCHPLT8X (8X R-SCH Gain Offset Relative to R-PICH) / RLGAINSCHPLT16X (16X R-SCH Gain Offset Relative to R-PICH) / RLGAINSCHPLT32X (32X R-SCH Gain Offset Relative to R-PICH)
Description
These parameters indicate the power offsets of the R-SCH related to the R-PICH. They are sent to the MS through the ESCAM. Note that the parameter value is part of the power offsets of the R-SCH and R-PICH, as shown in the following formula: Mean code channel output power (dBm) = mean pilot channel output power (dBm) + 0.125 * Nominal_Attribute_Gain[Rate, Frame Duration, Coding] + Attribute_Adjustment_Gain[Rate, Frame Duration, Coding] + Reverse_Channel_Adjustment_Gain[Channel] Multiple_Channel_Adjustment_Gain[Channel] -
2009-11-6
Page 149 of 438
Internal
Variable_Supplemental_Adjustment_Gain[Channel] + RLGAINTRAFFICPILOT + RLGAIN_SCH_PILOT[Channel]s) + IFHHO_SRCH_CORR
Type
Air interface parameter sent to the MS through the ESCAM.
Related Commands
MOD RCLPC LST PWRINF: QRYINF= RCLPC;
Value Range
32 to +31, (unit: 0.125 dB).
Default Value
Table 4-2 lists default values at different rates. Table 4-2 Power offsets of the R-SCH related to the R-PICH Rate 1x 2x 4x 8x 16x 32x Default Value (Unit: 0.125 dB) 8 12 16 18 20 22
Setting Tradeoff
A high parameter value helps improve the R-SCH transmission efficiency but affects the reverse capacity. A low parameter value may affect the R-SCH transmission performance because of insufficient R-SCH code channel power.
Remarks
None.
4.8.3 RCAGDWNSTEP (RCAG Down Step)

Description
This parameter specifies the RCAG down step. It is a factor for calculating the RCAG adjustment and determining the precise degree of the RCAG adjustment.
2009-11-6
Page 150 of 438
Internal
Type
Carrier-level internal algorithm parameter. Parameter layer: ordinary users.
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 255 (unit: 0.125 dB).
Default Value
1, that is, 0.125 dB.
Setting Tradeoff
If the parameter value is set too low, in adverse radio environment, the RCAG up adjustment may be limited, thus it affects the reverse data transmission performance. If this parameter value is set too high, the adjustment amplitude of the RCAG may be overshot and the system may be interfered.
Remarks
None.
4.8.4 MAXRCAG (Max. RCAG Value)

Description
This parameter specifies the maximum value of the RCAG.
Type
Carrier-level internal algorithm parameter. Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
Value Range
-48 to +48 (unit: 0.125 dB).
2009-11-6
Page 151 of 438
Internal
Default Value
24, that is, 3 dB.
Setting Tradeoff
If the parameter value is set too high, the transmit power can be adjusted through the R-SCH power control function. Thus, the FER can converge to the target value. If the parameter value is set too low, the RCAG up adjustment may be limited in adverse radio environment, and the reverse data transmission performance may be affected.
Remarks
None.
4.8.5 MINRCAG (Minimum RCAG Value)

Description
This parameter specifies the minimum value of the RCAG.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
-48 to +48 (unit: 0.125 dB).
Default Value
24.
Setting Tradeoff
If this parameter is set too high, the RCAG cannot decrease normally so that the FER cannot converge to the target value. If this parameter is set too low, the R-SCH transmit power can decrease normally in good radio environment so that the FER can converge normally. If the parameter value is set too low, in adverse radio environment, the R-SCH transmit power may be too low. As a result, a number of errors occur because of insufficient R-SCH code channel power, and frame lost over the air interface may occur. Finally, the R-SCH transmission performance is affected.
2009-11-6
Page 152 of 438
Internal
Remarks
None.
4.8.6 INITRCAG (Initial RCAG Value)

Description
This parameter specifies the initial value of the RCAG. It takes effect before the adjustment of the R-SCH closed-loop power control function starts or when the R-SCH closed loop power control function cannot be enabled.
Type
BSC internal algorithm parameter of the carrier level. Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
MOD RCLPC LST RRMINF: RRMINF=RCLPC;
Value Range
-48 to +48 (unit: 0.125 dB).
Default Value
0.
Setting Tradeoff
A high parameter value may cause a high power offset of the R-SCH to the reverse pilot and lead to system interference. A low parameter value may cause a low power offset of the R-SCH to the reverse pilot and lead to insufficient R-SCH code channel power. As a result, the reverse transmission is affected.
Remarks
As the initial RCAG value, this parameter is used for calculating the R-SCH transmit power before the adjustment of or during the closure of the R-SCH closed-loop power control function starts.
2009-11-6
Page 153 of 438
Internal
4.8.7 REVDATSCHFER1X (Reverse 1X SCH Target FER) / REVDATSCHFER2X (Reverse 2X SCH Target FER) / REVDATSCHFER4X (Reverse 4X SCH Target FER) / REVDATSCHFER8X (Reverse 8X SCH Target FER) / REVDATSCHFER16X (Reverse 16X SCH Target FER) / REVDATSCHFER32X (Reverse 32X SCH Target FER)
Description
These parameters indicate the target FERs for the R-SCH at different rates.
Type
Carrier-level internal parameter. Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
MOD FER LST PWRINF: QRYINF=FER;
Value Range
0 to 30, (unit: 0.5%).
Default Value
Table 4-3 lists default values at different rates. Table 4-3 Target FERs at different rates Rate 1x 2x 4x 8x 16x 32x Default Value 2 4 4 6 6 10
Setting Tradeoff
If the parameter value is set too low, the reverse radio link quality is good after the R-SCH power control function is enabled, but larger reverse power is required. If the parameter value
Internal
is set too high, the reverse radio link quality is bad after the R-SCH power control function is enabled, but less reverse power is required. The parameter values can increase properly ( 15%) to save the MS power and improve the reverse capacity.
Remarks
None.
4.8.8 MAXSCH (Max. Value of SCH)

Description
This parameter specifies the maximum SCH Eb/Nt.
Type
Related Commands
MOD RCLPC LST PWRINF
Value Range
0 to 255 (unit: 0.125 dB).
Default Value
96.
Setting Tradeoff
If the value of this parameter is high in the adverse radio environment, the voice quality can be ensured, but the reverse capacity decreases. If the value of this parameter is low in the case of fading, the transmission may fail. Therefore, it is recommended that you do not modify this parameter.
Remarks
None.
4.8.9 MINSCH (Min. Value of SCH))

Description
This parameter specifies the minimum SCH Eb/Nt.
2009-11-6
Page 155 of 438
Internal
Type
Related Commands
MOD RCLPC LST PWRINF
Value Range
0 to 255 (unit: 0.125 dB).
Default Value
32.
Setting Tradeoff
If the parameter is set to a high value, the reverse SNR Eb/Nt is higher than the actual value, the reverse power is wasted, and the reverse capacity is affected. If the parameter is set to a low value, reverse outer-loop algorithm can be implemented flexibly. When the power control performance is good, the reverse transmission can be ensured and the reverse capacity is increased. If the parameter is set to an excessively low value, the reverse transmission performance may be affected in the case of sudden fading.
Remarks
None.
2009-11-6
Page 156 of 438
Internal
5
Description Type
Load Control and Management Parameters
5.1 Access Load Control Parameters

5.1.1 ACHLDCTRLSW (Access Channel Load Control Switch)
This parameter is the access load control switch at the BSC side.
BSC-level internal algorithm parameter in V200R002, V200R00, and V300R001 and carrier-level internal algorithm parameter in V300R006C02 and later versions. Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands Commands for modification:

V2R2/V2R3/V3R1 - MOD BSCRSM V3R6C02 and later versions - MOD ALDCTRL Commands for query: V2R2/V2R3/V3R1 - LST BSCRSM V3R6C02 and later versions - LST RSMINF
Value Range
ON/OFF
Default Value
OFF
2009-11-6
Page 157 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
This parameter must be used together with the access load control switch at the BTS side. The algorithm can take effect only when these two switches are both enabled.
5.1.2 ALDCTRLSWT (Access Load Control Switch)

Description
This parameter is the access load control switch at the BTS side. If it is set to "ON", the BTS reports the access load of each carrier to the BSC every two seconds. The access load control switch in valid only when this switch is on.
Type
BTS-level internal algorithm parameter.
Related Commands
SET CBTSSIGSOFTPARA DSP CBTSCFG: BTSID=0, CFGID=CBTSSIGSOFTPARA;
Value Range
ON/OFF
Default Value
ON
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
5.1.3 ACHHIGHTHR (Access Channel High Threshold)

Description
When the access channel load exceeds this threshold, and the access load control switch is on, the PSIST (0-9) adjustment and heavy access channel load control are triggered.
2009-11-6
Page 158 of 438
Internal
Type
BSC-level internal algorithm parameter. Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
MOD ALDCTRL LST RSMINF: QRYINF=ALDCTRL;
Value Range
1 to 99, (unit: %).
Default Value
80.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
5.1.4 ACHLOWTHR (Access Channel Low Threshold)

Description
When the access channel load is lower than this threshold, and the access load control switch is on, the PSIST (0-9) adjustment is triggered.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
1 to 99, (unit: %).
Default Value
60.
2009-11-6
Page 159 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
5.1.5 ACHUPSTEP (Psist Up Step)

Description
When the access channel load is higher than the threshold, the PSIST (0-9) may increase. This parameter specifies the increase step of the PSIST (0-9).
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 63.
Default Value
1.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
5.1.6 ACHDOWNSTEP (Psist Down Step)

Description
When the access channel load is lower than the threshold, the PSIST (0-9) may decrease. This parameter specifies the decrease step of the PSIST (0-9).
Type
BSC-level internal algorithm parameter.
2009-11-6
Page 160 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 63.
Default Value
1.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
5.1.7 ACHCOLLTHD (ACH Confliction Threshold)

Description
If the CRC of the access message fails, the BTS checks whether the energy of access channel frames exceeds the threshold. If yes, it indicates that a collision occurs; otherwise it indicates there is no access message.
Type
Related Commands
SET CBTSCDMA1XCTRLPARA DSP CBTSCFG: CFGID=CBTSCDMA1XCTRLPARA;
Value Range
0 to 65535.
Default Value
The default value is 3000.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
2009-11-6
Page 161 of 438
Internal
Remarks
None.
5.2 Forward Load Control Parameters

5.2.1 FWDLDCTRLSW (Forward Load Control Algorithm Selection)
Description
This parameter is the switch of the forward load control algorithm selection.
Type
Related Commands
Commands for modification: V2R2/V2R3/V3R1 - MOD BSCRSM V3R6C02 and later versions - MOD FLDCTRL Commands for query: V2R2/V2R3/V3R1 - LST BSCRSM V3R6C02 and later versions - LST RSMINF
Value Range
Dual (Dual_THRESHOLD) and ECIO (EC/IOR).
Default Value
DUAL.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
2009-11-6
Page 162 of 438
Internal
5.2.2 FWDLDCTRLSWT (Forward Load Control Switch)

Description
This parameter is the forward load control switch at the BTS side. If it is set to "ON", the function of limiting the code channel power is enabled. If it is set to "OFF", the function is disabled.
Type
Related Commands
Commands for modification: SET BTSSIGSOFTPARA: FWDLDCTRLSWT=OFF; (for the BTS3612) SET CBTSSIGSOFTPARA: FWDLDCTRLSWT= OFF; (for the BTS3606) SET MBTSSIGSOFTPARA: FWDLDCTRLSWT= OFF; (for the BTS3601) SET CBTSSIGSOFTPARA: FWDLDCTRLSWT= OFF; (for the BTS3900) Commands for query: DSP BTSCFG: CFGID=BTSSIGSOFTPARA: (for the BTS3612) DSP CBTSCFG: CFGID=CBTSSIGSOFTPARA: (for the BTS3606) DSP MBTSCFG: CFGID=BTSSIGSOFTPARA: (for the BTS3601) DSP CBTSCFG: CFGID=CBTSSIGSOFTPARA: (for the BTS3900)
Value Range
ON (enabled) and OFF (disabled).
Default Value
OFF.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
The function of limiting the code channel power is implemented at the BTS side. If the forward load control function is disabled and the forward load is heavy, keep the code channel power of all legs unaltered to prevent system breakdown.
2009-11-6
Page 163 of 438
Internal
5.2.3 FWDTHRADJSW (Forward Threshold Adjust Switch)

Description
This parameter serves as the dynamic adjustment switch of the forward load threshold.
Type
Related Commands
Commands for modification: V2R2/V2R3/V3R1 - MOD BSCRSM V3R6C02 and later versions - MOD FLDCTRL Commands for query: V2R2/V2R3/V3R1 - LST BSCRSM V3R6C02 and later versions - LST RSMINF
Value Range
Default Value
ON.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
When the EC/IOR algorithm is used and if this parameter is set to "ON", the algorithm uses the dynamic threshold. If this parameter is set to "OFF", the algorithm uses the static threshold. In such a case, only the initial value of FWDINITTHR (Forward Initial Basic Threshold) is working. Actually, it is a single threshold algorithm.
5.2.4 FERLDCTRLSW (FER Load Control Switch)

Description
This parameter serves as the switch of the FER load control function.
2009-11-6
Page 164 of 438
Internal
Type
Related Commands
Commands for modification: V2R2/V2R3/V3R1 - MOD BSCRSM V3R6C02 and later versions - MOD FLDCTRL Commands for query: V2R2/V2R3/V3R1 - LST BSCRSM V3R6C02 and later versions -LST RSMINF
Value Range
ON (enable) and OFF (disable).
Default Value
OFF.
Setting Tradeoff
If the FER load control function is enabled, the target FER of new voice calls is increased. This can relieve the rapid load increase, raise the system capacity, and enhance the system stability.
Remarks
If the FER load control function is enabled, the target FER is increased for new voice call. It can relieve the rapidly increasing load, raise the system capacity, and enhance the system stability. To some extent, however, it affects the QoS. Therefore, it can be used only in the scenario where the forward load is heavy and the QoS requirement is not demanding.
5.2.5 RSMDLDCTRLSW (Load Control Switch for Voice Rate Reduction Mode)
Description
This parameter serves as the load control switch for the voice rate reduction mode shift.
Type
2009-11-6
Page 165 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
Commands for modification: V2R2/V2R3/V3R1 - MOD BSCRSM V3R6C02 and later versions - MOD FLDCTRL Commands for query: V2R2/V2R3/V3R1 - LST BSCRSM V3R6C02 and later verions -LST RSMINF
Value Range
ON (enable) and OFF (disable).
Default Value
OFF.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
When the voice rate deduction mode load control function is enabled, the FCH rate is reduced for new voice services. Thus, the rapid increasing load is relieved, the system capacity is increased, and the system stability is enhanced. To some extent, however, it affects the QoS. Therefore, it can be used only in the scenario where the forward load is heavy and the QoS requirement is not demanding.
5.2.6 DELLEGLDCTRLSW (Load Control Switch of Deleting Call Legs)

Description
This parameter serves as the load control switch of deleting call legs.
Type
Related Commands
Commands for modification: V2R2/V2R3/V3R1 - MOD BSCRSM V3R6C02 and later versions - MOD FLDCTRL
2009-11-6
Page 166 of 438
Internal
Commands for query: V2R2/V2R3/V3R1 - LST BSCRSM V3R6C02 and later versions -LST RSMINF
Value Range
Default Value
OFF.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
If this parameter is set to "ON", the legs with high code channel power are deleted when the system is about to break down caused by heavy forward load. Thus, the forward load is relieved, the system breakdown is prevented, and the system stability is enhanced. This function may trigger call drop, hence it must be used with caution.
5.2.7 OVERLOADPOWERTHR(Overload Threshold of Forward Transmitting Power)

Description
In the dual threshold algorithm, when the forward load is higher than this threshold, the carriers are set to the unavailable state. In such a case, new SCH applications, new accesses, and soft handoffs are forbidden. This parameter takes effect only in the dual threshold algorithm.
Type
BSC-level internal algorithm parameter in V300R006C002 and earlier versions and carrier-level internal algorithm parameter in V300R006C03 and later versions.
Related Commands
V2R2/V2R3/V3R1/V3R6C02-MOD SOFTPARA (hidden command for versions between V300R001 and V300R006C002) V3R6C03 and later versions - MOD FLDCTRL V2R2/V2R3/V3R1/V3R6C02-LST SOFTPARA (hidden command for versions between V300R001 and V300R006C002) V3R6C03 and later versions - LST RSMINF
2009-11-6
Page 167 of 438
Internal
Value Range
100 to 350.
Default Value
220.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
This parameter can be used when AVAILABLEPOWERTHR is not higher than OVERLOADPOWERTHR.
5.2.8 AVAILABLEPOWERTHR (Available Threshold of Forward Transmitting Power)

Description
In the dual threshold algorithm, when the forward load is lower than this threshold, the carriers are set to the available state. In such a case, new SCH applications, new accesses, and soft handoffs are permitted. This parameter takes effect only in the dual-threshold algorithm.
Type
BSC-level internal algorithm parameter in V300R006C002 and earlier versions and carrier-level internal algorithm parameter in V300R006C03 and later versions.
Related Commands
V3R6C03 and later versions - MOD FLDCTRL V3R6C03 and later versions - LST RSMINF
Value Range
60 to 200.
Default Value
160.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
2009-11-6
Page 168 of 438
Internal
5.2.9 FWDINITTHR (Forward Initial Basic Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the initial value of admission control threshold allocated by voice service and data service forward FCH. This parameter is valid in the EcIor algorithm. In the Dual Threshold algorithm, forward SCH admission threshold, enabling/disabling high target FER load threshold, enabling/disabling heavy traffic rate deduction mode load threshold and enabling deleting legs load threshold are calculated from this parameter. Forward SCH admission threshold = FWDINITTHR + FWDSTOBTHR Enabling high target FER load threshold = FWDINITTHR + STHIFERRELLDTHR Disabling high target FER load threshold = FWDINITTHR + SPHIFERRELLDTHR Enabling high heavy traffic rate deduction mode load threshold = FWDINITTHR + STRRMDRELLDTHR Disabling high heavy traffic rate deduction mode threshold = FWDINITTHR + SPRRMDRELLDTHR Enabling deleting legs load threshold = FWDINITTHR + STDELLEGRELLDTHR
Type
Related Commands
MOD FLDCTRL: FWDINITTHR=1300; LST RSMINF: QRYINF=FLDCTRL;
Value Range
0 to10000, (unit: 0.10%).
Default Value
1300.
Setting Tradeoff
When the parameter is set to a high value, more calls are accessed. At the same time, the probability of system breakdown is higher.
Remarks
For urban areas, co-channel interference is relatively strong. It is recommended that the parameter is set to a low value. For suburban areas, co-channel interference is relatively weak. It is recommended that the parameter is set to a high value.
2009-11-6
Page 169 of 438
Internal
Table 5-1 Mapping relations between Ec/Ior and the basic threshold when the PICH gain is -7 dB Value of Basic Threshold 50% 100% 120% 140% 160% 180% 200% Ec/Ior(%) 40% 20% 16.7% 14.3% 12.5% 11.1% 10% Ec/Ior(dB) -4 -7 -7.8 -8.4 -9 -9.5 -10
Ec/Ior is equivalent to the Ec/Io at the antenna port.
5.2.10 FWDMAXTHR (Forward Max. Basic Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the maximum value of admission control threshold allocated by voice service and data service forward FCH. This parameter is valid in the EcIor algorithm.
Type
Related Commands
MOD FLDCTRL: FWDMAXTHR=1600; LST RSMINF: QRYINF=FLDCTRL;
Value Range
0 to10000, (unit: 0.10%).
Default Value
1600.
Setting Tradeoff
When the parameter is set to a high value, more calls are accessed. At the same time, the probability of system breakdown is higher.
2009-11-6
Page 170 of 438
Internal
Remarks
5.2.11 FWDMINTHR (Forward Min. Basic Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the minimum value of admission control threshold allocated by voice service and data service forward FCH. This parameter is valid in the EcIor algorithm.
Type
Related Commands
MOD FLDCTRL: FWDMINTHR=1000; LST RSMINF: QRYINF=FLDCTRL;
Value Range
0 to10000, (unit: 0.10%).
Default Value
1000.
Setting Tradeoff
When the parameter is set to a high value, more calls are accessed. At the same time, the probability of system breakdown is higher. When the parameter is set to a low value, the system capacity is limited and equipment usage is low. Thus, the system congestions increase.
Remarks
5.2.12 FWDSTOBTHR (F-SCH Offset Relative to Basic Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the offset of F-SCH admission threshold related to the forward basic threshold. The threshold is universal to the central area, middle area, and boarder area.
2009-11-6
Page 171 of 438
Internal
Type
Related Commands
MOD FLDCTRL: FWDSTOBTHR= -100; LST RSMINF: QRYINF=FLDCTRL;
Value Range
-10000 to 0, (unit: 0.10%).
Default Value
100.
Setting Tradeoff
The lower the value of this parameter, the lower is the SCH setup admission threshold. Therefore, fewer SCHs can be established and more transmission limits are applied to data services. The higher the value of this parameter, the less are the transmission limits applied to data services.
Remarks
SCH establishment admission threshold is controlled by the offset related to forward basic threshold. Therefore, when the basic threshold is adjusted dynamically, SCH establishment admission threshold is also adjusted. The offset of forward SCH admission threshold related to the forward basic threshold is negative, that is, forward SCH admission threshold is lower than the forward basic threshold.
5.2.13 FWDSHOTOBTHR (Forward Soft Handoff to Basic Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the soft handoff admission threshold related to the forward basic threshold and can be used in the EcIor algorithm.
Type
Related Commands
MOD FLDCTRL: FWDSHOTOBTHR=300;
Internal
LST RSMINF: QRYINF=FLDCTRL;
Value Range
0 to10000, (unit: 0.10%).
Default Value
300.
Setting Tradeoff
The higher the value of this parameter, the higher is the soft handoff admission threshold. Therefore, more soft handoffs are met and there are fewer call drops caused by soft handoff limits. The heavy forward load easier results in an instable system. The lower the value of this parameter, the smaller is the possibility of heavy traffic load resulting in an instable system.
Remarks
Soft handoff admission threshold is controlled by the offset related to forward basic threshold. Therefore, when the basic threshold is adjusted dynamically, the soft handoff admission threshold is also adjusted. The offset of forward soft handoff admission threshold related to the forward basic threshold is positive, that is, forward soft handoff admission threshold is higher than the forward basic threshold.
5.2.14 FWDFERTHR (Bad FER Threshold)

Description
This parameter is used to dynamically adjust the threshold and determine the leg state. When the FER of this leg exceeds this threshold, the FER of the call is regarded as bad, otherwise it is regarded as good.
Type
Related Commands
MOD FLDCTRL: FWDFERTHR=5; V3R1/V3R6- LST RSMINF: QRYINF=FLDCTRL;
Value Range
0 to100, (unit: %).
Default Value
5.
2009-11-6
Page 173 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
If the value of the parameter is set too high, the leg is regarded as a bad leg when the voice quality is very poor, and the bad FER proportion is low. If the value of this parameter is too low, the bad FER proportion is large.
Remarks
The value of this parameter must be higher than FWDVCFCHLOADFER.
5.2.15 FWDTHRADJMINNUM (Forward Threshold Adjust Min. FCH Number)

Description
This parameter is used to dynamically adjust the threshold. It indicates the minimum number of legs required when actual forward bad FER proportion is calculated. When the number of legs on a carrier exceeds the threshold, the system dynamically adjusts forward basic admission threshold, SCH establishment admission threshold, and soft handoff admission threshold based on FWDFERTHR (Bad FER Threshold) and FWDFERPROP (Bad FER Proportion).
Type
Related Commands
MOD FLDCTRL: FWDTHRADJMINNUM=10; LST RSMINF: QRYINF=FLDCTRL;
Value Range
0 to 255.
Default Value
10.
Setting Tradeoff
If the value of this parameter is high, the dynamic admission control is not implemented even the system load is very high. As a result, the QoS and the capacity cannot be properly balanced. A small value of this parameter causes unnecessary dynamic adjustments and adjusts the admission threshold to the minimum. As a result, the call service cannot access the network.
2009-11-6
Page 174 of 438
Internal
Remarks
If actual number of legs is smaller than the value of this parameter, the Bad FER proportion is not calculated and the load threshold is not adjusted.
5.2.16 EPACAVAL (EPACA Resource Threshold)

Description
This parameter is used in the enhanced PACA (EPACA) function. When the BSC receives the call setup request or paging response from the MS, it invokes internal functions to check the usage of system resources. If the forward load exceeds the value of this parameter, the system returns the reason why no resource is available. Then, the BSC notifies the MSC, and the MSC determines whether to release some calls for priority subscribers.
Type
Related Commands
MOD FLDCTRL LST RSMINF: QRYINF=FLDCTRL;
Value Range
0 to 65535, (unit: 0.10%).
Default Value
2000.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
The load fluctuates constantly. If the parameter is set too high, the MSC will not release calls for priority subscribers. As a result, the priority subscribers may fail to access the network. If the parameter is set too low, the MSC will release calls unnecessarily; user experience and the traffic statistics are affected.
2009-11-6
Page 175 of 438
Internal
5.3 Reverse Load Control Parameters

5.3.1 REVLDCTRLSW (Reverse Load Control Algorithm Selection)
Description
This parameter specifies the mode of reverse load control, that is, the RSSI rise mode or reverse equivalent user mode.
Type
Related Commands
Commands for modification: V2R2/V2R3/V3R1 - MOD BSCRSM V3R6C02 and later versions - MOD RLDCTRL Commands for query: V2R2/V2R3/V3R1 - LST BSCRSM V3R6C02 and later versions - LST RSMINF
Value Range
RSSIRISE (RSSI Rise) and EQUSERS (Equivalent users).
Default Value
EQUSERS.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
2009-11-6
Page 176 of 438
Internal
5.3.2 REVMAXUSER (Max Number of Equivalent Reverse Channels)

Description
This parameter specifies the maximum number of equivalent reverse channels of RC3 voice FCHs per carrier. The measurement of reverse load is inaccurate, therefore, the number of equivalent reverse channels is used for admission control. In the case of reverse admission control, the number of current equivalent reverse channels and the equivalent reverse channels to be assigned is calculated. If the sum is greater than REVMAXUSER, new calls are rejected. If the sum is smaller than REVMAXUSER, new calls can be accessed.
Type
BSC internal algorithm parameter. Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
MOD CHINF LST CHMINF: QRYINF=CHINF;
Value Range
0 to 255.
Default Value
75.
Setting Tradeoff
In the case of voice or data service capacity test, the system capacity is increased when the value of this parameter increases. However, the system reliability is affected. Therefore, on commercial networks, this parameter should not be modified.
Remarks
None.
5.3.3 LOWUSERNUM (Low User Number)

Description
When the number of reverse equivalent users is smaller than the threshold, the reverse load is low.
Type
Carrier-level internal parameter.
2009-11-6
Page 177 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
MOD RLDCTRL LST RSMINF: QRYINF=RLDCTRL;
Value Range
0 to 255.
Default Value
20.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
5.3.4 HIGH_USER_NUM (High User Number)

Description
When the number of reverse equivalent users is greater than or equal to the threshold, the reverse load is high. When the number of reverse equivalent subscribers is between LOW_USER_NUM and HIGH_USER_NUM, the reverse load is medium. For admission control algorithms of low load area, medium load area, and high load area, see the minimum and the maximum admission thresholds for each area.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 255.
Default Value
60.
2009-11-6
Page 178 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
For details, see "LOW_USER_NUM (Number of Low Load Users)".
5.3.5 LOWMINTHR (Low Min. Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the minimum threshold of ROT when the reverse load is low. If the ROT is smaller than the threshold, calls cannot be accessed.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 600, (unit: 0.1 dBm).
Default Value
599.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
ROT indicates the RSSI increment related to background noise (noise floor) and it is calculated based on the current RSSI measurement and noise floor.
5.3.6 LOWMAXTHR (Low Max. Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the maximum threshold of ROT when the reverse load is low. If the ROT is greater than the threshold, calls cannot be accessed.
2009-11-6
Page 179 of 438
Internal
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 600, (unit: 0.1 dBm).
Default Value
600.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
For details, see "LOWMINTHR".
5.3.7 MIDMINTHR (Mid Min. Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the minimum threshold of ROT when the reverse load is medium. If the ROT is smaller than the threshold, calls can be accessed.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 600, (unit: 0.1 dBm).
Default Value
599.
2009-11-6
Page 180 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
For details, see "LOWMINTHR".
5.3.8 MIDMAXTHR (Mid Max. Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the maximum threshold of ROT when the reverse load is medium. If the ROT is greater than the threshold, calls cannot be accessed.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 600, (unit: 0.1 dBm).
Default Value
600.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
5.3.9 HIGHMINTHR (High Min. Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the minimum threshold of ROT when the reverse load is high. If the ROT is smaller than the threshold, calls can be accessed.
Type
2009-11-6
Page 181 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 600, (unit: 0.1 dBm).
Default Value
150.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
5.3.10 HIGHMAXTHR (High Max. Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the maximum threshold of ROT when the reverse load is high. If the ROT is greater than the threshold, calls cannot be accessed.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 600, (unit: 0.1 dBm).
Default Value
200.
2009-11-6
Page 182 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
5.3.11 FERMINNUM (FER Stat Min. FCH Number)

Description
This parameter specifies the minimum number of legs required for the calculation of actual reverse bad FER proportion.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 255.
Default Value
10.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
5.3.12 BADFERTHR (Bad FER Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the number of reverse FERs when the leg is regarded as bad.
Type
2009-11-6
Page 183 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 100, (unit: %).
Default Value
5.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
5.3.13 BADFERPROP (Bad FER Proportion)

Description
This parameter specifies the ratio of reverse bad FER legs to total reverse legs when the threshold is between maximum admission threshold and minimum admission threshold. If the proportion of reverse bad FER legs is greater than the value of this parameter, new calls cannot be accessed. If the proportion is smaller than the value of this parameter, new call access is admitted.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 100, (unit: %).
Default Value
20.
2009-11-6
Page 184 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None. = 76 > 75.
5.4 Voice Access Priority Parameters

5.4.1 Parameters of Voice Access Priority Based on Walsh Codes and Other Resources 5.4.2 VOICEACCSW (Voice Service Access Priority Switch)
Description
This parameter specifies the voice access priority switch on the specified carrier.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
OFF (enable) and OFF (disable).
Default Value
OFF.
Setting Tradeoff
By use of the voice service access priority function, the system timely releases the SCHs so that the congestions caused by the shortage of resources can be avoided. However, the transmission rate of data service is reduced.
2009-11-6
Page 185 of 438
Internal
Remarks
This function is applicable to the scenario where voice and data services coexist in a network. Resources are limited and the QoS priority of voice service is higher than that of data service.
5.4.3 VOICEACCALG (Voice Service Access Priority Algorithm)

Description
This parameter specifies that the carrier uses one or more voice service access priority algorithms.
Type
Algorithm parameter in the BSC. Ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
Value Range
WALSH-BASED PRIORITY ACCESS ALGORITHM/ SPU LICENSE REVERSE CE-BASED PRIORITY ACCESS ALGORITHM / REVERSE EQUIVALENT SUBSCIBER-BASED PRIORITY ACCESS ALGORITHM / BTS-BASED PRIORITY ACCESS ALGORITHM WALSH-BASED PRIORITY ACCESS ALGORITHM: Walsh-Based Priority Access Algorithm SPU LICENSE REVERSE CE-BASED PRIORITY ACCESS ALGORITHM: SPU License Reverse CE-BASED Priority Access Algorithm REVERSE EQUIVALENT SUBSCIBER-BASED PRIORITY ACCESS ALGORITHM: Reverse Equivalent Subscriber-Based Priority Access Algorithm BTS-BASED PRIORITY ACCESS ALGORITHM: BTS-Based Priority Access Algorithm
Default Value
WALSH-BASED PRIORITY ACCESS ALGORITHM: Walsh-based access priority algorithm
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
2009-11-6
Page 186 of 438
Internal
5.4.4 Load-Based Voice Access Preferential Parameters 5.4.5 FWDSTOBTHR (F-SCH To Basic Threshold)
Description
This parameter specifies the offset of forward SCH admission threshold related to the forward basic threshold. It is expressed in the permillage of sector power.
Type
Related Commands
MOD FLDCTRL LST CHMINF: QRYINF= FLDCTRL;
Value Range
10000 to 10000 (unit: 0.1%).
Default Value
100.
Setting Tradeoff
FWDSTOBTHR is configured according to the load fluctuation. When the forward load is heavier than FWDSTOBTHR, the system releases the SCH power to ensure the access preference of the voice calls, thus, decreasing the transmission rate of data service.
Remarks
This function is applicable to the scene that voice and data services coexist in a network. The forward powers are limited and the QoS priority of voice service is higher than that of data service.
5.5 RC3/RC4 Self-Adaptive Assignment Parameters

5.5.1 RCVOICESW (Voice RC Switch)
Description
This parameter specifies the switch for selecting RCs during the assignment of FCHs for voice services.
2009-11-6
Page 187 of 438
Internal
Type
Related Commands
Commands for modification: V2R2/V2R3 - MOD MCHM; V3R1-MOD CHM; V3R6C02 and later versions - MOD CHINF Commands for query: V2R2/V2R3 - LST MCHM; V3R1-LST CHM; V3R6C02 and later versions - LST CHMINF
Value Range
RC3: RC3 only, RC4: RC4 only, and ARC: self-adaptive.
Default Value
RC3.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
5.5.2 RCDATAFCHSW (Data FCH RC Switch)

Description
This parameter specifies the switch for selecting RCs during the assignment of FCHs for data services.
Type
Related Commands
Commands for modification: V2R2/V2R3 - MOD MCHM; V3R1-MOD CHM;
Internal
V3R6C02 and later versions - MOD CHINF Commands for query: V2R2/V2R3 - LST MCHM; V3R1-LST CHM; V3R6C02 and later versions - LST CHMINF
Value Range
RC3 RC3 only, RC4 RC4 only, and ARCself-adaptive.
Default Value
RC3.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
5.5.3 RCDATASCHSW (Data SCH RC Switch)

Description
This parameter specifies the switch for selecting RCs during the assignment of SCHs for data services.
Type
Related Commands
Commands for modification: V2R2/V2R3- MOD MCHM; V3R1-MOD CHM; V3R6C02 and later versions -MOD CHINF Commands for query: V2R2/V2R3- LST MCHM; V3R1-LST CHM; V3R6C02 and later versions -LST CHMINF
Value Range
RC3 RC3 only, RC4 RC4 only, and ARCself-adaptive.
2009-11-6
Page 189 of 438
Internal
Default Value
RC3.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
5.6 Walsh Allocation Strategy

5.6.1 WALSHALLOCATE (Walsh Allocation Strategy)
Description
This parameter specifies the selection switch for Walsh allocation strategy.
Type
Related Commands
MOD CHINF LST CHINF
Value Range
Buddy, CODTRBL, TQCODTRBL, and HFCODTRBL.
Default Value
Buddy.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
The Walsh assignment strategy optional function is supported by V300R006C01 and later versions. The version earlier than V300R006C01 only supports the Buddy algorithm.
2009-11-6
Page 190 of 438
Internal
5.7 EVRC-B
5.7.1 FWDDYN4GVSW (Forward COP Adjustment Switch)
Description
This parameter is the dynamic 4GV switch. When it is enabled, the system can dynamically adjust the COP values based on the forward loads.
Type
Internal parameter of the carrier level. Ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
Value Range
ON and OFF.
Default Value
OFF
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
5.7.2 FWDADJMINCOP (Minimum Forward COP Adjustment Value)

Description
This parameter is the minimum COP value that can be dynamically assigned by the system.
Type
2009-11-6
Page 191 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
Value Range
1 to 7.
Default Value
1.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
5.7.3 FWDADJMAXCOP (Maximum Forward COP Adjustment Value)

Description
This parameter is the maximum COP value that can be dynamically assigned by the system.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
1 to 7
Default Value
6
Setting Tradeoff
None.
2009-11-6
Page 192 of 438
Internal
Remarks
None.
5.7.4 FWDCOPSTATH (Forward COP Adjustment Start Threshold)

Description
When the forward load reaches the threshold, the system starts to dynamically assign the COP values according to the forward load.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
1 to 1000 (unit: %)
Default Value
70 (unit: %)
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
5.7.5 FWDCOPLOADSTEP (Forward COP Adjustment Load Step)

Description
When the forward load reaches the forward COP adjustment start threshold, the assigned COP value increases accordingly when the forward load increases by every one step.
Type
2009-11-6
Page 193 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
Value Range
1 to 100 (unit: %)
Default Value
10 (unit: %)
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
5.7.6 REVDYN4GVSW (Reverse COP Adjustment Switch)

Description
This parameter specifies the dynamic 4GV switch. When the switch is enabled, the system can dynamically adjust the COP values based on the reverse loads.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
ON and OFF.
Default Value
OFF
Setting Tradeoff
None.
2009-11-6
Page 194 of 438
Internal
Remarks
None.
5.7.7 REVADJMINCOP (Minimum Reverse COP Adjustment Value)

Description
This parameter specifies the minimum COP value that can be dynamically assigned by the system.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
1 to 7
Default Value
1
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
5.7.8 REVADJMAXCOP (Maximum Reverse COP Adjustment Value)

Description
This parameter specifies the maximum COP value that can be dynamically assigned by the system.
Type
Internal parameter of the carrier level.
2009-11-6
Page 195 of 438
Internal
Ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
Value Range
1 to 7
Default Value
6
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
5.7.9 REVCOPSTATH (Reverse COP Adjustment Start Threshold)

Description
When the forward load reaches the threshold, the system starts to dynamically assign the COP values according to the forward load.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
1 to 99 (unit: %)
Default Value
40 (unit: %)
2009-11-6
Page 196 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
5.7.10 REVCOPLOADSTEP (Reverse COP Adjustment Load Step)

Description
When the forward load reaches the forward COP adjustment start threshold, the assigned COP values increase accordingly every time the forward load increases by one step.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
1 to 59 (unit: %)
Default Value
10 (unit: %)
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None. rmat.
2009-11-6
Page 197 of 438
Internal
5.8 Closing Idle Carriers

5.8.1 AUTODWNCDMACH (Support of Auto Blocking Of Carriers)
Description
This parameter specifies whether the automatic blocking of carriers is supported. If the automatic blocking of carriers is supported, the system automatically selects the carrier according to the sector load and it blocks or unblocks the carrier.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
YES (supported) and NO (not supported).
Default Value
NO.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
5.8.2 AUTODWNFWDEQLCHANTHD (number of equivalent FCHs threshold for the CDMA2000 1X to automatically block carriers)
Description
This parameter specifies the number of equivalent FCH threshold for the CDMA2000 1X to automatically block carriers. It is used to determine the sector load.
Type
BSC-level internal algorithm parameter.
Internal
Related Commands
MOD CELL LST CELL
Value Range
0 to 255.
Default Value
20.
Setting Tradeoff
A high value easily triggers the automatic blocking of carriers.
Remarks
None.
5.8.3 AUTODWNCOUNTTHD (count threshold for the CDMA2000 1X to automatically block carriers)
Description
This parameter specifies the count threshold for the CDMA2000 1X to automatically block carriers.
Type
Related Commands
MOD CELL LST CELL
Value Range
1 to 65535/
Default Value
600.
2009-11-6
Page 199 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
A low value easily triggers the automatic blocking of carriers.
Remarks
None.
5.8.4 UNBLKFWDEQLCHANTHD (number of equivalent FCHs threshold for the CDMA2000 1X to automatically unblock carriers)
Description
This parameter specifies the number of equivalent FCHs for the CDMA2000 1X to automatically unblock carriers.
Type
Related Commands
MOD CELL LST CELL
Value Range
1 to 255.
Default Value
40.
Setting Tradeoff
A small value easily triggers the automatic unblocking of carriers.
Remarks
None.
5.8.5 TRGARFCN (target frequency sequence for automatic blocking carriers)

Description
The system selects a carrier to block according to the sequence of the target frequencies.
2009-11-6
Page 200 of 438
Internal
Type
Related Commands
MOD BSCRSM LST BSCRSM
Value Range
The sequence is in the format ARFCN&BANDCLASS, ARFCN&BANDCLASS, Frequency range: 0 to 2047. Band range: 0 to 17.
Default Value
None.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
5.8.6 STRTIME (start time of the idle time to auto-block carriers)

Description
This parameter specifies the start time of the idle time.
Type
Related Commands
MOD CELL LST CELL
Value Range
TIME0 (0:00)/TIME1 (0:30)/TIME2 (1:00)/TIME3 (1:30)
2009-11-6
Page 201 of 438
Internal
TIME44 (22:00)/TIME45 (22:30)/TIME46 (23:00)/TIME47 (23:30)
Default Value
TIME2 (1:00).
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
The carriers can be blocked only when the system is idle.
5.8.7 STPTIME (end time of the idle time to auto-block carriers)

Description
This parameter specifies the end time of the idle time.
Type
Related Commands
MOD CELL LST CELL
Value Range
TIME0 (0:00)/TIME1 (0:30)/TIME2 (1:00)/TIME3 (1:30) TIME44 (22:00)/TIME45 (22:30)/TIME46 (23:00)/TIME47 (23:30)
Default Value
TIME2 (1:00).
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
The carriers can be blocked only when the system is idle.
2009-11-6
Page 202 of 438
Internal
6
Description Type
Paging and Access Parameters
6.1 Access Macro Diversity

6.1.1 ACMACRODIVSW (Access Macro Diversity Switch)
This parameter sets the switch of the access macro diversity. It indicates whether the access macro diversity function is enabled.
Related Commands
MOD CHM LST CHM
Value Range
YES/NO.
Default Value
YES.
Setting Tradeoff
Enabling this function can improve the access success rate.
Remarks
None.
2009-11-6
Page 203 of 438
Internal
6.1.2 MBRANUMAC (Maximum Number of Access Macro Diversity Branches)

Description
This parameter specifies the maximum number of branches of the access macro diversity.
Type
Related Commands
MOD CHM LST CHM
Value Range
1 to 6.
Default Value
3.
Setting Tradeoff
If the value of the parameter you set is too large, the successful ratio of the access is not greatly improved. The resource is wasted. The judgment of the active set of the access macro diversity is the same as that of the active set of the basic handoff. For the parameter settings, refer to the related basic soft handoff contents.
Remarks
None.
6.2 Access Handoff

6.2.1 PLTRPT (Pilot Reporting Indicator)
Description
This parameter specifies the pilot reporting indicator. That is, whether the MS needs to include additional pilot information in all the access channel messages. If this parameter is set to NO, the MS needs only to include the Origination Message and the Paging Response Message, the additional pilot information corresponding to the excess of the pilot strength above TADD. If this parameter is set to YES, the MS includes, in all the access channel
Internal
channels, the additional pilot information corresponding to the excess of the pilot strength above TADD.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
YES/NO.
Default Value
NO. It indicates that the mobile station only needs to consider the additional information of the pilot whose pilot strength exceeds the TADD in the Origination Message and the Paging Response Message.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
6.2.2 NBRSENTRY (Neighbor Set Access Entry HO Info Included Indicator)

Description
This parameter specifies the access entry handoff information included flag of neighbor set.
Type
Related Commands
2009-11-6
Page 205 of 438
Internal
Value Range
YES/NO.
Default Value
OFF.
Setting Tradeoff
The versions earlier than BSC V200R002 do not support the access handoff function of MSs with versions earlier than version 6 (IS95 MSs). IS95 MSs fail to access the network when the access handoff function is enabled. Because this is a BSC-level parameter, the modification of this parameter affects all the carriers of the BSC. Therefore, configure this parameter as follows:

If IS95 MSs exist in the network, do not enable this function. Set the value of this parameter to NO. If all the MSs in the network are IS2000 MSs, enable this function. That is, set the value of this parameter to YES. Enabling the function efficiently improves the access success rate in the unstably forward coverage area.
Remarks
Since this is a BSC-level parameter, the modification of this parameter affects all the carriers of the BSC. If the access handoff to the neighbor cell is forbidden, run the MOD NBRPARA command to set the access handoff permission flag to NO. For details, see AEHOFLG.
6.2.3 NBRSETACSINF (Neighbor Set Access Handoff Information Included Indicator)

Description
This parameter specifies the access handoff information included indicator.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
YES/NO.
2009-11-6
Page 206 of 438
Internal
Default Value
NO.
Setting Tradeoff
None of the BSC versions support the access handoff and access probe handoff functions of MSs with versions earlier than IS2000. The IS95 MSs fail to access the network when the access handoff and access probe handoff functions are enabled. Since this is a BSC-level parameter, the modification of this parameter affects all the carriers of the BSC. If most MSs in the network are IS95 MSs and these functions are enabled, access handoffs and access probe handoffs by IS95 MSs may fail in large numbers. If mainly CDMA2000 MSs exist in the network, these functions can effectively raise the access success rate in areas where forward coverage is unstable.
Remarks
This parameter must be used together with ACSHO or ACSPRBHO. For details, see ACSHO or ACSPRBHO. Since this is a BSC-level parameter, the modification of this parameter affects all the carriers of the BSC. If the access handoff to the neighbor cell is forbidden, run the MOD NBRPARA command to set the access handoff allowed indicator to NO. For details, see AHOFLG.
6.2.4 ACSHO (Access Handoff Permitted Identification)

Description
This parameter specifies the access handoff permitted identification.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
YES/NO.
Default Value
NO.
2009-11-6
Page 207 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
If most MSs in the network are IS95 MSs and the function is enabled, access handoffs by IS95 MSs may fail in large numbers. If mainly CDMA2000 MSs exist in the network, these functions can effectively raise the access success rate in areas where forward coverage is unstable.
Remarks
If NBRSETACSINF is set to YES, this parameter must be set. If NBRSETACSINF is set to NO, do not set the parameter. For details, see NBRSETACSINF.
6.2.5 ACSPRBHO (Access Probe Handoff Permitted Identification)

Description
This parameter specifies the access probe handoff permitted identification.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
YES/NO.
Default Value
NO.
Setting Tradeoff
If most MSs in the network are IS95 MSs and the function is enabled, access probe handoffs by IS95 MSs may fail in large numbers. If mainly CDMA2000 MSs exist in the network, these functions can effectively raise the access success rate in areas where forward coverage is unstable.
Remarks
If NBRSETACSINF is set to YES, this parameter must be set. If NBRSETACSINF is set to NO, do not set the parameter. For details, see NBRSETACSINF.
2009-11-6
Page 208 of 438
Internal
6.2.6 ACCHOLSTUPD (Access Handoff List Update Permitted Identification)

Description
This parameter specifies the access handoff list update permitted identification. The identification indicates whether the mobile station is permitted to update the access handoff list during an access probe procedure. YES indicates permitted. NO indicates forbidden. If the ACSPRBHO is set to YES, the field must be set.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
YES/NO.
Default Value
NO.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
6.2.7 MAXNUMPRBHO (Maximum Number of Access Probe Handoff Permitted)

Description
The parameter indicates the maximum number of times that the MS processes the access probe handoff. If ACCESS_PROBE_HO is set to 0, ignore the value. That is, only when the access probe handoff is allowed to be processed, the parameter needs to be set. For details, see ACCESS_PROBE_HO.
2009-11-6
Page 209 of 438
Internal
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
1 to 7.
Default Value
1.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
6.2.8 AEHOFLG (Access Entry HO Permission)

Description
This parameter indicates whether the MS is allowed to process the access handoff to the specified neighbor cell when the MS shifts from the idle state to the access state. For details, see NBRSENTRY.
Type
Carrier-level parameter. Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
MOD NBRPARA LST NBRPARA
Value Range
YES/NO.
2009-11-6
Page 210 of 438
Internal
Default Value
NO.
Setting Tradeoff
Set the parameter according to the actual networking requirement. Set the value to YES if the access handoff function is to be enabled. Set the value to NO if the access handoff function is to be disabled
Remarks
None.
6.2.9 AHOFLG (Access Handoff and Access Probe Handoff Permission)

Description
This parameter specifies whether to allow access handoffs and access probe handoffs by the MS to a specified neighboring cell. This parameter must be used together with the MOD ESPM command. For details, see NBRSENTRY. The access probe handoff is the handoff taken place when the MS shifts to different BTSs to monitor paging channels when performing access attempt and access probe. The access handoff is taken place when the system is in the accessed state. When the MS performs the access attempt and waits for the response message from the BTS or prepares to respond to the message, the MS finds that the paging channel is lost or deteriorates under monitoring. Thus, the access handoff is performed so that the MS shifts to the paging channel corresponding to the pilot with the best signal strength.
Type
Carrier-level parameter. Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
MOD NBRPARA LST NBRPARA
Value Range
YES/NO.
Default Value
NO.
2009-11-6
Page 211 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
Set the parameter according to the actual networking requirement. Set the value to YES if the access handoff and access probe functions are to be enabled. Set the value to NO if the access handoff and access probe functions are to be disabled.
Remarks
None.
6.3 Multi-Carrier Hard Assignment

6.3.1 ASSALW1X (Carrier Assign Allowed Indicator of CDMA2000 1X)
Description
This parameter specifies the hard assignment algorithm switch. The hard assignment function applies only to multi-carrier networking, including service type preferred assignment, MS version preferred assignment, access carrier preferred assignment, and assignment based on the RSSI. To use the hard assignment function, you need to enable this switch.
Type
Internal parameter of the cell level. Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
MOD CELL LST CELL
Value Range
YES, or NO.
Default Value
NO. If the hard assignment policy is applied to multi-carrier cells, you need to enable this switch. Otherwise, disable this switch.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
2009-11-6
Page 212 of 438
Internal
6.3.2 REVRSSICARRASSNSW (CDMA2000 1X Reverse RSSI Carrier Assignment Switch)

Description
This parameter specifies the reverse RSSI hard assignment algorithm switch. When reverse interference occurs in some frequencies in multi-carrier networking, you can start RSSI hard assignment to assign calls to the carriers with no interference or those with less interference. In this way, the voice quality can be guaranteed.
Type
Internal parameter of the cell level. Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
MOD CELL LST CELL
Value Range
ON2 (Based on RSSI relative value difference and equivalent user number difference). ON1 (Based on RSSI absolute value). OFF (Off).
Default Value
OFF: a. When there is no reverse interference, disable this function. b. When there is long-term reverse interference, you are advised to enable this function before locating the interference source and clearing the interference. After the interference is cleared, disable this function. c. If irregular burst interference occurs frequently, you are advised to enable this function to avoid unnecessary interference.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
1. 2. To start reverse RSSI hard assignment, you need to enable this switch. To clear long-term reverse interference, you need to perform frequency clearance. Starting reverse RSSI hard assignment is only a temporary preventative measure to locate the interference source and clear the interference. It cannot fundamentally solve the problem.
2009-11-6
Page 213 of 438
Internal
6.3.3 HARDASSIGNTYPE (CDMA2000 1X Priority Assignment Type)

Description
This parameter specifies the priority assignment type of the CDMA2000 1X hard assignment algorithm.
Type
For versions earlier than V3R6C08: BSC-level internal parameter. V3R6C08: Internal algorithm parameter of the carrier level. Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
Versions earlier than V3R6C08: MOD CHM LST CHM V3R6C08: MOD CELL LST CELL
Value Range
ONLY_DATA (Assign according Data Service). BOTH_VOICE_DATA (Assign according Voice and Data Service). MS_PREV_ASSIGN (Assign according to MS PRev). NULL (No Priority Assignment).
Default Value
NULL (No Priority Assignment)
Setting Tradeoff
In multi-carrier networking, you need to make the multi-carrier assignment policy according to the actual radio environment, traffic model, and networking. 1. 2. 3. If only voice services are processed or few data services are processed in the existing network, assignment by service type (3NULL) is not required. If data service traffic is heavy, you are advised to assign data services to separate carriers (0: ONLY_DATA , or 1: BOTH_VOICE_DATA). Huawei equipment supports both IS95 and IS2000 MSs. If Huawei equipment is used in networking, you are not advised to use MS version preferred assignment. You need to use MS version preferred assignment in the following two situations:
Huawei Confidential No Spreading Without Permission Page 214 of 438
2009-11-6
Internal
4.
If Huawei equipment is used with equipment from other vendors (IS95 and IS2000 MSs not supported) in networking, you can configure MS version preferred assignment in boundary sectors (2: MS_PREV_ASSIGN). There are some IS95 MSs in the existing network, and the hard handoff is configured in boundary sectors using multi-carrier. Because of the smaller number of IS95 MS than that of 2000 MSs supporting the hard handoff algorithm and low the hard handoff success rate, you need to assign IS95 MSs to the basic carriers. In this case, the basic carriers of boundary sectors are configured as the priority carriers for IS95 MSs.
5.
Remarks
1. To start the service type priority and version priority assignment functions, you need to enable the hard assignment allowed switch and service/version preferred assignment switch. This parameter applies to all calls on the SPU.
2.
6.3.4 ASSIGNACCFREQSW (Assign Access Frequency Switch)

Description
This parameter specifies the hard assignment access carrier priority assignment switch.
Type
Parameter of the carrier level. Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
MOD CHINF LST CHMINF QRYINF=CHINF;
Value Range
ON, or OFF
Default Value
ON.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
2009-11-6
Page 215 of 438
Internal
6.3.5 CARRASSGNVAL (Carrier Assign Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the hard assignment function. When the hard assignment allowed switch is turned on, during admission judgment of a call, if the load on the current sector carrier (currently referred to as the forward load) does not exceed this threshold, hard assignment can be performed preferentially according to the service type, MS version, and access carrier. If the load on the current sector carrier exceeds this threshold, the call is directly assigned to carriers that have high priorities and light traffic. In this way, the load balancing is restricted between carriers.
Type
Algorithm parameter in the BSC. Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 1000 (unit: %).
Default Value
80.
Setting Tradeoff
The higher this threshold, the harder it is for the forward load of the current carrier to exceed the assignment threshold. If the hard assignment threshold of other carriers in the sector is set low, the traffic under other carriers is assigned to this carrier.
Remarks
You are advised to set this threshold four times the pilot channel gain. If the pilot channel gain is -37 (12%), set the hard assignment threshold to 50%.
6.3.6 MSPREVASSGNTP (Assign MS Version Priority Type)

Description
This parameter specifies whether IS95 MSs or IS2000 MSs take priority in accessing a certain frequency. For example, when the hard assignment function is enabled and hard assignment is performed by MS version, if carrier F1 is configured as the preferred carrier for IS2000 MSs, IS2000 MSs are assigned preferentially to carrier F1, regardless of whichever carrier they originate calls from. Only when carrier F1 is overloaded beyond a certain threshold, the load sharing principle is followed and the MSs are assigned to other carriers.
2009-11-6
Page 216 of 438
Internal
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
MS2000_PRIO (Priority of 2000 MS). MS95_PRIO (Priority of 95 MS). NO_PRIO (No priority).
Default Value
NO_PRIO.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
If the version preferred assignment function is required, you must turn on the hard assignment allowed switch and the service/version preferred assignment switch.
6.3.7 SERVASSGNTP (Assign Service Priority Type)

Description
This parameter specifies whether voice services or data services have priority in accessing a certain frequency. For example, when the hard assignment function is enabled and hard assignment is performed by service type, if carrier F1 configured as the preferred carrier for voice services, voice services are assigned preferentially to carrier F1, whichever carrier the MS originates calls from. Only when carrier F1 is overloaded beyond a certain threshold, the load sharing principle is followed and the MSs are assigned to other carriers.
Type
Related Commands
Internal
Value Range
VOICE_PRIO (Voice Service Priority) DATA_PRIO (Data Service Priority) NO_PRIO (No Priority)
Default Value
NO_PRIO (No Priority)
Setting Tradeoff
In multi-carrier networking, work out a multi-carrier assignment policy according to the actual radio environment, traffic model, and networking mode. a. If only data services are processed or few data services are processed in the network, assignment by service type (NO_PRIO) is not required. b. If data service traffic is heavy, assign data services to separate carriers because the bursts of data services affect voice services. Configure carriers that need to carry data services as preferring data services (DATA_PRIO), and configure carriers that carry voice services as preferring voice services (VOICE_PRIO).
Remarks
If the version preferred assignment function is required, you must turn on the hard assignment allowed switch and the service/version preferred assignment switch.
6.3.8 PLTPL (Pilot Priority Level)

Description
This parameter ensures that, when multiple carriers meet the priority condition, the one with a higher priority level and a lighter load is chosen. For example, when a voice call comes in, there are two voice-preferring carriers to choose between. The one with a higher priority is chosen.
Type
Internal parameter of the carrier level. Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
Value Range
1 to 6.
2009-11-6
Page 218 of 438
Internal
Default Value
1.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
In ordinary multi-carrier networking, you are advised to configure the priority levels of all the carriers as the same (the default value is 1). 1. Multi-Carrier Networking.
6.4 Paging Message Scheduling Policy Optimization

6.4.1 PCHRSNDSWT (PCH Resending Switch)
Description
This parameter specifies whether the paging messages are re-sent by the BTS. If this switch is turned off, the BTS does not re-send any paging message. If this switch is turned on, the BTS re-sends the paging messages based on the configuration.
Type
Internal algorithm parameter of the BTS level.
Related Commands
SET CBTSCDMA1XCTRLPARA; DSP CBTSCFG;
Value Range
ON (enabled), or OFF (disabled).
Default Value
OFF.
Setting Tradeoff
Some paging messages do not require response from MSs. The system is uncertain whether these messages are received and processed by MSs. The system supports the paging message resending function. In this way, paging messages that do not require responses from MSs but are very important in the process can be re-sent multiple times, and thus message loss is prevented. Most messages do not need to be re-sent, but for the important messages such as the ECAM message, the re-sending times should be increased.
2009-11-6
Page 219 of 438
Internal
Remarks
None.
6.4.2 PCHLTSWT (PCH Lifetime Switch)

Description
This parameter is used to control the duration for which the paging message is saved in the paging message queue of the BTS. This switch specifies whether this algorithm is enabled.
Type
Internal parameter of the BTS level.
Related Commands
SET CBTSCDMA1XCTRLPARA DSP CBTSCFG BTSID=1, CFGID=CBTSCDMA1XCTRLPARA;
Value Range
ON (enabled), or OFF (disabled).
Default Value
OFF.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
6.4.3 MSGLIVETIME (Message Live Time)

Description
This parameter specifies the life cycle of the paging messages in message queue of the BTS channel board. The unit is 80 ms.
Type
Related Commands
MOD FCSCHMSGPARA MSGID=MSG0, MSGLIVETIME=128;
2009-11-6
Page 220 of 438
Internal
LST FCSCHMSGPARA;
Value Range
0 to 128 (unit: 80 ms).
Default Value
0.
Setting Tradeoff
The settings of the life cycle are related to the settings of the sending interval of the air interface signaling layer 2 at the BSC side. The life cycle is not more than the sending interval. The following table lists the default life cycle value of each paging channel. Adjust the settings according to network experiences. PCH Message Type Channel Assignment Message Life Cycle 128 Remarks Currently, it is 128 x 80 = 10.24s; the sending interval of the CAM message layer 2 is 300 ms. Currently, it is 128 x 80 = 10.24s; the sending interval of the ECAM message layer 2 is 300 ms. Currently, it is 64 x 80 = 5120 ms. You are advised to adjust the life cycle according to the re-sending interval of the MSC. 32 x 80 = 2560 ms 32 x 80 = 2560 ms 32 x 80 = 2560 ms 32 x 80 = 2560 ms 32 x 80 = 2560 ms. Currently, the sending interval of the Order Message layer 2 is 300 ms.
Extended Channel Assignment Message General Page Message
128
64
Data Burst Message Authentication Challenge Message Feature Notification Message Service Redirection Message Order Message
32 32 32 32 32
Remarks
The life cycle of the paging channel messages indicates that the duration from the time when a message enters a queue to the time when the message is removed from the queue. The value of the life cycle should be adjusted according to the network experience. When adjusting the value, consider the cooperation between the timers that are involved in the calling process. For the GPM, the MSC controls the re-sending operation and the re-sending interval. The life cycle of the GPM is related to the paging re-sending interval timer T3113 of the MSC. The life cycle of the GPM should be shorter than the T3113. The life cycle of the CAM/ECAM
2009-11-6
Page 221 of 438
Internal
message is related to the waiting TCH Preamble timer CCM_T_WT_TCH_PREAMBLE (default value: 3s). The life cycle of the CAM/ECAM message should not exceed the timer.
6.5 Extended Boundary Paging

Extended paging indicates that the MSCe extends the paging range to increase the paging success rate in the BSC or the MSCe. Before the paging optimization, if frequent handoffs occur between location areas for mobile, location registration may not be initiated to the MSCe/VLR when users roam to new locations. In the VLR, when the MSCe pages the users whose data does not exist or whose MSs are deactivated, no response to paging occurs. In this case, the MSCe can directly extend the paging range to solve the problem. Extended range paging includes initially triggered paging and non-initially triggered paging.
Initially triggered paging: The "ordinary calls use paging optimization function" is set to YES. If the "paging optimization triggering point" is set to 0, the extended range paging is triggered for the MSCe at the first paging. Non-initially triggered paging: The "ordinary calls use paging optimization function" is set to YES. If the MSCe can initiate paging n times and the "paging optimization triggering point" is m (0 < m < n), the Paging Request message sent by the MSCe is processed according to the normal paging procedure. In this case, paging is performed multiple times for the users with no response. If no response is received after the MSCe initiates paging (m-1) times, the MSCe performs extended range paging when it initiates paging m times.
The CSOFTX3000 system supports the following two extended paging range schemes. You can choose any one through data configuration.

Send paging messages to all the locations under the MSCe. Send paging messages to the neighbor locations near the locations registered by users.
When the MSCe sends short messages to users, the processing method is as follows:

If the "Paging scope of short messages" is set to "Force send paging by using LAC", the LAC is used forcibly to send paging messages and paging location result is not required. If location paging is performed and the paging response message contains the CI, the consequent short messages are processed in CI mode. In this case, the setting of the "Paging scope of short messages" is invalid.
The following table shows the procedure for processing extended paging by the MSCe.
2009-11-6
Page 222 of 438
Internal
Figure 6-1 Procedure for processing extended paging
The procedure for processing extended paging by the MSCe is as follows:

Before sending the Paging Request message, the MSCe queries the paging scheme table and neighbor cell table to obtain the extended paging scheme for the call (including repeated paging times and optimization paging range) and neighbor cell information. The MSCe sends the Paging Request message to page calls.

If the MSCe receives the Paging Response message before the paging timer expires, it continues the call setup according to the normal call processing procedure. If the MSCe does not receive the Paging Response message after the paging timer expires and paging is not performed for the last time, it continues the call setup according to the normal paging procedure.
2009-11-6
Page 223 of 438
Internal
If the paging timer expires and paging is performed for the last time, the MSCe sends the Paging Request message in the extended range according to the results by query the paging scheme table. In this way, extended paging is implemented.
The procedure for the non-initially triggered paging is as follows: Figure 6-2 Extended paging service procedure (focused on the part of paging)
The procedure is as follows:

1. The MSCe sends the Paging Request message to the BSS for paging calls. In this message, the
CELLID_LIST is carried to indicate the current location information of users.

2. If paging has no response, the MSCe initiates the Paging Request message many times. 3. If there is no response for paging, the MSCe extends the paging range when initiating the Paging
Request message for the last time. Location information is carried in the CELLID_LIST message after the paging range is extended.
4. If one of the location areas has response, the BSS sends the Paging Response message to the MSCe.
When the MSCe performs the full-MSCe paging, no location area information is carried in the Paging Request message sent by the MSCe. The procedure for the initially triggered paging is as follows:
Figure 1-1 Extended paging service procedure (focused on the part of paging)
2009-11-6
Page 224 of 438
Internal
The procedure is as follows:

1. When the MSCe performs the first paging, extended paging is triggered, and information about
multiple location areas is carried in the CELLID_LIST message after the paging range is extended.
2. If one of the location areas has response, the BSS sends the Paging Response message to the MSCe.
6.6 Common Parameters on the MSC Side

To implement paging optimization, you need to add the table of cells in neighboring location areas and modify the paging scheme table.
6.6.1 Table of Cells in Neighboring Location Areas

Description
This table is used to add the information about cells in neighboring location areas of a location area and control whether to send the paging message to all location areas under the MSCe. The MSCe queries this table when sending the Paging Request message for the last time. At the same time, the MSCe extends the paging range according to the configuration data in this table, sends the Paging Request message to all the BSCs under the MSCe, and initiates paging to all locations under the MSCe.

[LAC]: Index LAC number for querying information about neighboring location areas. [Neighboring LAC Name]: Name of the index LAC number for querying information about neighboring location areas. [All MSC Paging Flag]: Whether to start full-MSCe paging. If YES, the Paging Request message not carrying the CELLIDLIST is sent to all BSCs under the MSCe. If [All MSC Paging Flag] is chosen in configuration of the table of cells in neighboring location areas, the LAI corresponding to the called user is valid and the Paging Request message not carrying the CELLIDLIST is sent to all BSCs. If this parameter is set to YES, the following parameters are invalid. [Location Area Category]: Used to indicate whether the neighboring information is about the location area or about the cell. [Index Lac Included Flag]: Used to identify whether the neighboring location area includes the original LAC. If YES, the LAC is used to identify the last neighboring location area cell. You can enter the last nine neighboring LACs. [Neighboring LACCI Flag]: Used to identify whether the neighboring location area is valid. [Neighboring LACCI]: Used to identify the neighboring location area cell. If "Neighboring LACCI Flag" is set to YES, you need to set this parameter and ensure that the LACCI has the corresponding LAC or CGI value in the table of cells in location areas. In one record, all valid "Neighboring LACCI x" parameters must belong to the same MSCID. The value of x ranges from 0 to 9.

Type
Internal parameter of the MSC level.
Related Commands
ADD NEIGHBORLAC
Internal
MOD NEIGHBORLAC RMV NEIGHBORLAC LST NEIGHBORLAC
Value Range
LAC: 0x0001 to 0xFFFE.
Default Value
None.
Setting Tradeoff
Six neighboring LACs or ten neighboring CIs can be configured.
Remarks
1. All the neighboring LACs and source LACs must belong to the same MSCID. 2. When the MSC sends the paging request message, it first queries the list of the neighboring location
area cell information and measures whether the LAC includes the extended LACs (or neighboring LACs). If the LAC does not include the extended LACs (or neighboring LACs), the MSC sends the paging request message according to the original LAC. If the LAC includes the extended LACs (or neighboring LACs), the MSC uses the related extended LAC and sends it to the BSC during the last paging.
3. Through the neighboring cell, the MSC implements many potential LAC/CI paging functions. The
MSC can take multiple LACs or CIs to a BSC at a time. Currently, the maximum number of LACs that can be used is six. The maximum number of CIs that can be used is 10. The LACs cannot be used with the CIs.
6.6.2 Location Area Cell Table

Description
When an extended LAC is a physical LAC, the information about the LAC and the cells that are included in the LAC should be added to the location area cell table. In this way, the information can be used for the LAC and CI paging. When an extended LAC is a virtual LAC (that is, when the LAI is configured and the CI is not configured in the mapping location area cell table), only add the virtual LAC to the location area cell table.
Type
Related Commands
ADD LAICGI; MOD LAICGI; RMV LAICGI;
Internal
LST LAICGI;
Value Range
None.
Default Value
None.
Setting Tradeoff
The extended LAC and original LAC area must not overlap. Otherwise, a huge number of paging times are performed on a cell, thus causing heavy paging traffic.
Remarks
When the LAI is configured, a LAC can include one or more BSCs. In the current table, a LAC can be configured with a maximum of five BSCs. When the CGI is configured, the BSC DPC (BSC destination signaling point) corresponds to the BSC that the cell belongs to.
6.6.3 Modifying Paging Policy Data

Description
The paging policy table records the paging policy and paging capacity data of the system.
[Max repeated paging number]: Maximum number of paging times initiated after the MSCe sends the first paging and there is no response. The MSCe supports up to seven times of paging when there is no response. [Build slot index function]: Used to set whether the MSCe needs to construct the Slot Index parameter. When there is no slot index or user data is lost in the VDB in user registration, the MSCe queries the data in the paging policy table before sending the Paging Request message and decides whether to construct the slot index according to the setting of this parameter. [Slot index]: Used to set the timeslot index when MSCe sends the paging message. One PCM has only eight timeslots so the value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 7. [Normal call paging scope]: Used to set the range for the MSCe to send paging messages in voice and data service processing. The MSCe supports three types of paging range, that is, "Send paging by using LAI", "Send paging to the whole BSS", and "Send paging by using LAC". [Paging service option]: Used to set the coding technology for the voice service. The CSOFTX3000 system supports three types of voice coding technology, that is, "8K voice", "EVRC voice", and "13K voice". [Paging optimization]: To ensure that the MSCe can implement the extended paging function, you need to set this parameter to "Use the paging optimization function". [Whole net paging]: Entire network paging switch. In entire network paging, you need to set this parameter to ON. [Reply function of receiving short message]: Used to set whether the MS automatically responds when receiving short messages.

2009-11-6
Page 227 of 438

Internal
[Location paging]: Used to set whether the MS initiates the location paging procedure to determine the position of the MS. [Paging scope of short messages]: Used to set the range for the MSCe to send paging messages in short message service processing.
Type
Related Commands
MOD PAGINGSTRA LST PAGINGSTRA
Value Range
None.
Default Value
None.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
1. When the extended boundary paging is enabled in the MSC, you can choose whether the extended
boundary paging range includes the original LAC, which is included by default. You are advised to retain the default value.
2. Extended boundary paging is enabled only in the last paging. If the number of resending times is 2,
three times of paging are initiated. That is, extended boundary paging is enabled at the third paging. If paging is initiated only once, extended boundary paging is not enabled. The number of resending times is set through "Max repeated paging number".
3. The extended paging scheme is used at the MSC side. That is, the extended boundary paging mode
that requires the joint effort of the MSC and the BSC is used. If the extended paging virtual LAC is required, the MSC extended paging mode should be used in the BSC.
6.7 Common Parameters on the BSC Side

6.7.1 EXTBNDPAGEMODE (Expand Boundary Page Mode)
Description
This parameter specifies the extended boundary paging mode that needs to be configured.
2009-11-6
Page 228 of 438
Internal
Type
Internal parameter of the BSC level.
Related Commands
MOD EBPGPARA EXTBNDPAGEMODE = NOEXTPAGE; LST EBPGPARA;
Value Range
NOEXTPAGE (no Expand Boundary Paging) REALPAGE (Base on real LAC) NBRPAGE (Base on Idle Neighborhood) INTERBSC (Base on MSC)
Default Value
NOEXTPAGE (no Expand Boundary Paging)
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
1. When the extended boundary paging is enabled in the MSC by default and is disabled in the BSC by
default, the BSC performs according to the mode of the MSC. If the MSC sends a virtual LAC as the extended LAC to the BSC, the BSC does not deliver paging to the virtual LAC. Instead, the BSC delivers paging only to the LAC whose extended LAC is a physical LAC. The MSC achieves the function of sending multiple physical LACs. If you want the BSC to deliver paging to the LAC whose extended LAC is a virtual LAC, you should choose BSC extension mode 3 (MSC extension). Modes 1 and 2 are used only when the extended boundary paging is implemented in the BSC.
2. In the extended boundary paging scheme, the MSC may send paging messages to signaling point A
under the BSC, forward them to signaling point B under the BSC, and respond to paging over signaling point B. Therefore, you need to check whether the MSC supports this processing mode. If the MSC supports this processing mode, set parameter CCM20 (controlling the forwarding of paging messages between signaling points) of the BSC to 0x1 (0x0 by default). Currently, through actual test verification, Huawei MSC supports this processing mode.
6.7.2 STRATTIME (Start Extend Boundary Page at the N time)

Description
This parameter specifies after how many times paging fails the extended boundary paging policy is delivered. When the extended boundary paging mode is the "extended boundary paging mode based on physical LACs" or the "extended boundary paging mode based on idle handoff relations", this parameter must be configured.
2009-11-6
Page 229 of 438
Internal
Type
Related Commands
MOD EBPGPARA EXTBNDPAGEMODE=REALPAGE, STRATTIME=3; LST EBPGPARA;
Value Range
1 to 3.
Default Value
The default value 1, namely, starting extended boundary paging at the first paging
Setting Tradeoff
This parameter is valid only when the extended boundary paging in the BSC in enabled, that is when the extended boundary paging mode is the "extended boundary paging mode based on physical LACs" or the "extended boundary paging mode based on idle handoff relations".
Remarks
None.
6.7.3 Neighboring LAC Relation Table

Description
This parameter is used to add neighboring LACs for central LACs in the neighboring LAC relation table. The table is used only for the internal extended boundary paging based on physical LACs within the BSC. The table provides the extended relations between physical LACs,
Type
Related Commands
ADD NBRLAC; MOD NBRLAC; RMV NBRLAC; LST NBRLAC; For example, to add a neighboring LAC "0x0003" for the central LAC "0x0001", run the following command: ADD NBRLAC REALLAC="0x0001", NBRLAC1="0x0003";
2009-11-6
Page 230 of 438
Internal
Value Range
None.
Default Value
None.
Setting Tradeoff
A central LAC cannot have repeated neighboring LACs. A central LAC can have six neighboring LACs at most. Considering the paging traffic, the number of neighboring LACs should not exceed two.
Remarks
You can run the MOD NBRLAC command, entering "-" for the value of the related parameter, to remove some of the neighboring LACs.
6.7.4 IFBORDCELL (If Border Cell)

Description
This parameter specifies whether the cell is a border cell. This parameter is used to search for border cells when the extended boundary paging mode based on idle handoff relations is chosen.
Type
Related Commands
ADD CELL IFBORDCELL=YES; MOD CELL IFBORDCELL=YES; LST CELL;
Value Range
YES, or NO.
Default Value
NO.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
2009-11-6
Page 231 of 438
Internal
Remarks
When the network structure changes because of the addition of new cells, the border cells may change. Some parameters should be changed accordingly.
6.7.5 VIRLAC1 (Expand LAC1)/ VIRLAC2 (Expand LAC2)/ VIRLAC3 (Expand LAC3)/ VIRLAC4 (Expand LAC4)/ VIRLAC5 (Expand LAC5)/ VIRLAC6 (Expand LAC6)
Description
This parameter is used in the extended boundary paging mode that requires the joint work of the MSC and the BSC. When the MSC is configured with the extended virtual LAC, the cell range of the extended virtual LAC should be defined on the BSC side. This is, add this parameter to the cell properties so that the cell belongs to the configured extended virtual LAC.
Type
Related Commands
ADD CELL BTSID=1, CN=111, LAC="0x1111", VIRLAC1="0x1234"; LST CELL; RMV CELL;
Value Range
0x0001 to 0xFFFE.
Default Value
None.
Setting Tradeoff
A LAC under the current BSC supports a maximum of five extended LACs. The extended LAC configuration should be consistent with the at the MSC side.
Remarks
None.
6.8 GPM Message Combination

This algorithm does not have a dedicated switch. You can configure the number of combined GPM messages to enable and disable this algorithm.
2009-11-6
Page 232 of 438
Internal
If the number of combined GPM messages is not 0, this algorithm is enabled. If the number of combined GPM messages is 0, this algorithm is disabled.
6.8.1 GPMCMBNUM (GPM Combination Number)

Description
This parameter specifies the number of paging messages combined in the GPM message.
Type
Related Commands
SET CBTSCDMA1XCTRLPARA DSP CBTSCFG; Note: The command differs according to different BTS types. In this section, only commands related to the BTS3606 are provided. For details on commands related to other types of BTSs, see the online help of the Service Maintenance System.
Value Range
0 to 15.
Default Value
0 (GPM messages not combined).
Setting Tradeoff
Before and after GPM message combination, the occupation decreasing rate of paging channels is listed as follows: GPM Message Combination 2 3 4 5 6 Occupation Decreasing Rate of Paging Channels 32/128=25% 47/128=36.7% 52/128=40.6% 56/128=43.8% 58/128=45.3%
However large the number of combined GPM messages is, the occupation rate of paging channels decreases by 70/128=54.7% at most.
2009-11-6
Page 233 of 438
Internal
Remarks
If the value of this parameter is set to 0, the GPM message is not combined.
6.9 In-Traffic Signaling Frame Power Adjustment

This algorithm does not have a dedicated switch. You can set the forward signaling frame gain adjustment offset to enable and disable this algorithm. If the forward signaling frame gain adjustment offset is not 0, this algorithm is enabled. If the forward signaling frame gain adjustment offset is 0, this algorithm is disabled.
6.9.1 FWDSIGGAIN (Forward Signal Gain)

Description
This parameter specifies the gain offset of the forward traffic signaling frame.
Type
Internal algorithm parameter of the BTS level.
Related Commands
SET CBTSCDMA1XCTRLPARA DSP CBTSCFG; Note: The command differs according to different BTS types. In this section, only commands related to the BTS3606 are provided. For details on commands related to other types of BTSs, see the online help of the Service Maintenance System.
Value Range
-31 to 31 (unit: 0.25 dB).
Default Value
Versions earlier than the V400R006C05: 0. Versions later than the V400R006C05 (including the V300R006C05): 12.
Setting Tradeoff
If the value of this parameter is set high, transmission reliability of in-traffic signaling frames is enhance, but this consumes more power and reduces the capacity.
Remarks
None.
2009-11-6
Page 234 of 438
Internal
6.10 Common Channel Layer-2 Acknowledgement by the BTS

6.10.1 L2ACKCTRLSWT (Layer 2 ACK Control Switch)
Description
This parameter specifies the layer-2 ACK message sent by the BTS for the access and paging messages on the r-csch.
Type
Related Commands
SET CBTSSIGSOFTPARA DSP CBTSCFG BTSID=1, CFGID=CBTSSIGSOFTPARA;
Value Range
1 (ON) or 0 (OFF).
Default Value
1.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
You do not need to modify this parameter regardless of whether the layer-2 ACK message is sent by the BTS or the BSC.
6.10.2 L2ACKRSNDNUM (Layer 2 ACK Resend Number)

Description
This parameter specifies the resending times of the layer-2 ACK message. If the number of resending times is set to n, the BTS sends the layer-2 ACK message without condition for n+1 times.
Type
2009-11-6
Page 235 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
SET CBTSSIGSOFTPARA DSP CBTSCFG BTSID=1, CFGID=CBTSSIGSOFTPARA;
Value Range
0 to 15.
Default Value
2.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
6.11 Air Interface Signaling Layer-2 Sending Mechanism

The system specifies the mode of each signaling message, corresponding resending time, and resending interval. The modes of some signaling messages are specified by the system but the modes of the other signaling messages can be modified according to user requirements. The following table lists the detailed default settings.
Table 1-1 Modes, resending times, and resending intervals of signaling messages
Name of the Message over F-CSCH Authentication Challenge Message(AUCRM)
Acknowledged Mode It must be set to Acknowledged. You cannot modify it.
Number of Sending Times 1. You cannot modify the DB value.
Transmit Interval (ms) 5000. The interval refers to the time for the LAC waiting for the response from the MS. 300
Bs Ack Order(BSACK)
It must be set to Non-acknowledged. You cannot modify it. It must be set to Non-acknowledged. You cannot modify it. It must be set to Acknowledged. You cannot modify it.
Channel Assignment Message(CAM) Data Burst Message(DBM)
10
300
1. You cannot modify the DB value.
5000
2009-11-6
Page 236 of 438
Internal
Name of the Message over F-CSCH Extended Channel Assignment Message(ECAM) Feature Notification Message(FNM) Order Message(ORDM) Service Redirection Message(SRDM)
Acknowledged Mode It must be set to Non-acknowledged. You cannot modify it. It must be set to Acknowledged. You cannot modify it. Non-acknowledged. You can modify it. Non-acknowledged. You can modify it.
Number of Sending Times 10
Transmit Interval (ms) 300
1. You cannot modify the DB value. 3 3
5000
300 300
Table 1-2 Modes, resending times, resending intervals and signaling priority of signaling messages
Name of the Message over F-DSCH
Acknowledged Mode
Numb er of Sendi ng Times 5 3
Transmit Interval (ms)
Signal ing Priorit y High High
Alert With Information Message(AWIM) Assured Bs Ack Order(ABSACK) Authentication Challenge Message(AUCM) Unassured Bs Ack Order(UNBSACK) Candidate Frequency Search Control Message(CFSCNM) Candidate Frequency Search Request Message(CFSRQM)
Non-acknowledged. You can modify it. It must be set to Acknowledged. You cannot modify it. Non-acknowledged. You can modify it. It must be set to Non-Acknowledged. You cannot modify it. Non-acknowledged. You can modify it. Non-acknowledged. You can modify it.
50 300
3 3
100 100
Low Low
3 3
100 100
Low Low
2009-11-6
Page 237 of 438
Internal
Acknowledged Mode
Numb er of Sendi ng Times 2
Signal ing Priorit y Low
Data Burst Message(DBM)
It must be set to Acknowledged. You cannot modify the DB value. It must be set to Acknowledged. You cannot modify the DB value. Acknowledged. You can modify it.
300
Extended Flash With Information Message(EFWIM) Extended Handoff Direction Message(EHDM)
300
Low
300
High
Extended Neighbor List Update Message(ENLUM)
Non-acknowledged. You can modify it.
100
Low
Extended Supplemental Channel Assignment Message(ESCAM)
Non-acknowledged.
60
High
Flash With Information Message(FWIM) General Handoff Direction Message(GHDM)
It must be set to Acknowledged. You cannot modify it. Acknowledged. You can modify it.
300
Low
300
High
In-Traffic System Parameters Message(ITSPM)
Non-acknowledged. You can modify it.
100
Low
Neighbor List Update Message( NLUM) Order Message(ORDRM)
Non-acknowledged. You can modify it. Non-acknowledged. You can modify it.
100
Low
100
Low
2009-11-6
Page 238 of 438
Internal
Acknowledged Mode
Numb er of Sendi ng Times 3
Signal ing Priorit y Low
Power Control Message(PCNM) Power Control Parameters Message(PCNPM)
Non-acknowledged. You can modify it. Non-acknowledged. You can modify it.
100
100
Low
Send Burst DTMF Message(BDTMFM) Service Connect Message(SCM) Service Option Control Message(SOCM)
Non-acknowledged. You can modify it. Non-acknowledged. You can modify it. It must be set to Acknowledged. You cannot modify the DB value. Non-acknowledged. You can modify it. Non-acknowledged. You can modify it. Non-acknowledged. You can modify it. Non-acknowledged. You can modify it. Acknowledged. You can modify it.
100
Low
50
High
300
High
Service Request Message(SRQM) Service Response Message (SRPM) SSD Update Message(SSDUM) Status Request Message(STRQM) Universal Handoff Direction Message(UHDM)
50
High
50
High
3 3
100 100
Low Low
300
High
For details on the notes and cautions for parameter modification, see related documents.
2009-11-6
Page 239 of 438
Internal
6.11.1 ASSMODE (Assured Mode)

Description
This parameter specifies the mode of the forward air interface signaling LAC-layer ARQ service. Different forward air interface signaling messages can be configured with different service modes. The service mode provided by the ARQ layer to the high layer is categorized into acknowledged mode and unacknowledged mode. In acknowledged mode, the messages sent over the logical channel needs the response of the LAC layer from the receiver. If the response of the LAC layer from the receiver is not received after the specified interval, the messages are automatically sent repeatedly after a set interval until the messages get the responses. In non-acknowledged mode, the messages sent over the logical channel do not need the response of the LAC layer from the receiver. In this case, the sender does not know definitely whether the messages are correctly received. Therefore, the messages are quickly and repeatedly sent to ensure that they are correctly received. There are some restrictions on the number of times, intervals, and timer. For details, see related documents.
Type
Related Commands
MOD LACCTRL LST LACCTRL;
Value Range
YES (acknowledged), or NO (unacknowledged).
Default Value
The system specifies the mode of each signaling message. You are advised to retain the default value.
Setting Tradeoff
The higher the number of resending times is, the more reliable signaling transmission gets. In addition, a high value of this parameter may have a great impact on system load. For in-traffic signaling messages, a high value of this parameter has an impact on voice quality.
Remarks
None.
2009-11-6
Page 240 of 438
Internal
6.11.2 TRANSTIMES (Transmission Times)

Description
This parameter specifies the resending times of LAC messages.
Type
Related Commands
MOD LACCTRL; LST LACCTRL;
Value Range
1 to 20.
Default Value
Each signaling message is configured with a default value.
Setting Tradeoff
For details, see Table 1-1 and Table 1-2.
Remarks
None.
6.11.3 TRANSINTERVAL (Transmission Interval)

Description
This parameter specifies the transmit interval of the messages on the LAC layer.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
50 to 8000 (unit: ms).
2009-11-6
Page 241 of 438
Internal
Default Value
Setting Tradeoff
For details, see Table 1-1 and 0.
Remarks
None.
6.11.4 SIGPRIO (Signaling Priority)

Description
The signaling priority determines the assembly mode of dedicated channel signaling on the MAC layer. The signaling with a high priority can independently occupy an entire 20 ms frame on the MAC layer.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
LOW (low priority), or HIGH (high priority).
Default Value
Setting Tradeoff
You need to set this parameter with a high priority, which guarantees that signaling transmission is in time and also has a great impact on service frames.
Remarks
None.
6.11.5 Parameter Configuration Examples in Typical Scenarios

It is recommended that the preceding parameters use default value, except the switch should be configured according to network configurations. For the actual configuration, contact the technical support engineers at the headquarters.
2009-11-6
Page 242 of 438
Internal
Example 1: Modify the signaling sending mode to solve voice quality problem caused by frequent handoffs and too many in-traffic signaling messages during the call access process. (For actual solutions to such problems, contact the technical support engineers at the headquarters.) To modify the sending modes of the following signaling messages Extended Neighbor List Update Message, Neighbor List Update Message, unassured ack order, In-Traffic System Parameters Message, Extended Handoff Direction Message, General Handoff Direction Message, and Universal Handoff Direction Message, run the following commands: MOD LACCTRL CHANTYPE=DSCH, MSGID1=ENLUM, SIGPRIO=LOW; MOD LACCTRL CHANTYPE=DSCH, MSGID1=NLUM, SIGPRIO=LOW; MOD LACCTRL CHANTYPE=DSCH, MSGID1=UNBSACK, SIGPRIO=LOW; MOD LACCTRL CHANTYPE=DSCH, MSGID1=ITSPM, SIGPRIO=LOW; MOD LACCTRL CHANTYPE=DSCH, MSGID1=EHDM, SIGPRIO=LOW; MOD LACCTRL CHANTYPE=DSCH, MSGID1=GHDM, SIGPRIO=LOW; MOD LACCTRL CHANTYPE=DSCH, MSGID1=UHDM, SIGPRIO=LOW; The preceding commands are subject to changes caused by version upgrade and are for reference only.
2009-11-6
Page 243 of 438
Internal
6.12 Timers in the Access Process

6.12.1 Functioning Time of the Timers
Figure 1-1 Timers in the calling access process in the CS domain
MS [Um] Origination Message [Um] BS ACK
BTS
BSC
MSC
[Abis] Origination [A1] CM Service
Timer CCM 0 [A1] Assignment [Um] Extended Channel Assignment Message Timer CCM 4 [Um] TCH Preamble (non-signaling) [Um] BS ACK Order Timer CCM 5 Timer MSC T10
[Um] MS ACK Order
[Um] Service Connect Message Timer CCM 10 [Um] Service Connect Complete Message
[A1] Assignment
2009-11-6
Page 244 of 438

Figure 1-2 Timers in the called access process in the CS domain
Internal
MS
BTS
BSC
MSC [A1] Paging Request
[Abis] General Page [Um] General Page [Um] Page Response Message [Um] BS ACK Timer CCM 43 Timer MSC T3113 [Abis] Page Response Message [A1] Paging Response Timer CCM 0 [A1] Assignment [Um] Extended Channel Assignment Message Timer CCM 4 [Um] TCH Preamble (non-signaling) [Um] BS ACK Order Timer CCM 5 Timer MSC T10
[Um] MS ACK Order
[Um] Service Connect Message Timer CCM 10 [Um] Service Connect Complete Message [Um] Alert with Information [Um] MS ACK Order [Um] Connect Order [Um] BS ACK Order [A1] Connect Timer MSC T301
[A1] Assignment
2009-11-6
Page 245 of 438

Figure 1-3 Timers in the calling access process in the PS domain
Internal
MS [Um] Origination Message [Um] BS ACK
BSC
MSC
PCF
PDSN
[A1] CM Service Timer CCM 0 [A1] Assignment [A9] A9-Setup-A8 Timer CCM 49 [A11] [A11] [A9] A9-Connect-A8 [Um] Extended Channel Assignment Message Timer CCM 4 [Um] TCH Preamble (non-signaling) [Um] BS ACK Order Timer CCM 5 [Um] MS ACK Order [Um] Service Connect Message Timer CCM 10 [Um] Service Connect Complete Message [A9] A9-Update-A8 [A11] Timer CCM 51 [A9] A9-Updatet-A8 Timer PCU 1 [A11] Timer PCU 15 Timer MSC T10 Timer PCU 0
[A1] Assignment
2009-11-6
Page 246 of 438

Figure 1-4 Timers in the called access process in the PS domain
Internal
MS
BSC
MSC
PCF
PDSN
Packet Data (non - signaling) [A9] A9 BS Service Request [A1] BS Service Request T imer CCM 55 [A1] BS Service Response [A9] A9 BS Service Response [A1] Paging Request
T imer PCU 5
[Um] General Page Message T imer CCM 43 [Um] Page Response T imer MSC T3113 Message [Um] BS ACK Order [A1] Paging Response T imer CCM 0 [A1] A ssignment Request [A9] A9 - Setup-A8 T imer CCM 49 [A9] A9 - Connect - A8 [Um] Extended Channel Assignment Message T imer CCM 4 [Um] TCH Preamble (non- signaling) [Um] BS ACK Order [Um] MS ACK Order T imer CCM 5
T imer PCU 14
T imer MSC T10 T imer PCU 15
[Um] Service Con nect Message T imer CCM 10 [Um] Service Connect Complete Message [A9] A9 - Update-A8 T imer CCM 51 [A9] A9 - Updat- A8 Ack [A11] A11- Registration - Request T imer PCU 1 [A11] A11- Registration - Reply
[A1] Assignment Complete
2009-11-6
Page 247 of 438
Internal
6.12.2 Common Timers at the BSC Side 6.12.3 Timer CCM0 (CCM Waiting for Allocation Request Timer)
Description
This parameter specifies the timer for the BSC waiting for the MSC to send the assignment request message.
Type
Standard timer.
Related Commands
MOD TMR; LST TMR
Value Range
1000 to 15000 ms.
Default Value
6000 ms.
Setting Tradeoff
You are advised to retain the default value. In network swap, the original settings can be used.
Remarks
None.
6.12.4 Timer CCM4 (CCM Waiting for TCH PREAMBLE Sent by the FMR)
Description
This parameter specifies the timer for the BSC waiting to capture reverse preambles from the MS.
Type
Internal timer of the BSC level.
Related Commands
MOD TMR; LST TMR
Internal
Value Range
1000 to 15000 ms.
Default Value
3000 ms.
Setting Tradeoff
If this parameter is set to a high value, the access success rate at the wireless side can be increased, but the access time is increased. In this case, the MSC times out, thus decreasing the access rate of the core network. You are advised to retain the default value. In network swap, the original settings can be used. In the microwave transmission network, you can appropriately adjust this parameter to a higher value, for example, 6s.
Remarks
None.
6.12.5 Timer CCM5 (CCM Waiting for Response from MS)

Description
This parameter specifies the timer for the BSC waiting for response from the MS.
Type
Standard timer.
Related Commands
MOD TMR; LST TMR
Value Range
1000 to 15000 ms.
Default Value
2000 ms.
Setting Tradeoff
If this parameter is set to a high value, the access success rate at the wireless side can be increased, but the access time is increased. In this case, the MSC times out, thus decreasing the access rate of the core network. You are advised to retain the default value. In network swap, the original settings can be used.
2009-11-6
Page 249 of 438
Internal
In the microwave transmission network, you can appropriately adjust this parameter to a higher value, for example, 3s.
Remarks
This timer should be shorter than 3000 ms if the initiative negotiation of data service is configured. Otherwise, the terminated call fails. The negotiation is not initially originated during the terminated call. Therefore, the BSC should originate a service negotiation to set up service channels after the timer expires.
6.12.6 Timer CCM10 (CCM Waiting for Service Connect Complete Message)
Description
This parameter specifies the timer for the BSC waiting for the service connection complete message.
Type
Standard timer.
Related Commands
MOD TMR; LST TMR
Value Range
1000 to 15000 ms.
Default Value
2000 ms.
Setting Tradeoff
If the value of this parameter is set high, the access success rate at the wireless side can be increased, but the access time is increased. In this case, the MSC times out, thus decreasing the access rate of the core network. You are advised to retain the default value. In network swap, the original settings can be used. In the microwave transmission network, you can appropriately adjust this parameter to a higher value, for example, 3s.
Remarks
None.
2009-11-6
Page 250 of 438
Internal
6.12.7 Timer CCM43 (CCM Waiting for Paging Response Message)

Description
This parameter specifies the timer for the BSC waiting for the paging response message.
Type
Standard timer.
Related Commands
MOD TMR; LST TMR
Value Range
1000 to 15000 ms.
Default Value
6000 ms.
Setting Tradeoff
The timer is set according to the interval of resending the paging message by the MSC. Generally, the interval is "duration of a paging message resent by the MSC plus 1s". For example, the interval of two MSC paging messages is 5s, the timer should be set to 6s for the BSC.
Remarks
None.
6.12.8 Timer CCM49 (CCM Waiting for A9-Connect-A8 Message)

Description
This parameter specifies the timer for the BSC waiting for the A9-Connect-A8 message sent by the PCF.
Type
Standard timer.
Related Commands
MOD TMR; LST TMR
2009-11-6
Page 251 of 438
Internal
Value Range
1000 to 30000 ms.
Default Value
5000 ms.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
6.12.9 Timer CCM51 (CCM Waiting for A9-Update-A8 Message)

Description
This parameter specifies the timer for the BSC waiting for the A9-Update-A8 message sent by the PCF.
Type
Standard timer.
Related Commands
MOD TMR; LST TMR
Value Range
1000 to 15000 ms.
Default Value
2000 ms.
Setting Tradeoff
The timer is set according to the interval of resending the paging message by the MSC. Generally, the interval is "duration of a paging message resent by the MSC plus 1s". For example, the interval of two MSC paging messages is 5s, the timer should be set to 6s for the BSC.
Remarks
None.
2009-11-6
Page 252 of 438
Internal
6.12.10 Timer CCM55 (CCM Waiting for BS SRV RSP Message)

Description
This parameter specifies the timer for the BSC waiting for the BS SRV RSP message sent by the MSC.
Type
Related Commands
MOD TMR; LST TMR
Value Range
1000 to 15000 ms.
Default Value
4000 ms.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
6.12.11 Timer PCU0 (A11-Register-Request Resending Upon Timeout)

Description
This parameter specifies the timer for the PCF resending the A11-Register-Request message upon timeout.
Type
Standard timer.
Related Commands
MOD TMR; LST TMR
2009-11-6
Page 253 of 438
Internal
Value Range
1000 to 5000 ms.
Default Value
1000 ms.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
6.12.12 Timer PCU1 (A11-Register-Request with Charging Information Resending Upon Timeout)
Description
This parameter specifies the timer for the PCF resending the A11-Register-Request message with charging information upon timeout.
Type
Standard timer.
Related Commands
MOD TMR; LST TMR
Value Range
1000 to 5000 ms.
Default Value
1000 ms.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
2009-11-6
Page 254 of 438
Internal
6.12.13 Timer PCU5 (Waiting for A9-BS-Service-Response)

Description
This parameter specifies the timer for the PCF waiting for the A9-BS-Service-Respons message sent by the BSC.
Type
Standard timer.
Related Commands
MOD TMR; LST TMR
Value Range
1000 to 5000 ms.
Default Value
5000 ms.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
6.12.14 Timer PCU14 (Waiting for A9-Setup-A8 Message Upon Call Activation)
Description
This parameter specifies the timer for the PCF waiting for the A9-Setup-A8 message sent by the BSC upon call activation.
Type
Internal timer of the PCF level.
Related Commands
MOD TMR; LST TMR
2009-11-6
Page 255 of 438
Internal
Value Range
2000 to 20000 ms.
Default Value
10000 ms.
Setting Tradeoff
This timer includes the process of terminal paging over the air interface. It must be not less than "the time of the initial paging plus the time of each paging resending".
Remarks
None.
6.12.15 Timer PCU15 (Waiting for A9-Update-A8 Message Upon Call Activation)
Description
This parameter specifies the timer for the PCF waiting for the A9-Update-A8 message sent by the BSC upon call activation.
Type
Internal timer of the PCF level.
Related Commands
MOD TMR; LST TMR
Value Range
2000 to 20000 ms.
Default Value
10000 ms.
Setting Tradeoff
This timer includes the process of exchange between the forward traffic channel and the reverse traffic channel after the PCH is assigned. It must be not less than the total of all timers over the air interface.
Remarks
None.
2009-11-6
Page 256 of 438
Internal
2009-11-6
Page 257 of 438
Internal
7
Description
1X Call Drop Mechanism
7.1 Reverse Call Drop Timer Parameters

7.1.1 PTHDL (Default Path Delay from DPUS to BTS)
This parameter specifies the estimated value of the timer required from the moment when the DPUSb sends a forward service frame to the moment when the BTS channel board receives the frame. On the FPMDC module of the DPUSb, this parameter is used to calculate the time for sending a forward service frame.
Type
Internal parameter of the subrack level. Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
MOD SDU1XFPMDC LST SDUINF
Value Range
5 to 30 ms.
Default Value
10 ms.
Setting Tradeoff
You are advised to retain the default value.
Remarks
None.
2009-11-6
Page 258 of 438
Internal
7.1.2 RVWIN (BTS Rx Window Size)

Description
This parameter specifies the time duration for which the BTS channel board allows the forward service frame sent by the DPUSb. On the FPMDC module of the DPUSb, this parameter is used to determine whether to adjust the sending time by the DPUSb.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
2 to 20 ms.
Default Value
4 ms.
Setting Tradeoff
You are advised to retain the default value.
Remarks
None.
7.1.3 RFRCVTMRLEN (Reverse Frame Rx Timer Length)

Description
On the FPMDC module of the DPUSb, this parameter is used to start the timer for receiving the reverse frame. It determines the time duration for detecting reverse links.
Type
Related Commands
MOD SDU1XFPMDC
2009-11-6
Page 259 of 438
Internal
LST SDUINF
Value Range
20 to 65,535 ms.
Default Value
10,000 ms.
Setting Tradeoff
You are advised to retain the default value. When the Abis functions as the microwave or satellite link, you need to modify this parameter to a higher value.
Remarks
None.
7.1.4 RFCMBTMRLEN (Reverse Frame Combine Timer Length)

Description
On the FPMDC module of the DPUSb, this parameter is used to start the timer for combining the reverse frames. It determines the maximum time difference between service frames on legs.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
5 to 80 ms.
Default Value
18 ms.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
2009-11-6
Page 260 of 438
Internal
Remarks
During combination of a good leg and a poor leg, if the transmission delay of the good leg is large and the received frame ID on the good leg is the ID of the last 20 ms frame, this good frame is discarded. In this case, the frame within 20 ms received on the poor leg is processed. Therefore, the good leg does not take effect, and call drops due to the Too Many Erasure Frame message occur.
7.1.5 FCHCHKERASFRMRAT (Check Voice FCH Erasure Frame Ratio)

Description
This parameter specifies the percentage of the ERASURE frame in the voice FCH reverse frames set on the DPUSb. If the actual value exceeds this percentage, the DPUSb initiates a request to disconnect calls.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
Value Range: 1% to 99%.
Default Value
95%.
Setting Tradeoff
If this parameter is set to a high value, the call drop rate in voice services is reduced but the voice quality is deteriorated (even one-way audio occurs). If this parameter is set to a low value, the call drop rate in voice services increases. In network swap, the original call drop timer should be used to calculate the setting for this parameter.
Remarks
None.
2009-11-6
Page 261 of 438
Internal
7.1.6 FCHCHKERASFRMTHD (Check Voice FCH Erasure Frame Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the threshold for checking the ERASURE frame of the voice FCH set on the DPUSb. That is, it specifies the number of interval frames when the reverse ERASURE frame ratio is measured.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
100 to 1000 frames.
Default Value
500 frames.
Setting Tradeoff
If this parameter is set to a high value, the call drop rate in voice services is reduced but the voice quality is deteriorated (even one-way audio occurs). If the value of this parameter is set to a low value, the call drop rate in voice service increases. In network swap, the original call drop timer should be used to calculate the setting for this parameter.
Remarks
None.
7.1.7 FCHCHKIDLEFRMTHD (Check FCH Idle Frame Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the threshold for checking the idle frames of the FCH set on the DPUSb. If the DPUSb continuously receives the reverse idle frames that exceed the specified threshold, it initiates a request to the CCM for call disconnection.
Type
Internal
Related Commands
Value Range
50 to 500 frames
Default Value
300 frames
Setting Tradeoff
If this parameter is set to a high value, the call drop rate is reduced but the voice quality is deteriorated (even one-way audio occurs). If this parameter is set to a low value, the call drop rate increases.
Remarks
None.
7.1.8 FCHWAITIDLEFRMTMRLEN (Wait FCH Idle Frame Timer Length)

Description
When the DPUSb establishes the FCH, it exchanges idle frames with the BTS. If the DPUSb does not receive the idle frames of the BTS within the timer length, FCH establishment fails.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
20 to 65535 ms.
Default Value
1200 ms.
2009-11-6
Page 263 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
If this parameter is set to a low value, the FCH establishment may fail, thus reducing the access success rate or soft handoff success rate. If this parameter is set to a high value, the access delay and soft handoff delay may be increased.
Remarks
None.
7.1.9 SCHWAITIDLEFRMTMRLEN (Wait SCH Idle Frame Timer Length)

Description
When the DPUSb establishes the SCH, it exchanges idle frames with the BTS. If the DPUSb does not receive the idle frames of the BTS within the timer length, SCH establishment fails.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
20 to 65535 ms.
Default Value
270 ms.
Setting Tradeoff
If this parameter is set to a low value, the FCH establishment may fail, thus reducing the access success rate. If this parameter is set to a high value, the SCH establishment time may be increased.
Remarks
None.
2009-11-6
Page 264 of 438
Internal
7.1.10 FCHCHKPKTERASFRMRAT (Check Data FCH Erasure Frame Ratio)

Description
This parameter specifies the percentage of the ERASURE frame in the data FCH reverse frames set on the DPUSb. If the actual value exceeds this percentage, the DPUSb initiates a request to disconnect calls.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
1% to 99%.
Default Value
90%.
Setting Tradeoff
If this parameter is set to a high value, the call drop rate in data services is reduced but the voice quality is deteriorated (even one-way audio occurs). If this parameter is set to a low value, the call drop rate in data services increases. In network swap, the original call drop timer should be used to calculate the setting for this parameter.
Remarks
None.
7.1.11 FCHCHKPKTERASFRMTHD (Check Data FCH Erasure Frame Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the threshold for checking the ERASURE frame of the data FCH set on the DPUSb.
Type
Internal parameter of the subrack level.
2009-11-6
Page 265 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
Value Range
100 to 1000 frames
Default Value
600 frames.
Setting Tradeoff
If this parameter is set to a high value, the call drop rate in data services is reduced but the voice quality is deteriorated (even one-way audio occurs). If this parameter is set to a low value, the call drop rate in data services increases. In network swap, the original call drop timer should be used to calculate the setting for this parameter.
Remarks
None.
2009-11-6
Page 266 of 438
Internal
8
8.1 Handoff Search Parameters
Description
Handoff Algorithm
8.1.1 SRCHWINA (Search Window Size for Active Set and Candidate Set)
This parameter specifies the search window size used when the MS searches for the pilots of the active set and the candidate set. When searching for pilots in the active and candidate sets, the MS uses the first arriving available multi-path as the search centers respectively. Therefore, this parameter is only related to the multi-path of pilots, instead of the relative propagation delay between pilots.
Type
Air interface parameter (SPM/ESPM/ITSPM, EHDM/GHDM/UHDM). Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
MOD HO LST HOINF QRYINF=HO;
Value Range
chip4 to chip452. For details, see Table 1-1.
2009-11-6
Page 267 of 438

Table 1-1 Search window size
Internal
Default Value
chip20 (20 chips).
Setting Tradeoff
According to the local propagation delay, the pilot signals after the propagation delay should fall into the search window of the active set. If this parameter is too low, some useful signals in the active set may fall beyond the search window and becomes interference, thus severely affecting the link quality. If this parameter is set to a high value, some irrelevant signals may also fall into the search window, and the link quality may also be affected. In addition, a large search window slows down the MS search neighbor pilots so that the handoff could not be triggered in time. Thus, the system performance decreases. In network swap, the original settings should be used. During the connection of the repeater, you need to set this parameter to higher value in the current sector.
Remarks
Search windows (such as SRCHWINA, SRCHWINN, and SRCHWINR) and handoff thresholds (such as TADD, TDROP, TCOMP, and TTDROP) are carrier-level parameters. Therefore, in principle, each carrier can be configured with a different value. During the soft handoff, if a pilot is added to the active set, and the parameter configuration of this pilot is different from that of the soft handoff parameter used by the current call, the BSC does not update the MS handoff parameters immediately. The BSC always selects a pilot in the active set as the main leg and uses the parameters of this leg. The rules for maintaining the main leg are as follows: During a call setup process , the strongest leg in the initial active set is selected as the main leg, whose soft handoff parameters can be used to perform handoff decision. If this main leg has not been deleted, the MS and BSC use the parameters of this leg all the time. If this leg has been deleted, the strongest-signal pilot that belongs to the current BSC in the remaining active set is selected as the main leg. The In-Traffic System Parameter Message (ITSPM) notifies the MS of the soft handoff parameters of the new main leg.
2009-11-6
Page 268 of 438
Internal
8.1.2 SRCHWINN (Search Window Size for the Neighbor Set)

Description
This parameter specifies the search window size used when the MS searches for the pilots of the neighbor set. When searching for pilots in the neighbor set, the MS uses the earliest available multi-path as the time reference and uses the PN offset of the neighbor pilot as the search center. Therefore, this parameter is related to the multi-paths of neighbor pilots and relative propagation delay from neighbor pilot to the reference pilot.
Type
Air interface parameter (SPM/ESPM/ITSPM, GHDM/UHDM). Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
Value Range
Default Value
chip60.
Setting Tradeoff
According to the multi-path of the neighbor pilot and the propagation delay size from the neighbor pilot to the reference pilot, set the parameter to ensure that neighbor pilot signals are located within the neighbor set search window that sets the earliest arriving multi-path of the reference pilot as the time reference and PN offset of the neighbor pilot as the search center. If the parameter is set to a low value, neighbor pilot signals may be located beyond the search window so that some neighbor pilots are missed and neighbor set pilots cannot be added to the active set. In this case, soft handoffs fail, and call drops occur. If the parameter is set too high, the time for MS to search for each neighbor pilot may increase so that the speed for searching neighbor pilot is reduced and the best soft handoff opportunity is missed. In this case, the handoff performance is potentially affected. In network swap, the original settings should be used. During the connection of the repeater, you need to set this parameter to higher value in neighbor sectors.
Remarks
Table 4-1 shows the process of the MS searching for a pilot. When searching for pilots in the active set, the MS uses the first available multi-path as the search center. When searching for pilots in the neighbor set, the MS uses the reference pilot as the time reference and the PN offsets of neighbor pilots as the search center. Generally, search window of the neighbor set should be larger than that of the active set.
2009-11-6
Page 269 of 438

Figure 1-1 MS search center
Internal
8.1.3 SRCHWINR (Search Window Size for the Remaining Set)

Description
This parameter specifies the search window size used when the MS searches for the pilots of the remaining set. When searching for pilots in the remaining set, the MS uses the first available multi-path as the time reference and uses the PN offset of the remaining pilot as the search center. This process is the same as the process when the MS searches for the neighbor set pilot.
Type
Air interface parameter (SPM/ESPM/ITSPM, GHDM/UHDM). Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
Value Range
Default Value
chip80.
Setting Tradeoff
If the parameter is set to a low value, some useful pilots in the remaining set may be missed. As a result, the function of the BSC, that is, detecting the absent configuration of neighbor cell, cannot be fully used. If the parameter is set to a high value, the MS may search other irrelevant signals, and the time that the MS searches pilots in the remaining set increases. In this case, the search speed of the MS is reduced.
2009-11-6
Page 270 of 438
Internal
Remarks
If network optimization is finished and neighboring relations are perfectly configured, the MS do not need to search the remaining set. In this case, the value of this parameter can be set to 0 to increase the MS search speed. If you want to use missed neighbor cell check function to check whether missed neighbor cells exist in the system, set the parameter. When the MS searches for remaining set pilots, all the remaining set PNs are integral multiples of PILOT_INC.
8.1.4 SCHWNDADJSWT (Automatic Searching Window Adjustment Switch)

Description
This parameter specifies the automatic search window switch.
Type
Related Commands
SET CBTSCDMA1XCHIPPARA DSP CBTSCFG
Value Range
ON, or OFF.
Default Value
ON.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
8.1.5 FNGRMX95 (Maximum Number of IS95 Channel Searcher)

Description
This parameter specifies the maximum number of IS95 channel searcher.
Type
2009-11-6
Page 271 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
Value Range
4 to 6.
Default Value
6.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
If this parameter is set to a high value, the minimum number of finger channels increases. If this parameter is set to a high value, each channel can be assigned with a maximum of four finger resources. Otherwise, the optimized feature of multi-path energy combination cannot be fully used. For CSM5000 chips, each IS95 channel can be configured with six fingers.
8.1.6 FNGRMX2K (Maximum Number of IS2000 Channel Searcher)

Description
This parameter specifies the maximum number of IS2000 channel searcher.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
4 to 8.
Default Value
8.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Internal
Remarks
If this parameter is set to a high value, the minimum number of fingers that can be sued for one channel increases. If this parameter is set to a high value, each channel can be assigned with a maximum of four finger resources. Otherwise, the optimized feature of multi-path energy combination cannot be fully used. For CSM5000 hardware, each IS2000 channel can be configured with 128 fingers. Currently, the ARM firmware can be configured with a maximum of eight fingers.
8.1.7 PNINC (PN Code Increment)

Description
This parameter specifies the increment of the PN sequence offset index. The value of this parameter is the greatest common divisor of the pilot PN sequence offsets of neighbor BTSs. If the PLTINC is specified, the number of available pilot PNs in the system is 512/PLTINC. If the value of this parameter is low, many pilot phase offsets are available, and the intra-phase inter-pilot multiplexing distance is long. This lowers the interference between multiplexing pilots at the same phase. The phase interval between pilots, however, is reduced, and pilot disorder, therefore, may be incurred. If the value is high, the numbers of available pilot phase offsets and remaining centralized pilots are small, and an MS has less time to scan for pilots. In an actual dynamic environment, the probability of losing a strong pilot is smaller. On the other hand, the number of available pilot phase offsets is smaller, the intra-phase inter-pilot multiplexing distance is shorter, and the intra-phase inter-pilot interface is stronger. In addition, the parameter determines the maximum values of SRCHWINN and SRCHWINR.
Type
Air interface parameter (NLM/ENLM/GNLM).
Related Commands
MOD HO LST HOINF
Value Range
1 to 15 (unit: 64PN chips).
Default Value
4.
Setting Tradeoff
The recommended value ranges from 2 to 6. In densely populated urban areas, the value of this parameter can be low. In wide coverage areas, the value of this parameter can be high.
Remarks
When searching for pilots in the neighbor set, the MS can obtain a number that is an integral multiple of the PN_INC. If a pilot is in the neighbor cell list, the MS can search the number.
2009-11-6
Page 273 of 438
Internal
8.1.8 MAXUSRSPD (Maximum User Speed)

Description
This parameter specifies the maximum user speed. This parameter is used to set the Doppler frequency shift point of the IS2000 searcher.
Type
Related Commands
SET CBTSCDMA1XSECTORPARA DSP CBTSCFG BTSID=0, CFGID=CBTSCDMA1XSECTORPARA;
Value Range
0 to 65535 (unit: km/h)
Default Value
255.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
This parameter is used to complement the Doppler frequency shift. If the baseband frequency offset is 240 Hz, the 0 Hz bin can be used. If the baseband frequency offset is 720 Hz, the 0 and 480 Hz Doppler bins can be used. In this case, the extra searcher capability is not used. If only the 0 Hz Doppler bin is used, the possibility of fault alarm reporting increases. The 0 and 960 Hz Doppler bins are used to detect the maximum baseband frequency offset 1200 Hz. The following table lists the mapping between the parameter values and Doppler bins. The baseband frequency offset is caused by relative motion between the mobile station and the BTS or loss of the local oscillator synchronization between the mobile station and the BTS.
Table 1-1 Mapping between the parameter values and Doppler bins
Value 0 1 2
Number of PCGs to integrate 0 Hz bin only 0 Hz and 480 Hz 0 Hz and 960 Hz
2009-11-6
Page 274 of 438
Internal
8.1.9 TCHSCHWSZ (TCH Search Window Size)

Description
This parameter specifies the TCH search window size. Each traffic channel has one search window on the BTS. Only when reverse signals fall into the search window, the BTS can capture and demodulate the signals.
Type
Related Commands
SET CBTSCDMA1XSECTORPARA DSP CBTSCFG BTSID=0, CFGID=CBTSCDMA1XSECTORPARA;
Value Range
1 to 16 (unit: 64chip).
Default Value
1.
Setting Tradeoff
The larger the search window is set, the easier it is for the signal to the search window, but he search time is relatively longer. The smaller the search window is set, the harder it is for the signal to be searched, but the search time is short.
Remarks
You are advised to set TCHSCHWSZ of the CSM5000 chip to 1 and that of the CSM6700 chip to 2.
8.2 Pilot Set Decision Parameters

The service pseudo pilot is introduced in BSC V300R006C03. The service pseudo pilot supports soft handoffs. The following parameters apply to the service pseudo pilot.
8.2.1 MAXSHO (Max Number of SHO Branches)

Description
This parameter specifies the maximum number of legs in the soft handoff target active set. According to the protocol, an active set of an MS can have a maximum of six legs. When the BSC determines the soft handoff, it restricts the number of legs of the soft handoff target active set based on the parameter.
2009-11-6
Page 275 of 438
Internal
Type
Versions earlier than V300R006C08:internal parameter of the BSC level. V300R006C08: internal parameter of the carrier level. Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
Versions earlier than V300R006C08: MOD BSCHO LST BSCHO: V3R6C08: MOD HO LST HOINF
Value Range
2 to 6.
Default Value
3.
Setting Tradeoff
If the value of this parameter is too large, the proportion of SCH soft handoffs increases. Therefore, too many forward resources are occupied, and forward capacity is wasted. If the value of this parameter is too small, the proportion of soft handoffs increases but soft handoff gains cannot be utilized. Therefore, the service quality is affected. If the traffic in the system is light and the resources are abundant, this parameter can be set as 4 to improve the quality of service and decrease the call drop rate.
Remarks
None.
8.2.2 TADD (Pilot Good & Available Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the time when the MS moves the pilots in the neighbor set to the candidate set and sends a pilot strength measurement message (PSMM) to the BSC. A pilot can be added to the active set when its strength reaches the value of this parameter. Both the MS and the BSC must use this parameter.
Type
Air interface parameter (SPM/ESPM/ITSPM, EHDM/GHDM/UHDM).
2009-11-6
Page 276 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
MOD HO V3R1/V3R6- LST HOINF QRYINF=HO;
Value Range
0 to -63 (unit: 0.5 dB), that is, 0 to -31.5 dB.
Default Value
-28.
Setting Tradeoff
If the value of this parameter is too high (for example, it is larger than -24), the soft handoff threshold will be too high, which shrinks the soft handoff area and reduces the proportion of soft handoffs. In this case, seamless coverage may not be achieved. If soft handoff gains cannot be fully used, call drops may occur. If the value of this parameter is too small (for example, it is smaller than -28), the soft handoff threshold is lowered, which enlarges soft handoff area and increases the proportion of soft handoffs. In this case, many forward channel resources are used, and the forward capacity is reduced.
Remarks
The proportion of soft handoffs can be controlled flexibly through the adjustment of TADD, but the call drop rate and the call quality should be considered after the adjustment. When a call has several soft handoff legs, and each leg has a different TADD value, the current BSC uses the soft handoff parameters of the main leg. For details on maintenance principles of main legs, see related documents. The following table shows a typical soft handoff process. In this table, you can see the functions of TADD, TDROP, and TTDROP in handoffs.
Figure 1-1 Typical soft handoff process
2009-11-6
Page 277 of 438
Internal
1. When the pilot strength of the neighbor set exceeds TADD, the MS sends a PSMM and moves this
pilot to the candidate set.

2. The BSC sends an HDM message. 3. The MS moves this pilot to the active set and sends an HCM message. 4. When the pilot strength is lower than TDROP, the MS starts the handoff removal timer. 5. If the handoff removal timer expires, the MS sends a PSMM message. 6. The BSC sends an HDM message. 7. The MS moves this pilot to the neighbor set and sends an HCM message.
8.2.3 TDROP (Pilot Min. Available Threshold)

Description
If the pilot strength of an active set or a candidate set is higher than the value of this parameter, the MS starts the handoff removal timer for this pilot.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to -63 (unit: 0.5 dB), that is, 0 to -31.5 dB.
Default Value
-32.
Setting Tradeoff
If the value of this parameter is too great (for example, it is greater than -28), the soft handoff threshold is too high. In such cases, available signals are deleted from the active set quite soon. When the available pilots are not in the active set, they become interference, which may cause call drops. If the value of this parameter is too small (for example, it is smaller than -32), the soft handoff threshold decreases. In such cases, pilots in the active set cannot be easily deleted from the active set, increasing the proportion of soft handoffs and wasting the forward capacity.
Remarks
Parameters TADD and TDROP can be used to add and delete legs respectively. The two parameters are set mainly for hysteresis purposes. Therefore, ensure that the TADD (dB) value is greater than the TDROP (dB) value.
2009-11-6
Page 278 of 438
Internal
8.2.4 TTDROP (Pilot Removal Timer Length)

Description
If the pilot strength of an active set or a candidate set is higher than the value of this parameter, the MS starts the handoff removal timer for this pilot. If the pilot strength is higher than TDROP after the timer is started, the MS resets and closes the handoff removal timer. For the pilot in the candidate set, when the handoff removal timer expires, the MS moves this pilot to the neighbor set automatically. For the pilot in active set, when the handoff removal timer expires, the MS sends a PSMM message to remind the BSC to delete this pilot.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
s0.1 to s319. Table 8-2 lists the actual expiration time corresponding to the values of the parameter.
Table 1-1 Actual expiration time corresponding to the values of TDROPTIMER
T_TDROP S0.1 S1 S2 S4 S6 S9 S13 S19
Timer Expiration (Second) 0.1 1 2 4 6 9 13 19
T_TDROP S27 S39 S55 S79 S112 S159 S225 S319
Timer Expiration (Second) 27 39 55 79 112 159 225 319
Default Value
S4 (4 seconds).
2009-11-6
Page 279 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
If the value of this parameter is very large, the pilot with a small strength in the active set resides for a long time. In this way, the soft handoff ratio increases and some forward traffic channels are wasted. If the parameter value is too small, when the strength of a pilot in the active set fluctuates normally, even the strength becomes lower transiently, this pilot may be removed from the active set. In this way, the parameter cannot take effect in the handoff delay, so handoffs frequently occur.
Remarks
According to the protocol, the parameter T_TDROP is designed mainly for hysteresis purposes.
8.2.5 TCOMP (Pilot Worse Threshold)

Description
If the pilot strength of the candidate set is TCMP/2 higher than that of the active set, the MS sends a PSMM to remind the BSC to perform handoffs. For details, see table 4-2.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 15 (unit: 0.5 dB).
Default Value
5.
Setting Tradeoff
If the value of this parameter is too great, the pilot in the candidate set can easily replace the pilot in the active set, so handoffs occur frequently. If the value of this parameter is too small, the pilot in the candidate set can hardly replace the pilot in the active set. Hence, the pilot in the candidate set is always present as interference, reducing the forward capacity.
Remarks
When the number of the legs in the active set reaches to the maximum, the parameter TCOMP determines whether leg replacement should be performed.
2009-11-6
Page 280 of 438

Figure 1-1 Parameter TCOMP triggering PSMM messages
Internal
8.2.6 NGHBRMAXAGE (Neighbor Set Maximum AGE)

Description
This parameter specifies the maximum life cycle of the inter-frequency pilots in the neighbor set. The MS has a counter for each pilot in the neighbor set. When the MS receives a Neighbor List Update Message (NLUM), the MS increases the counters of the original pilots in the neighbor set by 1. If the counter of a pilot exceeds this parameter value, the MS removes this pilot from the neighbor set. If the parameter value is set to 0, each time the MS receives an NLUM, the MS removes all pilots in the original neighbor set so that the AT uses the contents in the latest NLUM. If the value is set to 2, when a pilot that is moved from the active set or candidate set to the neighbor set is not in two successive NLUMs, this pilot is removed from the neighbor set.
Type
Air interface parameter (SPM/ESPM/ITSPM). Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 15.
2009-11-6
Page 281 of 438
Internal
Default Value
0.
Setting Tradeoff
If the parameter value is too great, a pilot that is excluded from the active set or candidate set can stay for a longer time in the neighbor set. Therefore, new neighbor pilots in the NLUM may be excluded from the neighbor set of the MS (when the number of pilots exceeds the maximum number of pilots in the neighbor set of the MS). If this parameter is set to 0, each time the MS receives the NLUM, the MS takes the neighbor pilot list in the NLUM for a new pilot neighbor set. When the network has been just established, because the neighboring relations configuration is not mature, the value of this parameter can be set to 1. In this case, the MS is allowed to inherit the used pilots in the neighbor set for some time. If there are many neighbor cells, set the parameter to 0. This ensures that the MS always uses the neighbor pilot contents of the latest NLUM messages delivered by the BSC.
Remarks
None. ed to the active set.
8.3 Dynamic Soft Handoff

n parameter 14.
8.3.1 SOFTSLOPE (Soft Handoff Increasing Slope Ratio)

Description
Slope of the dynamic threshold SHO. When the dynamic SHO is enabled, this parameter is used to add and delete legs. This parameter is used by the MS. Only MSs above IS95B supports dynamic threshold SHOs.
Type
Air interface parameter (ESPM/ITSPM, GHDM/UHDM) Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
MOD HO LST HOINF: QRYINF=HO;
Value Range
0 to 63 (unit: 1/8)
2009-11-6
Page 282 of 438
Internal
Default Value
0, which means not to use the dynamic threshold SHO.
Setting Tradeoff
If the value of this parameter is 0, the dynamic threshold SHO of the MS is disabled; otherwise it is enabled. When the pilot strength of the active set is fixed, the lower the value of this parameter is, the higher the dynamic adding threshold and the dynamic deleting threshold are. In such cases, it is more difficult to add the pilot to the active set but easier to delete the pilot from it. Thus, the SHO ratio decreases. However, the SHO gains cannot be fully used and the probability of call drop increases. On the other hand, when the pilot strength of the active set is fixed, the greater the value of this parameter is, the higher the dynamic adding threshold and the dynamic deleting threshold are. In such cases, the SHO ratio increases, consuming excessive forward power and reducing the effective forward capacity.
Remarks
The dynamic SHO is introduced in the protocols to increase the forward link capacity through control of the SHO ratio. The higher the pilot strength of the active set is, the higher the dynamic threshold is. In such cases, it is difficult to add a new leg to the active set, and therefore the SHO ratio is controlled. Figure 7-6 describes a typical dynamic threshold SHO process.
Figure 1-1 Typical dynamic threshold SHO process
When the pilot strength of P2 in the neighbor set exceeds TADD, the MS moves it to the candidate set. When the pilot strength of P2 exceeds [(SOFT _ SLOPE / 8) 10 log10 (PS1 ) + ADD _ INTERCEPT / 2] , the MS sends a PSMM.
2009-11-6
Page 283 of 438
Internal
After receiving the HDM, the MS moves this pilot to the active set and sends an HCM. When the pilot strength of P1 is lower than removal timer. If the handoff removal timer expires, the MS sends a PSMM. The MS moves this P1 to the candidate set and sends an HCM. When the pilot strength of P1 is lower than TDROP, the MS starts the handoff removal timer. If the handoff removal timer expires, the MS moves P1 to the neighboring set.
[(SOFT _ SLOPE / 8) 10 log10 (PS 2 ) + DROP _ INTERCEPT / 2], the MS starts the handoff
8.3.2 ADDINTERC (Soft Handoff Pilot Adding Intercept)

Description
This parameter specifies the adding intercept when the MS performs dynamic threshold SHOs.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
32 to +31 (unit: 0.5 dB)
Default Value
4, that is, 2 dB.
Setting Tradeoff
The lower the value of this parameter is, the lower the dynamic adding threshold is, and the easier it will be to add neighbor pilots to the active set. In such cases, the SHO ratio increases but the forward capacity decreases. The greater the value of this parameter is, the higher the dynamic adding threshold is, and the harder it will be to add neighbor pilots to the active set. In such cases, the SHO ratio decreases, but the SHO gains cannot be fully used, causing the increase of the call drop rate.
Remarks
Figure 7-7 shows the condition of sending PSMMs when the dynamic threshold is enabled on the MS.
2009-11-6
Page 284 of 438

Figure 1-1 Condition of sending PSMMs when the dynamic threshold is enabled on the MS
Internal
Condition of sending PSMMs when the dynamic threshold is enabled on the MS: in the preceding inequation Note that the comprehensive pilot strength involves all the pilots in the active set. This is different from the calculation of dynamic deleting threshold.
10 log 10 PS > max( SOFT_SLOPE s 10 log 10 8
i A
PS i +
ADD_INTERCEPT s T_ADD s , ) 2 2
8.3.3 DROPINTERC (Soft Handoff Pilot Removing Intercept)

Description
This parameter specifies the removing intercept when the MS performs dynamic threshold SHOs.
Type
2009-11-6
Page 285 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
Value Range
32 to +31 (unit: 0.5 dB)
Default Value
0, that is, 0 dB.
Setting Tradeoff
The lower the value of this parameter is, the lower the dynamic removing threshold is, and the harder it will be to remove neighbor pilots from the active set. In such cases, the SHO ratio increases but the forward capacity decreases. The greater the value of this parameter is, the higher the dynamic removing threshold is, and the easier it will be to remove pilots from the active set. In such cases, the SHO ratio decreases, but the SHO gains cannot be fully used, causing the increase of the call drop rate.
Remarks
When the dynamic threshold SHO function is enabled, the MS calculates the dynamic removing threshold according to this parameter. Based on the dynamic removing threshold, the MS determines whether to start the handoff removal timer for the pilots in the active set. When this timer expires, the MS generates a PSMM and reports it to the BSC. The MS calculates the dynamic removing threshold as follows: Suppose that the active set has Na pilots, which are arranged in ascending sequence according to pilot strengths. For example: PS1 < PS2 < PS3 << PSna. If pilot PSi is according to the following inequation, the MS starts the handoff removal timer:
10 log 10 PS i < max( i = 1, 2, ..., PS N -1 A SOFT_SLOPE s 10 log 10 8
PS j +
j> i
DROP_INTERCEPT s T_DROP s , ) 2 2
8.4 Handoff Punishment

8.4.1 RRM Parameter 21 (Handoff Punishment Timer)
Description
The timer starts when the carrier enters the punishment state because the continuous SHO failures exceed the threshold. The handoff to the carrier is prohibited before the timer expires.
2009-11-6
Page 286 of 438
Internal
Type
Parameter of the BSC level, a BSC timer.
Related Commands
MOD TMR: MN=CCM, TMRID=40, TMRV=5000; LST TMR: MN=RRM, TMRID=40;
Value Range
10 to 30000
Default Value
10000
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
8.5 Weak Coverage SHO & Drop Save

8.5.1 WCSHOSW (Weak Coverage SHO Total Switch)
Description
This parameter specifies whether calls under a carrier can perform weak coverage SHOs. When the weak coverage SHO of all legs of the active set are disabled, this switch is disabled.
Type
Related Commands
MOD PHOALG LST HOINF: QRYINF = PHOALG
Value Range
ON or OFF.
2009-11-6
Page 287 of 438
Internal
Default Value
OFF.
Setting Tradeoff
Set the value of this parameter based on actual situations. If the carrier load is low, you can enable this function so that the subscribers in the weak coverage areas can enjoy greater transmit power and SHO gain.
Remarks
1. The weak coverage SHO switch is carrier-level. When the weak coverage SHO of all legs of the active
set are disabled, this switch is disabled.

2. Upon call setup, by default the MS is under good coverage. 3. Before the weak coverage SHO delay timer expires, the transition between the good coverage state
and the poor coverage state is not allowed, preventing the impact of overlarge signaling flow on the system. (Note: There are a timer for poor coverage state and a timer for good coverage state.)
8.5.2 APTSW (Adjust Power Threshold Switch)

Description
This parameter specifies whether an MS under weak coverage notifies the BTS to improve the forward power threshold of the call within permitted load.
Type
Related Commands
MOD WSHO LST HOINF: QRYINF=WSHO;
Value Range
ON or OFF.
Recommended Value
OFF.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
2009-11-6
Page 288 of 438
Internal
Remarks
Upon receiving the PMRM and Link_Rpt messages, the system performs weak coverage SHO decision. If the conditions are met, the BSC enhances the configuration for maximum forward power and notifies the BTS to increase the forward code channel power to the new maximum configuration. Then, the MS can have better power resource, thus preventing call drops.
8.5.3 AASBNSW (Adjust Active Set Branch Number Switch)

Description
This parameter specifies whether an MS under weak coverage can add more legs to the active set. The maximum number of legs in the active set is determined by the parameter MAXBRANCHNUM.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
ON or OFF.
Default Value
OFF.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
When the parameter AASBNSW of one leg in the active set is enabled, the parameter MAXBRANCHNUM under weak coverage is used for handoff decision.
8.5.4 AHWSW (Adjust Handoff Way Switch)

Description
This parameter specifies whether the system uses the handoff threshold under weak coverage state for handoff decision when an MS enters a weak coverage area.
2009-11-6
Page 289 of 438
Internal
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
ON or OFF.
Default Value
OFF.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
As long as the parameter AHWSW of one leg in the current active set is enabled, you need to perform the following operations: Modify the condition for deleting a leg as follows: ActEcIo <= Min {TDROPTHRESH, ActMaxEcIo -TRIGRELTHRESH } Modify the condition for adding a leg as follows: NvrEcIo >= Min { TADDTHRESH, ActMaxEcIo - TRIGRELTHRESH } Modify the condition for replacing a leg as follows: NbrEcIo - ActEcIo >= TCOMPTHRESH Where, ActEcIo indicates the strength of the pilots in the active set. ActMaxEcIo indicates the maximum strength of the pilots in the current active set. NbrEcIo indicates the strength of the neighbor pilots. TADDTHRESH indicates the threshold for adding a pilot to the weak coverage SHO. TDROPTHRESH indicates the threshold for deleting a pilot to the weak coverage SHO. WSHO_T_COMP indicates the threshold for substituting a pilot to the weak coverage SHO. TRIGRELTHRESH indicates the relative threshold for handoff decision in the weak coverage SHO.
2009-11-6
Page 290 of 438
Internal
8.5.5 AHTSW (Adjust Handoff Threshold Switch)

Description
This parameter determines whether to notify the MS to lower the handoff thresholds such as T_ADD when an MS enters a weak coverage area. The new handoff thresholds are TADDTHRESH, TDROPTHRESH, WSHO_T_COMP, TDROPTIMER, SHOSLOPE, SHOADDINC, and SHODROPINC.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
ON or OFF.
Default Value
OFF.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
When the system receives the PMRM and Link_Rpt messages and determines that the MS enters a weak coverage area, if the AHTSW of one leg in the active set is enabled, then the system delivers the SHO threshold under weak coverage state to the MS.
8.5.6 RRM Parameter 40 (Weak Coverage Soft Handoff Latency Timer)

Description
The timer starts when an MS in a call moves from the coverage with good voice quality to that with poor voice quality. The timer is used to prevent frequent changes in the state.
Type
2009-11-6
Page 291 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
Value Range
10 to 100000
Default Value
5000
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
8.5.7 RRM Parameter 42 (Weak Coverage Soft Handoff Pilot Measurement Timer)
Description
This timer is used for the MS. When the call is in the weak coverage state, the timer guides the MS to report PSMM messages regularly.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
10 to 100000
Default Value
2000
Setting Tradeoff
None.
2009-11-6
Page 292 of 438
Internal
Remarks
None.
8.5.8 SDSW (Save Drop Switch)

Description
This parameter specifies the switch for preventing call drops.
Type
Parameter of the carrier level.
Related Commands
MOD PHOALG:; LST HOINF: QRYINF = PHOALG
Value Range
ON, or OFF.
Default Value
OFF.
Setting Tradeoff
With this function enabled, the voice call drop rate in the weak coverage can be lowered. However, during the save procedure, the channel code power is increased, and thus the forward load on the carrier is also increased, bringing interference to other subscribers and decreasing the system capacity. It is recommended that this switch be set to OFF.
Remarks
None.
8.5.9 PWRADJRATE (Power Adjust Rate)

Description
This parameter specifies the increase rate of the forward code channel power in the drop save state.
Type
Related Commands
MOD WSHO:;
Internal
LST HOINF: QRYINF=WSHO;
Value Range
0 to 255 (unit: dB/s)
Default Value
10
Setting Tradeoff
If this parameter is set to a high value, the forward code channel power increases quickly and the forward load on the carrier fluctuates greatly, resulting in the waste of forward power. If this parameter is set to a low value, the forward code channel power does not increase timely, and therefore call drop occurs and the MS recaptures the network.
Remarks
None.
8.6 Handoff Control Parameters

8.6.1 DSERVALWHFTYPE (Data Call Supported HO Types)
Description
This parameter sets data call supported handoff types.
Type
For versions earlier than V3R6C08: internal parameter of the module level. V3R6C08: internal algorithm parameter of the carrier level. Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
For versions earlier than V3R6C08: MOD CHM LST CHM: QRYINF=HO For V3R6C08: MOD HO LST HOINF: QRYINF=HO;
2009-11-6
Page 294 of 438
Internal
Value Range
ALLOW (Allowing both SHO and HHO) ALLOW_SOFT (Allowing SHO only) ALLOW_HARD (Allowing HHO only) ALLOW_NONE (Not allowing handoff)
Default Value
ALLOW (Both SHO and HHO are allowed.)
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
Set the parameter according to actual situations. If the BSS uses Huawei NEs but the NSS uses non-Huawei NEs, and data call HHO is not supported, then this parameter can be set to ALLOW_SOFT (Allowing SHO only) to permit data call HHOs.
8.6.2 VHOTP (CDMA2000 1X Voice Call Supported HO Type)

Description
This parameter specifies the type of handoff supported by the voice call carried by external carriers.
Type
Related Commands
ADD OUTCDMACH / MOD OUTCDMACH LST CDMACH
Value Range
SHO (supporting inter-BSC SHOs); HHO (supporting HHOs only ); NHO (not supporting handoffs)
Default Value
None.
Setting Tradeoff
Set the value of this parameter based on actual situations.
2009-11-6
Page 295 of 438
Internal
Remarks
None.
8.6.3 DHOTP (CDMA2000 1X Data Call Supported HO Type)

Description
This parameter specifies the type of handoff supported by the data call carried by external carriers.
Type
Related Commands
ADD OUTCDMACH / MOD OUTCDMACH LST CDMACH
Value Range
SHO (supporting inter-BSC SHOs); HHO (supporting HHOs only); NHO (not supporting handoffs)
Default Value
None. Setting TradeoffSet the value of this parameter based on actual situations.
Remarks
The carriers of MOTO and Lucent do not support inter-BSC active data service HHOs. Thus, when such carriers are added, select NHO.
8.6.4 HHOALGSWDELAY (Hard Handoff Delay Switch)

Description
After the HHO is complete, the RRM starts the HHO delay timer. Before the timer expires, new HHOs cannot be performed. The timer is used to avoid frequent HHOs.
Type
Internal parameter of the BSC level. Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Command
MOD BSCHO
2009-11-6
Page 296 of 438
Internal
LST BSCHO
Value Range
ON and OFF.
Default Value
OFF
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
For example, a HHO is performed between BSC 1 and BSC 2. If the HHO delay switch of BSC 1 is enabled and that of BSC 2 is disabled, the HHO delay takes effect after the MS performs HHO from BSC 1 to BSC 2. In the same scenario, if the MS performs HHO from BSC 2 to BSC 1, the delay will take effect. The HHO delay is not direction-oriented. Thus, if the HHO from A to B is complete, new HHO from B to A or to C is controlled by HHO delay.
8.6.5 Timer of RRM Parameter 43 (Hard Handoff Delay Timer)

Description
After the HHO is complete, the RRM starts the timer. Before the timer expires, no HHO can be performed. The timer is used to avoid frequent HHOs.
Type
Command
MOD TMR LST TMR
Value Range
10 to 100000 (unit: ms)
Default Value
4000
Setting Tradeoff
None.
2009-11-6
Page 297 of 438
Internal
Remarks
If the BSS uses Huawei equipment and the NSS uses the equipment of other manufacturers and errors occur on the interworking HHO message processing, you can increase the duration of the HHO delay timer to reduce the HHO attempts.
8.7 Hard Handoff Macro Diversity

8.7.1 INTRABSCHHOSW (Intra-BSC HHO Macro Diversity Switch)
Description
This parameter determines whether to use the HHO macro diversity function for intra-BSC HHOs.
Type
Command
MOD BSCHO LST BSCHO:;
Value Range
ON or OFF.
Default Value
ON
Setting Tradeoff
The HHO macro diversity enables the MSs to perform HHOs to multiple target carriers and helps use the SHO gains in time to improve the HHO success rate. However, too many HHO target carriers may occupy excessive resource instantly. In addition, in the HHO algorithm of the blind handoff, the system does not know the strength of target pilots. Thus, the system selects the HHO target carriers according to the actual configurations. If too many HHO target carriers are configured, the setup of legs fails, affecting the traffic measurement statistics.
Remarks
When multiple signaling points exist in a BSC, the intra-signaling point HHO is not related to the MSC. Therefore, HHO macro diversity does not require support of the MSC, and Huawei
2009-11-6
Page 298 of 438
Internal
equipment always supports intra-signaling point in the HHO flow. However, in the same BSC, the flows of inter-signaling point HHOs are the same as that of inter-BSC HHOs. In this case, the HHO macro diversity requires support of the MSC. If intra-BSC HHOs must use the HHO macro diversity, the HHO areas need to be arranged under one signaling point to simplify the flow.
8.7.2 INTERBSCHHOSW (Inter-BSC HHO Macro Diversity Switch)

Description
This parameter determines whether to use the HHO macro diversity function for inter-BSC HHOs.
Type
Command
MOD BSCHO LST BSCHO:;
Value Range
ON or OFF.
Default Value
OFF
Setting Tradeoff
The HHO macro diversity enables the MSs to perform HHOs to multiple target carriers and helps use the SHO gains in time to improve the HHO success rate. However, too many HHO target carriers may occupy excessive resource instantly. In addition, in the HHO algorithm of the blind handoff, the system does not know the strength of target pilots. Thus, the system selects the HHO target carriers according to the actual configurations. If too many HHO target carriers are configured, the setup of legs fails, affecting the traffic measurement statistics.
Remarks
The inter-BSC HHO macro diversity function needs the support of the MSC and target BSC. If the MSC and target BSC do not support this function, you are advised to set the parameter to OFF.
2009-11-6
Page 299 of 438
Internal
8.7.3 HHOMAXTARGNUM (Max Number of HHO Branches)

Description
This parameter specifies the maximum number of legs in the HHO target active set when the HHO macro diversity function is enabled. According to the protocol, an active set of an MS can have a maximum of six legs.
Type
Command
MOD BSCHO; LST BSCHO;
Value Range
1 to 6
Default Value
6
Setting Tradeoff
If only HHO algorithms in which HHO target pilot strengths can be measured are used (such as the intra-frequency HHO algorithm, MS assisted HHO algorithm, and pseudo-pilot HHO algorithm), the strengths of target pilots are known, so the HHO targets are accurate. The recommended value of this parameter is 3, the same as the maximum number of legs in the SHO in the target active set. If HHO algorithms in which HHO target pilot strengths cannot be measured are used (such as the handdown HHO algorithm and direct HHO algorithm), HHO targets are inaccurate because the strengths of target pilots are unknown and the target pilots are obtained from data configuration. Therefore, set the parameter to a larger value to increase the HHO success rate.
Remarks
Assume that you set the maximum number of HHO target legs to six and the maximum number of SHO legs to three. Then, after the HHO is complete, six legs may exist in the active set. On the basis of the SHO mechanism, the system, however, changes the number of legs in the active set to three (maximum number of SHO legs).
2009-11-6
Page 300 of 438
Internal
8.8 Direct Hard Handoff

8.8.1 DHHOSW (Direct HHO Switch)
Description
This parameter determines whether calls under a carrier can perform direct HHOs. If a switch of a leg in the active set is off, the algorithm is disabled. If multiple legs exist, the decision parameter of the strongest pilot in the active set serves as the decision threshold of the HHO.
Type
Command
MOD PHOALG LST HOINF: QRYINF=PHOALG;
Value Range
ON or OFF.
Default Value
OFF
Setting Tradeoff
Set the value of this parameter based on actual situations. If the source cell and the target cell have no common frequency, the handdown HHO cannot be used. For IS95 MSs, if the direct HHO algorithm is used, with the support of HHO macro diversity, the HHO success rate can also be guaranteed.
Remarks
Before enabling the direct HHO switch, configure the target carriers of direct HHOs. For CDMA2000 1X calls, if the mobile-assisted HHO algorithm switch is enabled, bit 1 of RRM parameter 50 is set to 0 and inter-frequency neighboring cells exist, the mobile-assisted HHO algorithm is preferred, and handdown and direct handoffs are forbidden. In the protocols, short messages and Markov calls do not support the HHO.
2009-11-6
Page 301 of 438
Internal
8.8.2 ABSTHRS (Handdown HHO EC/IO Intensity Absolute Threshold)

Description
When the pilot strength of the SHO in the target active set is below this threshold and the minimum RTD in the current active set is higher than THHODIRECTRTD, the direct HHO is triggered.
Type
Command
MOD DRCT LST HOINF: QRYINF=DRCT;
Value Range
-63 to 0 (unit: 0.5 dB)
Default Value
-16
Setting Tradeoff
The lower the value of this parameter (for example, lower than 28) is, the lower the actual corresponding physical threshold is. In such cases, delay in the triggering of direct HHOs is induced, and the signals of the source channel links fade to a great extent. Thus, the MS cannot receive the HDM sent on the source channel and the HHO fails. The greater the value of this parameter (for example, larger than 10) is, the higher the actual physical threshold is. In such cases, the direct HHO is triggered early for the MS to receive the HDM sent on the source channel. However, the coverage area of the source cell is low.
Remarks
Set the pilot strength of the SHO in the target active set to ShoTargEcIo; set the minimum RTD of the current active set to AsMinRtd. When the BSC receives a PSMM or PPSMM, the direct HHO is triggered if the following conditions are met: { (ShoTargEcIo <= THHODIRECTABSTHRESH) && (AsMinRtd >= THHODIRECTRTD }
8.8.3 MAXRTD (Handdown HHO Max. Loop Delay Threshold)

Description
When the pilot strength of the SHO in the target active set is below THHODIRECTABSTHRESH and the minimum RTD in the current active set is above this
2009-11-6
Page 302 of 438
Internal
threshold, the direct HHO is triggered. For the meaning of RTD, see the description of the THHOHANDDOWNRTD parameter.
Type
Command
MOD DRCT LST HOINF: QRYINF=DRCT;
Value Range
0 to 65535 (unit: chip)
Default Value
15
Setting Tradeoff
The greater the value of this parameter is, the longer the distance between the HHO area and the source cell is. In such cases, the HHO is not triggered in time. The lower the value of this parameter is, the shorter the distance between the HHO area and the source cell is. In such cases, the HHO is triggered early.
Remarks
For the RTD calculation, see the remarks in the section "Handdown Hard Handoff Parameters." When a call requires HHOs, the system instructs the MS to periodically report pilot strength measurement messages (PSMMs). Thus, the pilot strength of the source cell in the active set is closely traced, and HHOs can be triggered in time.
8.8.4 Configuration Examples

It is recommended that the preceding parameters use default values, except for the configuration of the switch which needs to be performed according to network configurations. [Example 1] There are carrier A and carrier B, whose cell IDs, sector IDs, and frequency points are (300-2-283) and (301-3-160), respectively. Configure handoffs from carrier A to carrier B as direct hard handoffs. For the actual configuration, contact the technical support engineers at HQ. The offline configuration script is as follows: /*Switch on the direct hard handoff algorithm*/ MOD PHOALG:DRCT=ON; /*Configure direct hard handoff parameters, and configure the direct hard handoff target of carrier A as carrier B*/
2009-11-6
Page 303 of 438
Internal
MOD DRCTTRG: SRCCDMACH="300-2-283", BNDCLS=BC800, ARFCN=160, TRGCDMACH1="301-3-160";
8.9 Mobile Assisted Hard Handoff

During a call, the BSC can enable the MS to operate in another frequency, and then the MS searches for the available inter-frequency neighbor carrier. According to the inter-frequency search measurement reported from the MS, the BSC determines whether to perform a hard handoff. To perform an assisted hard handoff, the MS performs the following operations:
1. The BSC notifies the MS to start the inter-frequency search. The involved parameters are MAHHO
Switch, MS-Assisted Hard Handoff Start Search Threshold, MS-Assisted Hard Handoff Stop Search Threshold, MAHHO Start Search Loop Delay Threshold, and MAHHO Stop Search Loop Delay Threshold. If the inter-frequency search startup condition of any active set leg switch is ON, the inter-frequency search is started.
2. The MS reports the inter-frequency search results according to certain conditions. For the details of
involved parameters, see section 8.14.1 "Common Parameters."

3. The BSC determines whether to perform a hard handoff according to the report from the MS. The
involved parameters are MAHHO Serving Carrier EC/IO Threshold, MS-Assisted Hard Handoff Relative Threshold, and MAHHO Target Carrier EC/IO Threshold.
8.9.1 MAHHOSW (MAHHO Switch)

Description
This parameter determines whether to allow the MS to use the MS-assisted hard handoff function for MSs of a version later than IS95B during inter-frequency hard handoffs. According to the protocols, only the MSs of a version later than IS95B support different frequency search in the traffic channel.
Type
Internal parameter of the BSC of V2R2/V2R3/V3R1C02. Internal algorithm parameter of the carrier level for V3R6 and later versions. If a switch of a leg in the active set is on, the algorithm is enabled. The first carrier whose switch is on in the active set is used to obtain handoff parameters. The first carrier may not be the strongest pilot or the reference pilot. Ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
V2R2/V2R3/V3R1 - MOD BSCHO V3R6C01 - MOD PHOALG V2R2/V2R3/V3R1 - LST BSCHO:; V3R6C01 - LST HOINF
2009-11-6
Page 304 of 438
Internal
Value Range
ON or OFF.
Default Value
OFF
Setting Tradeoff
The MSs above IS95B use the MS-assisted hard handoff algorithm, instead of new hardware, to perform inter-frequency hard handoffs. The MSs measure signal strength of pilots automatically. In this manner, the hard handoff target is accurate, and the success rate is high. When measuring the different frequency strengths, the MSs disconnect the communication with the serving frequency point, and the quality of the call decreases. This method is recommended for MSs above IS95B to perform inter-frequency hard handoffs.
Remarks
The system uses the MS-assisted hard handoff function only when a call meets the following conditions: These conditions are as follows: (1) The algorithm switch is enabled. The protocol revision of this call is above IS95B. This call has inter-frequency neighboring relations. The service type of this call supports hard handoffs, such as SMS and the hard handoffs that are not supported by Markov calls as specified in the protocols.
8.9.2 TADDMAHHO (MAHHO Serving Carrier EC/IO Threshold)

Description
When the strength (source frequency integrated Ec/Io) of the SHO in the target active set is below the value of this parameter, and the strength (target frequency integrated Ec/Io) of the MS-assisted hard handoff in the active set is higher than MAHHOTHRS (MAHHO Target Carrier EC/IO Threshold), the MS-assisted hard handoff is triggered.
Type
Parameter of the carrier level. Ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
MOD HHOMA LST HOINF: QRYINF=HHOMA;
2009-11-6
Page 305 of 438
Internal
Value Range
63 to 0 (unit: 0.5 dB).
Default Value
20
Setting Tradeoff
The smaller the value of this parameter (for example, smaller than 28), the lower the pilot strength for triggering the MS-assisted hard handoff in the target cell. In such cases, the MS-assisted hard handoff can be easily triggered. However, because the signals in the target cell may be weak, it is difficult for the MS to capture the target cell, and therefore the hard handoff fails. The higher the value of this parameter (for example, larger than 10), the higher the pilot strength for triggering the MS-assisted hard handoff in the target cell. In such cases, it is easier for the MS to capture a channel of the target cell during the MS-assisted hard handoff, but it is possible that the MS-assisted hard handoff cannot be easily triggered.
Remarks
The MS-assisted hard handoff is triggered when any one of the following requirements is met.
4. When the integrated pilot strength of the SHO in the target active set is not higher than the MAHHO
Serving Carrier Threshold, and the integrated strength of the MS-assisted HHO in the active pilot set is not less than the MS-Assisted Hard Handoff Target Carrier Threshold
5. When the integrated strength of the MS-assisted HHO in the active pilot set minus the integrated
strength of the SHO in the target active pilot set is not less than the MS-Assisted Hard Handoff Relative Threshold
6. When the integrated strength of the MS-assisted HHO in the active pilot set is not less than the Pilot
Good Available Threshold, and the difference between the inter-frequency receive power of the MS and the intra-frequency receive power of the MS is not less than the MAHHO MS Receiving Power Relative Threshold
8.9.3 RELTHRS (MAHHO Relative EC/IO Threshold)

Description
When the pilot strength of the MS-assisted hard handoff target active set minus that of the soft handoff target active set is higher than this parameter, the MS-assisted hard handoff is triggered.
Type
Related Commands
2009-11-6
Page 306 of 438
Internal
Value Range
0 to 63 (unit: 0.5 dB; indicating 0 to 31.5 dB)
Default Value
5
Setting Tradeoff
The larger the value of this parameter is, the stronger the signals in the target cell for hard handoff are, compared with those in the source cell. In this case, the MS can easily capture a forward channel in the target cell. As the signals in the source cell are weak during hard handoffs, it is possible that the MS cannot receive the HDM of the source cell. The smaller the value of this parameter, the easier for hard handoffs to be triggered. In this case, the signals on the forward channels of the source cell side do not deteriorate drastically, which is favorable for the MS to receive the HDM of the original cell, but the MS may not successfully capture a forward channel of the source cell.
Remarks
For details on the triggering conditions of the MS-assisted hard handoffs, see the description of the TADDMAHHO parameter. When a call relates to hard handoffs, the system instructs the MS to periodically report pilot strength measurement messages (PSMMs). Thus, the pilot strength of the source cell active set is closely traced, and hard handoffs can be triggered in time.
8.9.4 STRTSRCHTHRS (MAHHO Start Search EC/IO Threshold)

Description
When the MS-assisted hard handoff is used, the BSC sends the CFSRQM to the MS to start candidate frequency search. The parameter is used to determine when the BSC delivers the candidate frequency search request message to the MS. When the pilot strength of the active set is below this threshold or the receive power of the MS is below the MAHHO Start Search Loop Delay Threshold, and the minimum loop delay of the current active set is above the MAHHO Start Search Loop Delay Threshold, the search is enabled.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
63 to 0 (unit: 0.5 dB).
2009-11-6
Page 307 of 438
Internal
Default Value
16
Setting Tradeoff
The smaller the value of this parameter (for example, smaller than 28), the lower the actual corresponding physical threshold. In such cases, the hard handoff search is triggered late. The MS does not necessarily receive the CFSQM because the link quality of the original cell may be weak by this time. Therefore, the frequency search cannot be started normally and the triggering of the hard handoff is delayed. The higher the value of this parameter (for example, higher than 16), the sooner the inter-frequency search is started when the pilot strength of candidate frequency is strong. If inter-frequency search breaks the call, the link quality of the serving frequency may be affected.
Remarks
When a call has hard handoff relations, the system instructs the MS to report the PSMM periodically so that the pilot strength of the active set of the source cell is closely monitored. If the inter-frequency search is not started when the pilot strength of the active set becomes weak and is lower than the inter-frequency search start threshold, the BSC sends a CFSQM to the MS to prepare for a hard handoff. If the pilot strength of the active set recovers, that is, it is higher than the inter-frequency search stop threshold, the BSC sends a CFSCNM to stop the inter-frequency search so that the influence of the inter-frequency on the call quality can be reduced to minimum. The MAHHO Stop Search EC/IO Threshold should be slightly higher than the MAHHO Stop Search EC/IO Threshold.
8.9.5 STOPSRCHTHRS (MAHHO Stop Search EC/IO Threshold)

Description
When the MS-assisted hard handoff is used, the BSC sends the CFSRQM to the MS to start candidate frequency search. However, the inter-frequency search has a negative effect on call quality. Therefore, when the pilot strength of the active set becomes favorable, the BSC must send a CFSCNM to the MS to stop the inter-frequency search. The parameter is used to determine when the BSC delivers the candidate frequency search control message requesting the MS to stop search. When the pilot strength of the active set is above this threshold or the receive power of the MS is above the MS-Assisted Hard Handoff Stop Search Threshold, and the minimum loop delay of the current active set is below the MAHHO Stop Search Loop Delay Threshold, the search is stopped.
Type
Related Commands
2009-11-6
Page 308 of 438
Internal
Value Range
63 to 0 (unit: 0.5 dB).
Default Value
12
Setting Tradeoff
The smaller the value of this parameter (for example, smaller than 24), the lower the actual corresponding physical threshold. In such cases, the hard handoff search is easily stopped, which reduces the time for the MS to perform inter-frequency search. However, the inter-frequency search cannot be triggered in time. The higher the value of this parameter (for example, larger than 12), the higher the actual corresponding physical threshold. In such cases, the hard handoff search is difficult to stop. In such cases, frequent inter-frequency search may affect call quality, but frequent inter-frequency search is favorable for the MS to perform real-time measurement of candidate frequency.
Remarks
The MAHHO Stop Search Threshold should be slightly higher than the MAHHO Stop Search Threshold.
8.9.6 MAHHOTHRS (MAHHO Target Carrier EC/IO Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the absolute EC/IO threshold of the MS-assisted hard handoff of target carriers.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
63 to 0 (unit: 0.5 dB).
Default Value
16
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Internal
Remarks
None.
8.9.7 STRTSRCHRTD (MAHHO Start Search Loop Delay Threshold)

Description
When the current pilot strength of the MS is not higher than the MAHHO Start Search EC/IO Threshold (or the MS receive power is not higher than the MAHHO Start Search Loop Delay Threshold) and the minimum loop delay of the current active set is not lower than the threshold, the MS starts the inter-frequency search.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
Default Value
0
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
The MAHHO Stop Search Loop Delay Threshold should be slightly smaller than the MAHHO Start Search Loop Delay Threshold.
8.9.8 STOPSRCHRTD (MAHHO Stop Search Loop Delay Threshold)

Description
When the current pilot strength of the current active set of the MS is not lower than the MS-Assisted Hard Handoff Stop Search Threshold and the MS receive power is not lower than the MS-Assisted Hard Handoff Stop Search Threshold), or the minimum loop delay of the current active set is lower than the threshold, the MS stops the inter-frequency search.
2009-11-6
Page 310 of 438
Internal
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
Default Value
0
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
8.9.9 RXRELTHRS (MAHHO MS Receiving Power Relative Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the MS receiving power relative threshold of the MS-assisted hard handoff, used for the decision of the MS-assisted hard handoff.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
62 to 62 (unit: dBm)
2009-11-6
Page 311 of 438
Internal
Default Value
62
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
For details on the triggering conditions of the MS-assisted hard handoffs, see the description of the TADDMAHHO parameter.
8.9.10 STRTSRCHRTD (MAHHO Start Search Loop Delay Threshold)

Description
When the current pilot strength of the MS is not higher than the MAHHO Start Search EC/IO Threshold (or the MS receive power is not higher than the MAHHO Start Search Loop Delay Threshold) and the minimum loop delay of the current active set is not lower than the MAHHO Start Search Loop Delay Threshold, the MS starts the inter-frequency search.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
Default Value
120
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
2009-11-6
Page 312 of 438
Internal
8.9.11 STOPSRCHRTD (MAHHO Stop Search Loop Delay Threshold)

Description
When the current pilot strength of the current active set of the MS is not lower than the MAHHO Stop Search EC/IO Threshold and the MS receive power is not lower than the MAHHO Stop Search Loop Delay Threshold), or the minimum loop delay of the current active set is lower than the MAHHO Stop Search Loop Delay Threshold, the MS stops the inter-frequency search.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
Default Value
58
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
8.10 Candidate Frequency Searching Control Parameter

8.10.1 SRVFRQECTHRS (Total Receiving Power Threshold of Serving Frequency)
Description
This parameter specifies the threshold of the total receive power of the serving frequency. The BSC delivers the candidate frequency search request message to the MS. If the search type is periodic search, the MS determines whether to start or stop the search on inter-frequency
Internal
carriers based on the value of this parameter and SF_TOTAL_EC_IO_THRESH, which indicates the overall pilot strength threshold of the serving frequency. If this parameter is set to 11111, the MS does not depend on the total receive power of the serving frequency to determine whether to start or stop the inter-frequency search. If this parameter is set to a value other than 11111, the MS measures the spectral density of total receive power of the serving frequency every frame (20 ms). Then, the MS calculates the average value of the ten latest values of the N12m to calculate the receive power, that is, total_ec of the serving frequency. If the value of total_ec is smaller than (120 + 2 x SF_TOTAL_EC_THRESH), the MS searches inter-frequency carriers. Otherwise, the MS stops the search.
Type
Air interface parameter (CFSRQM) Ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
MOD CFSC LST HOINF: QRYINF=CFSC;
Value Range
0 to 31. The value of this parameter can be converted to and from the actual power. For details, see the "Setting Tradeoff" part.
Default Value
31
Setting Tradeoff
If you do not want the MS to determine whether to start or stop the inter-frequency search based on the total receive power of the serving frequency, set this parameter to 11111, that is, 31. If you want the MS to start the inter-frequency search when the total receive power of the serving frequency is smaller than the value of total_ec_thresh, or stop the search when the total receive power of the serving frequency is higher than the value of total_ec_thresh, set the parameter to the value calculated through .
Remarks
The protocol defines two parameters, that is, SF_TOTAL_EC_THRESH and SF_TOTAL_EC_IO_THRESH to control the inter-frequency searches of the MS. This provides a flexible mechanism. When the link quality of the serving frequency is favorable, the MS does not search inter-frequency carriers to minimize the impact on voice quality. When the link quality of the serving frequency is poor, the MS searches inter-frequency carriers on time to prepare for hard handoffs. If these two parameters are set improperly, the MS cannot start inter-frequency searches properly. This may lead to the delay of hard handoff. By default, this parameter is set to 31, indicating that this parameter is not used. You can adjust the value based on the actual situation, and then observe effects.
2009-11-6
Page 314 of 438
Internal
8.10.2 SRVFRQECIOTHRS (Total EC/IO Threshold of Serving Frequency)

Description
This parameter specifies the total pilot Ec/Io threshold of the serving frequency. The BSC delivers the candidate frequency search request message to the MS. If the search type is periodic search, the MS determines whether to start or stop the search on inter-frequency carriers based on the value of this parameter and SRVFRQECIOTHRS, which indicates the overall pilot strength threshold of the serving frequency. If this parameter is set to 31, the MS does not depend on the total pilot Ec/Io threshold of the serving frequency to determine whether to start or stop the inter-frequency search. If this parameter is set to a value other than 31, the total pilot Ec/Io value of the serving frequency equals to the value of total_ec_io. If the value of total_ec_io is smaller than SRVFRQECIOTHRS, the MS searches inter-frequency carriers. Otherwise, the MS stops the search.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
31 to 0 (unit: 0.5 dB)
Default Value
31
Setting Tradeoff
If you do not want the MS to determine whether to start or stop the inter-frequency search based on the total pilot Ec/Io of the serving frequency, set this parameter to 31. If you want the MS to start the inter-frequency search when the total pilot Ec/Io of the serving frequency is smaller than the value of SRVFRQECIOTHRS, or stops such search when the total pilot Ec/Io of the serving frequency is higher than the value of SRVFRQECIOTHRS, set this parameter to the value calculated by . If this parameter is set to 20, the MS starts the inter-frequency search when the total pilot Ec/Io of the serving frequency is smaller than 10dB.
Remarks
This parameter functions in a similar manner as TMAHHOSTARTSRCHTHRESH and TMAHHOSTOPSRCHTHRESH in the HHOMAHHOPARA table of the BSC. But this parameter is a function of the MS whereas the other two parameters are functions of the BSC.
2009-11-6
Page 315 of 438
Internal
Their common effects are: When the link quality of the serving frequency is favorable, the MS does not search inter-frequency carriers to minimize the impact on voice quality. When the link quality of the serving frequency is poor, the MS searches inter-frequency carriers on time to prepare for hard handoffs.
8.10.3 DRXPWRTHRS (Receiving Power Difference Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the difference between cand_freq_pwr and serving_freq_pwr. The parameter cand_freq_pwr refers to the receive power of the candidate frequency whereas the parameter serving_freq_pwr refers to the receive power of the serving frequency. This difference is indicated by minimum_power_diff. When the actual power difference between the candidate frequency and the serving frequency is smaller than this threshold, the MS stops the searching. If the power difference between the target frequency and the serving frequency is smaller than the threshold specified by this parameter, the hard handoff fails and the MS switches to the original channel. When this parameter is set to 0, this parameter is not used.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 31. The value of this parameter can be converted to and from the actual power. For details, see the "Setting Tradeoff" part.
Default Value
0
Setting Tradeoff
If you do not want the MS to stop searching candidate frequencies or drop the hard handoff to candidate frequencies automatically based on the power difference between the candidate frequency and the serving frequency, set this parameter to 0. If you want the MS to stop searching candidate frequencies when the power difference between the candidate frequency and the serving frequency is smaller than the value of the minimum_power_diff, set this parameter to the value calculated by .
For example, if you want the MS to stop searching candidate frequencies or drop the hard handoff when the power difference is 4 dB, set this parameter to 17.
2009-11-6
Page 316 of 438
Internal
Remarks
If this parameter is set improperly, the hard handoff may fail. By default, the value of this parameter is 0, indicating that this parameter is not used.
8.10.4 MINPLTECIO (Min. Pilot EC/IO of Candidate Frequency)

Description
This parameter specifies the minimum pilot strength threshold for the MS to try to demodulate the forward traffic channel of the candidate frequency. When the MS receives the HDM, it tries to demodulate the forward traffic channel of the target frequency, If the total pilot strength of the active set of the candidate frequency is smaller than the value of this parameter, the MS considers that the search or handoff fails and stops demodulating the forward traffic channel. If the value of this parameter is set to 0, this parameter is not used. That is, the MS performs searching and hard handoff regardless of the EcIo strength of the active set of the candidate frequency.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
-31 to 0 (unit: 0.5 dB).
Default Value
0
Setting Tradeoff
If you do not want the MS to stop demodulating the traffic channel based on the Ec/Io strength of the target active set of the candidate frequency, set the value of this parameter to 0. Otherwise, set the parameter to a value other than 0. For example, if the value of this parameter is 20, the MS does not demodulate the forward traffic channel of the target active set when the total pilot strength of the target active set of the candidate frequency is smaller than 10 dB.
Remarks
If this parameter is set improperly, the hard handoff may fail. By default, the value of this parameter is 0, indicating that this parameter is not used.
2009-11-6
Page 317 of 438
Internal
8.10.5 CFTADD (Candidate Frequency T_ADD)

Description
This parameter determines whether the MS reports the pilot PN of a candidate frequency when the MS reports the Candidate Frequency Search Report Message (CFSRPM) to the BSC. For example, if the value of this parameter is set to 12 dB, the MS reports pilots whose strength is greater than 12 dB in the CFSRPM.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
-63 to 0 (unit: 0.5 dB).
Default Value
28
Setting Tradeoff
The smaller the threshold is set, the easier it is for the MS to add the pilots to the candidate set. For example, if the threshold is smaller than 32, the corresponding report threshold is low. In this case, the CFSRQM report is increasingly frequent. Certain reports may be of less value. This may cause unnecessary signaling load. The higher you set the threshold, the more difficult it is for the MS to add the pilots to the candidate set. For example, if the threshold is higher than 16, the corresponding report threshold is high. The signaling load is decreased, but the handoff may not be implemented.
Remarks
Set the threshold to a relatively higher value to let the MS add more pilots to the candidate set. Therefore, the BSC can have more choices when performing decisions.
8.10.6 TFWAITTM (Wait Period on Candidate Frequency)

Description
During hard handoffs, the MS starts a timer. Before the timer times out, the MS must receive N11m (one) complete frame from the target pilot. Otherwise, the MS regards the handoff as failed. This parameter is used to set the timeout limit of the timer. The unit is four frames.
2009-11-6
Page 318 of 438
Internal
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 15 (unit: four frames).
Default Value
4
Setting Tradeoff
The time that the MS waits for the target channel when the MS does not capture any target channel increases when the value of this parameter increases. For example, if the value of this parameter is set to 15, the MS can wait up to 1.2s. If the MS is not allowed to switch to the original channel when hard handoff fails, you are advised to set the value of this parameter as high as possible. Then, the MS can have enough time to capture the target channel.
Remarks
For the 1X MS, the protocol supports the function of returning to the original channel at hard handoff failure. That is, when the MS fails to capture target channel during the inter-frequency hard handoff, it switches back to the original serving frequency. Then it reports a CFSRPM on the original channel, whereas the value of LAST_SRCH_MSG is 1. During tests, however, if RETURN_IF_HANDOFF_FAIL is set to a value that allows the MS to return to the original channel in GHDM, the MS can not perform intra-frequency measurements even if hard handoff succeeds. After the hard handoff, the MS reports no PSMMs. As a result, soft handoffs are performed normally. Therefore, it is not recommended to allow the MS to return to the original channel in GHDM.
8.10.7 CFPLTINC (Pilot Pseudo Noise Code Increase Step during Candidate Frequency Search)
Description
This parameter specifies the PN_INC on the candidate frequency. When the MS successfully switches to the candidate frequency, this parameter is used directly as PILOT_INC of the target frequency to search for the remaining set.
Type
Internal
Related Commands
Value Range
2 to 6, in the unit of 64 chips.
Default Value
4
Setting Tradeoff
You can set the value of this parameter based on the PN planning of the candidate frequency and the actual situation.
Remarks
After hard handoffs, the BSC sends a NLUM to the MS. The NLUM contains the PILOT_INC field. If CF_PILOT_INC is not correctly set, the MS updates the PILOT_INC when it receives the NLUM. Therefore, the incorrect configuration has little impact on the searching of the remaining set by the MS after the hard handoff.
8.10.8 CFSRCHWINN (Neighbor Set Search Window of Candidate Frequency)

Description
This parameter specifies the default search window for searching the neighbor set of the candidate frequencies. The Candidate Frequency Search Request Message (CFSRQM) can designate different search windows for neighbor pilots of each candidate frequency. If no search window is designated for pilots of a candidate frequency, the MS uses this parameter to search the neighbor set pilots of the candidate frequency.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
Refer to SRCHWINA.
2009-11-6
Page 320 of 438
Internal
Default Value
chips60(60chips)
Setting Tradeoff
The possibility that neighbor pilot signals of the candidate frequency are detected by the search window increases when the value of this parameter increases. Therefore, if this parameter is set to a high value, more neighbor pilots can be captured. But the search time drags, and some irrelevant signals are detected. If this parameter is set to a small value, neighbor pilot signals of the candidate frequency are hard to detect because longer delay exists between the candidate frequency and the serving frequency.
Remarks
You can set this parameter to a slightly high value based on the actual situation.
8.10.9 CFSRCHWINR (Remaining Set Search Window of Candidate Frequency)

Description
This parameter specifies the search window for the remaining set of candidate frequencies. After the successful hard handoff to the candidate frequency, the MS uses this parameter as SRCHWINR to search for the remaining set.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
Refer to SRCHWINA.
Default Value
Chips80(80chips)
Setting Tradeoff
Refer to SRCHWINR.
2009-11-6
Page 321 of 438
Internal
Remarks
For the candidate frequency, the protocol defines that the MS contains the following pilot sets: neighbor set and search set. The neighbor set is used to save the pilot list of the candidate frequency, and the search set is the subset of the neighbor set and used to search pilots. But the protocol does not clearly state that the MS contains a remaining set for the candidate frequency. The reason is that CFSRCHWINR is used to set the initial value of SRCHWINR after the MS is successfully switched to the candidate frequency. Generally, after hard handoffs, the BSC delivers an In-Traffic System Parameter Message (ITSPM) to the MS to update the search window of the MS. Therefore, the value of this parameter has little impact on the system.
8.10.10 SRCHPRD (Periodic Search Period)

Description
When the BSC instructs the MS to perform the periodic searching on the candidate frequency, the MS starts a timer for the periodic candidate frequency searching. This parameter indicates the time length of the timer.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 15. The following table lists the mapping between the parameter values and actual periods.
Table 1-1 Mapping between the parameter values and periods
2009-11-6
Page 322 of 438
Internal
Default Value
2 (2 seconds)
Setting Tradeoff
The bigger value the parameter is set to, the longer the report period of the candidate frequency searching report is, and the more difficult it is for the BSC to obtain the pilot strength information of the candidate frequency. An excessively big value of the parameter causes failures in triggering the hard handoff timely. The smaller value the parameter is set to, the more frequently the candidate frequency searching report is sent, and the easier it is for the BSC to trigger hard handoffs. If the parameter is set to an excessively small value, there is a huge signaling load and the MS repeatedly performs the inter-frequency search. In this case, the call quality is affected.
Remarks
None.
8.10.11 CFSRCHMODE (Candidate Frequency Search Mode)

Description
This parameter determines whether to select the pilot search mode of the candidate frequency based on the priority and the search window size.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
Table 1-1 Search mode and values
Value NOPRI PRI SERWIN WINPRI
Description No search priority or search window Search priority Search window Search priority or search window
2009-11-6
Page 323 of 438
Internal
Default Value
NOPRI
Setting Tradeoff
This parameter is set according to the actual situations.
Remarks
None.
8.10.12 SIGPLTSRCHTYPE (Single Pilot Search Type)

Description
This parameter specifies the single frequency search type.
Type
Internal algorithm parameter of the carrier level. Ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
Value Range
CYC (periodic search)/SING (single search)
Default Value
SING (single search)
Setting Tradeoff
Remarks
None.
8.10.13 Timer 33 of the RRM (Single Search Interval)

Description
This parameter specifies the time interval of single searches.
2009-11-6
Page 324 of 438
Internal
Type
Internal timer of the BSC level. Ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
MOD TMR LSTTMR;
Value Range
Unit: ms
Default Value
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.

Example 1: When an MS moves from a carrier at the boundary of the Huawei network (frequency 119 in sector 2 of cell 3017) to the network of another vendor, the MS-assisted hard handoff is performed. The configuration script is as follows (not including the command for configuring the external carrier): /*Add the inter-frequency neighboring cells of carrier 119. Note that all neighboring cells must be added.*/ ADD NBRCDMACH: CCDMACH="3017-3017-2-119-0", NBRCDMACHS="7726-27-1-283-0, 7732-43-1-283-0, 7725-26-15-283-0, 7727-29-4-283-0, 7740-61-4-283-0, 7761-273-10-283-0, 7736-55-10-283-0, 7724-23-10-283-0, 7728-31-14-283-0, 7741-63-14-283-0", SFFLAG=NULL, DFFLAG=SINGLE, NBFLAG=NULL; /*Enable the MS-assisted hard handoff function of carrier 119.*/ MOD PHOALG: CN=3017, SCTID=2, CRRID=3, MAHHOSW=ON; /*Set the searching conditions (to be adjusted according to the drive test situation).*/ MOD HHOMA: CN=3017, SCTID=2, CRRID=3, TADDMAHHO=-10, RELTHRS=6, STRTSRCHTHRS=-10, STOPSRCHTHRS=-6, MAHHOTHRS=-16, RXRELTHRS=20, STRTSRCHRTD=8, STOPSRCHRTD=15, STOPSRCHRXTHRS=-120, CONFIRM=Y; /*Set the inter-frequency search mode to single search.*/
2009-11-6
Page 325 of 438
Internal
MOD CFSC: CN=3017, CRRID=3, SIGPLTSRCHTYPE=SING, BATCHMODSIGN="FFFFFFFF", CONFIRM=Y; /*Set the time interval of single searches to 4.96s.*/ MOD TMR: MN=RRM, TMRID=33, TMRV=4960, CONFIRM=Y;
8.11 Pseudo-Pilot Hard Handoff

8.11.1 BEACONSW (Pilot Beacon HHO Switch)
Description
This parameter controls whether to use the pseudo-pilot hard handoff function.
Type
Internal parameter of the BSC of V2R2/V2R3/V3R1C02. Internal algorithm parameter of the carrier level for V3R6 and later versions. If a switch of a leg in the active set is on, the algorithm is enabled. Obtain the handoff parameters by using the first carrier whose switch is set to on in the active set. The first carrier may not be the strongest pilot or the reference pilot. Ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
V2R2/V2R3/V3R1 MOD BSCHO V3R6C01 MOD PHOALG V2R2/V2R3/V3R1 LST BSCHO:; V3R6C01 LST HOINF
Value Range
ON or OFF.
Default Value
OFF
Setting Tradeoff
Pseudo pilot hardware is required when the pseudo pilot is used for inter-frequency hard handoffs. Therefore, the network costs increase. When the pseudo pilot hard handoff is used, the coverage of pseudo pilots must be consistent with that of real pilots. The gain of the pseudo pilot is lower (for example 1 dB) than that of the pilot of the carrier in the same sector. Inter-frequency hard handoffs using pseudo-pilot help pre-IS95A MSs search the inter-frequency signal strengths. It is applicable to the MSs of each revision and the success rate is high.
2009-11-6
Page 326 of 438
Internal
Remarks
The system uses the pseudo-pilot handoff only when a call meets the following conditions: These conditions are as follows:
1. The algorithm switch is enabled. 2. Psedo-pilots exist in the same-frequency neighboring cell of the call. 3. The service type of this call supports hard handoffs, such as SMS and the hard handoffs that are not
supported by Markov calls as specified in the protocols.
8.11.2 HPBFLG (Frequency Hopping and Pseudo Pilot Flag)

Description
This parameter determines whether the MS hands off to a carrier.
Type
Parameter of the BTS level Ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
ADD CBTSSECTORCARRIER
Value Range
NO (traffic carrier), HPB (hand off to the pseudo pilot), or PB (common pseudo pilot).
Default Value
NO (traffic carrier)
Setting Tradeoff
Remarks
None.
8.11.3 IFBCDMACH (Pilot Beacon Flag)

Description
This parameter determines whether the pilot is a pseudo pilot.
Type
Internal
Related Commands
ADD CDMACH MOD CDMACH LST CDMACH
Value Range
YES or NO
Default Value
NO
Setting Tradeoff
Remarks
None.
8.11.4 BTYPE (Pilot Beacon Type)

Description
Pseudo pilot type
Type
Related Commands
ADD CDMACH MOD CDMACH LST CDMACH
Value Range
COM (common pseudo pilot)/TRF (traffic pseudo pilot)
Default Value
COM (common pseudo pilot)
2009-11-6
Page 328 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
Remarks
None.
8.11.5 HHOBPLTEXPSW (Pseudo Pilot Hard Handoff Target Extension Switch)

Description
During a pseudo pilot hard handoff, the parameter specifies the switch for enabling or disabling the pseudo pilot hard handoff target extension function. If the switch is enabled, the system adds the carrier of the hard handoff target frequency in the sector of the source active set to the target active set of the inter-frequency hard handoff.
Type
Related Commands
MOD HHOBPLT LST HOINF: QRYINF=HHOBPLT;
Value Range
YES or NO
Default Value
NO
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
BSC6680 V3R6C08 is added with the pseudo pilot hard handoff target extension function. When the function is enabled, the system performs the algorithm decision based on the pseudo pilot hard handoff procedure, and determines the target frequency and target active set (initial target active set) of the pseudo pilot hard handoff. If the pseudo pilot hard handoff target extension function is enabled for the carrier in the source active set, the system adds the carrier of the pseudo pilot hard handoff target frequency in the sector of the source active set to the target active set (extended target active set) of the pseudo pilot hard handoff. To implement the function, the following principles must be met:
Principle 1: Filter out the pseudo carrier from the target active set.
Huawei Confidential No Spreading Without Permission Page 329 of 438
2009-11-6

Internal
Principle 2: All the legs in the extended target active set belong to one BSC and the number of these legs cannot exceed 6. If the number of initial targets and extended targets is greater than 6, sort and add/delete the targets according to pilot strength.
8.11.6 TADDHHOBPLT (Pilot Beacon HHO Serving Carrier Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the common pseudo pilot. It is used for triggering pseudo-pilot hard handoffs when the strength of the soft handoff target active set (source side integrated Ec/Io) is lower than the value of this parameter and the strength of the target active set for a pseudo-pilot hard handoff is higher than the Pseudo-Pilot Hard Handoff Target Carrier Threshold. Traffic pseudo pilot: triggering pseudo-pilot hard handoffs when the result of the pilot strength of the soft handoff target active set minus the strength of the current traffic pseudo pilot is lower than the value of this parameter and the strength of the traffic pseudo pilot is higher than the Pseudo-Pilot Hard Handoff Target Carrier Threshold.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
63 to 0 (unit: 0.5 dB).
Default Value
22
Setting Tradeoff
If the value of this parameter is too small (for example, smaller than 32), the signal strength of the source cell side is low when the MS performs hard handoffs from the source cell to the target cell, and the hard handoff is triggered late. In such cases, it is difficult for the MS to receive the HDM delivered by the BTS at the source cell side, so the hard handoff may fail. If the value of this parameter is too high (for example, higher than 14), the triggering conditions of hard handoffs can be easily met. In such cases, the hard handoff is triggered depending on the HHO absolute threshold.
Remarks
The triggering conditions of the pseudo pilot hard handoff are described as follows: Suppose the strength of the soft handoff target active set is ShoTargEcIo and the strength of the
Internal
pseudo-pilot hard handoff target active set is HhoTargEcIo. When BSC receives a PSMM or PPSMM, it calculates the strength of the soft handoff target active set and the strength of the pseudo-pilot hard handoff active set. If the results meet either of the following conditions, the pseudo-pilot hard handoff is triggered: { (ShoTargEcIo <= TADDHHOPILOTBEACON) && (HhoTargEcIo >= THHOPILOTBEACONABSTHRESH) } or {(HhoTargEcIo-ShoTargEcIo)>=THHOPILOTBEACONRELTHRESH}
8.11.7 THHOBPLTABSTHRS (Pilot Beacon HHO Target Carrier Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the ordinary pseudo pilot. It is used for triggering pseudo-pilot hard handoffs when the strength of the soft handoff target active set is lower than the pseudo-pilot hard handoff serving carrier threshold and the strength of the target active set for a soft handoff is higher than the value of this parameter Service pseudo pilot: used for triggering pseudo-pilot hard handoffs when the result of the pilot strength of the soft handoff target active set minus the strength of the current service pseudo pilot is lower the pseudo-pilot hard handoff serving carrier threshold and the strength of the service pseudo pilot is higher than the value of this parameter.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
63 to 0 (unit: 0.5 dB).
Default Value
18
Setting Tradeoff
The smaller the value of this parameter (for example, smaller than 28), the lower the signal strength for triggering the pseudo pilot hard handoff in the target cell. In such cases, the pseudo pilot hard handoff can be easily triggered. But if the signals in the target cell are very weak, the MS cannot capture the target cell, and thus the hard handoff fails. The higher the value of this parameter (for example, higher than 10), the higher the pilot strength for triggering the pseudo pilot hard handoff in the target cell. In such cases, it is easier for the MS
2009-11-6
Page 331 of 438
Internal
to capture a channel of the target cell during the pseudo pilot hard handoff, but it is possible that the pseudo pilot hard handoff cannot be easily triggered.
Remarks
For details on the triggering conditions of pseudo pilot hard handoffs, see the description of the T_ADD_HHO_PILOT_BEACON parameter. Generally, the pilot strength of the target cell must be higher than that of the source cell, that is, THHOPILOTBEACONABSTHRESH > TADDHHOPILOTBEACON
8.11.8 THHOBPLTRELTHRS (Pilot Beacon HHO Relative Threshold)

Description
When the pilot strength of the pseudo-pilot hard handoff target active set minus that of the soft handoff target active set is higher than this parameter, the pseudo-pilot hard handoff is triggered. Service pseudo pilot: When the result of the pilot strength of the soft handoff target active set minus the strength of the current service pseudo pilot is higher than the pseudo-pilot hard handoff serving carrier threshold and the strength of the service pseudo pilot is higher than the value of this parameter, the pseudo-pilot hard handoff is triggered.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
63 to 63 (unit: 0.5 dB; indicating 31.5 to 31.5 dB)
Default Value
5
Setting Tradeoff
The larger the value of this parameter is, the stronger the signals in the target cell for hard handoff are, compared with those in the source cell. In this case, the MS can easily capture a forward channel in the target cell. As the signals in the source cell are weak during hard handoffs, it is possible that the MS cannot receive the HDM of the source cell. The smaller the value of this parameter, the easier for hard handoffs to be triggered. In this case, the signals on the forward channels of the source cell side do not deteriorate dramatically, which
2009-11-6
Page 332 of 438
Internal
is favorable for the MS to receive the HDM of the original cell, but the MS may not successfully capture a forward channel of the source cell.
Remarks
When a call relates to hard handoffs, the system instructs the MS to periodically report pilot strength measurement messages (PSMMs). Thus, the pilot strength of the source cell active set is closely traced, and hard handoffs can be triggered in time. For details, see the PMROPARA.

[Example 2] Carrier A whose cell ID, sector ID, and frequency point are 300, 2, and 283 respectively. Carrier B whose cell ID, sector ID, and frequency point are 301, 3, and 160 respectively. Configure pseudo pilot C for carrier B, and the cell ID, sector ID, and frequency point of pseudo pilot C are 301, 3, and 283 respectively. Configure pseudo-pilot hard handoffs between carries A and B. The script is as follows: /*Configure pseudo-pilot C.*/ ADD CDMACH: CN=301, SCTID=3, CRRIDLST="0", ARFCNLST="283", TYP=CDMA2000, IFBCDMACH=YES, CCLMFLG=NO, ECCLMFLG=NO; /*Configure the target pilot of pseudo-pilot C as carrier B.*/ ADD BCDMACHTRG: CCDMACH="301-301-3-283", NBRCDMACHS="301-301-3-160"; /*Turn on the pseudo-pilot hard handoff switch. Note that the switch should be turned on at the source side. */ MOD PHOALG: CN=300, SCTID=2, CRRID=0, BEACONSW=ON; /*Configure the intra-frequency neighboring relationship between the real pilot and the pseudo pilot.*/ ADD NBRCDMACH: CCDMACH="300-300-2-283", NBRCDMACHS="301-301-3-283", SFFLAG=SINGLE, DFFLAG=NULL, NBFLAG=SINGLE; Note: The target of the pseudo-pilot hard handoff must be only one, that is, the real pilot in the same sector as the pseudo pilot. Additional targets affect the success rate of pseudo-pilot hard handoffs.
In the preceding figure, A, B, C, E, and F are real carriers, and D is a pseudo pilot. When the MS hands off from carrier 2 to carrier 44 in sector 12, idle/service handoffs are guided through the pseudo pilot. To configure the pseudo pilot, perform the following operations: /*Turn on the pseudo-pilot handoff switch.*/ MOD PHOALG: CN=12, SCTID=0, CRRID=2, BEACONSW=ON;
Internal
/*Add the pseudo pilot to the BSC.*/ ADD CDMACH: CN=44, SCTID=0, CRRIDLST="2", BNDCLS=BC800, ARFCNLST="160", TYP=CDMA2000, IFBCDMACH=YES, BTYPE=COM, CCLMFLG=NO, ECCLMFLG=NO, IFTCDMACH=NO, AUTODWNCDMACH=NO; /*Add the pseudo pilot to the BSC. The related command is run at the B side.*/ ADD CBTSSECTORCARRIER: BTSID=1, LOCALCELLID=44, LOCALSECTORID=0, CRRID=2, TRMID=0, CPLID=0, HPBFLG=PB; /*Configure the information of the synchronization channel of the pseudo pilot.*/ MOD SCHM: SUBITEM=CRR_CLASS, CN=44, SCTID=0, CRRID=2, CDMABSN=283, EXTCDMABSN=283; /*Add target carriers for pseudo-pilot hard handoffs. In the case of multiple target carriers, the target carriers earlier configured have a higher priority than those later configured.*/ ADD BCDMACHTRG: CCDMACH="44-44-0-160-0", NBRCDMACHS="44-44-0-283-0"; ADD BCDMACHTRG: CCDMACH="44-44-0-160-0", NBRCDMACHS="44-44-0-201-0"; /*Configure the intra-frequency neighboring relationship between the real carrier and the pseudo pilot. Note that the priority of the pseudo pilot is configured as that of a real carrier. Do not set the priority of the pseudo pilot to the lowest priority.*/ ADD NBRCDMACH: CCDMACH="12-12-0-160-0", NBRCDMACHS="44-44-0-160-0", SFFLAG=SINGLE, DFFLAG=NULL, NBFLAG=SINGLE; /*Change the gain of the pseudo pilot. In general, its gain is 1.5 dB to 4 dB lower than the gain of the corresponding real carrier.*/ MOD PLTCH: CN=1, SCTID=1, PLTCHGAIN=-38; /*Change the value of the pseudo-pilot hard handoff parameter. If the parameter is set to the default value, It is not necessary to run this command.*/ MOD HHOBPLT: CN=12, SCTID=0, CRRID=2; If the pseudo-pilot hard handoff occurs between BSCs, the following configuration should be performed at the source side: /*Turn on the pseudo-pilot handoff switch.*/ /*Add external pseudo pilots.*/ /*Set the targets of added external pseudo pilots to external carriers.*/ /*Add target carriers for pseudo-pilot handoffs.*/ /*Configure the intra-frequency neighboring relationship.*/ /*Change the value of the pseudo-pilot hard handoff parameter.*/ Note: Configuring the target carrier for the pseudo pilot must be performed by running the ADD BCDMACHTRG command so that the PN of the pseudo pilot is in the neighbor cell list. Otherwise, the PN is not in the neighbor cell list. [Example 2] Carrier A whose cell ID, sector ID, and frequency point are 300, 2, and 283 respectively. Carrier B whose cell ID, sector ID, and frequency point are 301, 3, and 160 respectively. Configure pseudo pilot C for carrier B, and the cell ID, sector ID, and frequency point of pseudo pilot C are 301, 3, and 283 respectively. Configure pseudo-pilot hard handoffs between carries A and B. The script is as follows:
2009-11-6
Page 334 of 438
Internal
/*Configure pseudo-pilot C.*/ ADD CDMACH: CN=301, SCTID=3, CRRIDLST="0", ARFCNLST="283", TYP=CDMA2000, IFBCDMACH=YES, CCLMFLG=NO, ECCLMFLG=NO; /*Configure the target pilot of pseudo-pilot C as carrier B.*/ ADD BCDMACHTRG: CCDMACH="301-301-3-283", NBRCDMACHS="301-301-3-160"; /*Turn on the pseudo-pilot hard handoff switch. Note that the switch should be turned on at the source side. */ MOD PHOALG: CN=300, SCTID=2, CRRID=0, BEACONSW=ON; /*Configure the intra-frequency neighboring relationship between the real pilot and the pseudo pilot.*/ ADD NBRCDMACH: CCDMACH="300-300-2-283", NBRCDMACHS="301-301-3-283", SFFLAG=SINGLE, DFFLAG=NULL, NBFLAG=SINGLE; Note: The target of the pseudo-pilot hard handoff must be only one, that is, the real pilot in the same sector as the pseudo pilot. Additional targets affect the success rate of pseudo-pilot hard handoffs.
8.12 Handdown Hard Handoff

8.12.1 HDHHOSW (Handdown HHO Switch)
Description
This parameter determines whether calls on a carrier can perform handdown hard handoffs. If the switch of the strongest pilot in the active set is ON, the algorithm is enabled. The decision parameter of the strongest pilot in the active set serves as the decision threshold of the hard handoff.
Type
Related Commands
MOD PHOALG LST HOINF: QRYINF=PHOALG;
Value Range
ON or OFF.
Default Value
OFF
2009-11-6
Page 335 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
Set according to actual situations. If the source cell and the target cell have same frequency points and the frequency points in the source cell are more abundant than those in the target cell, calls originated on the abundant frequency points in the source cell can be hard-handed off to the common frequency points of the source cell and the target cell through handdown handoffs if the calls are far away from the source cell.
Remarks
The system uses the handdown hard handoff only when a call meets the following conditions:
1. The strongest pilots in the active set of the call are allowed to perform handdown hard handoffs. 2. This call cannot perform mobile-assisted hard handoffs. 3. The service type of this call supports hard handoffs, such as SMS and the hard handoffs that are not
supported by Markov calls as specified in the protocols.

For CDMA2000 1X calls, if the mobile-assisted hard handoff algorithm switch is turned on and inter-frequency neighboring cells exist, the mobile-assisted hard handoff algorithm is preferred, and handdown and direct handoffs are forbidden.
Before turning on the handdown hard handoff switch, configure the target carriers of handdown hard handoffs.
8.12.2 ABSTHRS (Handdown HHO EC/IO Intensity Absolute Threshold)

Description
When the pilot strength of the soft handoff target active set is lower than (integrated Ec/Io) the value of this parameter and the minimum RTD of the pilot in the current active set is higher than the handdown hard handoff maximum loop delay threshold, the remote handdown hard handoff is triggered.
Type
Related Commands
MOD HNDDWN LST HOINF: QRYINF=HNDDWN;
Value Range
63 to 0 (unit: 0.5 dB).
Default Value
-16
2009-11-6
Page 336 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
The smaller the value of this parameter (for example, smaller than 28), the lower the actual corresponding threshold. In such cases, the handdown hard handoff is triggered late. For a dual-carrier network, the coverage area of upper layer cells is higher, therefore a heavy traffic volume can be absorbed. If the handdown hard handoff is not triggered in time, however, the signals on the source channel link may fade dramatically, and the MS cannot receive the HDM sent on the source channel. Moreover, the signal quality of lower layer target cells for handdown hard handoff cannot be guaranteed, and it is difficult for the MS to access the target cell. However, this problem can be solved to some extent through the multi-target handdown hard handoff technology. The higher the value of this parameter (for example, higher than -10), the higher the actual corresponding physical threshold. In such cases, the handdown hard handoff is triggered early, and the signal quality of the lower layer target cell for the handdown hard handoff is good, and this assists the MS in accessing the target cell. For a dual-carrier network, however, the coverage area of upper layer cells is small, therefore the upper layer cells cannot absorb traffic effectively.
Remarks
The condition of triggering the remote handdown hard handoff is as follows: Set the pilot strength of the soft handoff target active set to ShoTargEcIo. Set the minimum RTD of the current active set to AsMinRtd. When the BSC receives a PSMM or PPSMM, the handdown hard handoff is triggered if the condition {(ShoTargEcIo ABSTHRS) && (AsMinRtd MAXRTD)} is met. When a call has hard handoff relations, the system instructs the MS to report PSMMs periodically so that the pilot strength of the source cell active set is closely tracked and hard handoffs are triggered in time.
8.12.3 MAXRTD (Handdown HHO Max. Loop Delay Threshold)

Description
When the pilot strength of the soft handoff target active set is lower than the handdown hard handoff EC/IO intensity absolute threshold and the minimum RTD of the pilot in the current active set is higher than the value of this parameter, the remote handdown hard handoff is triggered. The round trip delay (RTD) roughly reflects the distance between the BTS and the MS. Due to the multi-path effect and soft handoffs, the calculation of the RTD is sometimes not accurate. Each chip is about 244 m [800.52 ft].
Type
BSC internal parameter. Parameter for ordinary users.
Related Commands
2009-11-6
Page 337 of 438
Internal
Value Range
Default Value
15
Setting Tradeoff
The higher the value of this parameter, the longer the distance between the hard handoff band and the source cell. In such cases, the hard handoff is triggered late, and upper layer cells in the dual-carrier network can absorb more traffic. However, the signal quality in the target cell cannot be fully guaranteed. The smaller the value of this parameter, the shorter the distance between the hard handoff band and the source cell, and the earlier the MS performs the hard handoff. In such cases, the signal quality of the target cell is good, assisting the MS in accessing the target cell. However, the upper layer cells may not absorb traffic, so the traffic load of lower layer cells is heavy.
Remarks
The BTS devices are synchronized (Tsys) through the GPS clock. The MS uses the first available multi-path (from the demodulator) in the active set as the time reference (Tsys + Tf). Tf refers to one-way delay. When the BTS receives signals from the MS again, the Tr is delayed again. Therefore, the total delay is Tf + Tr. The BTS measures the total delay and uses it as the RTD value. The Tf is measured by the MS, and calculated through the PN Phase reported by the PSMM. The Tf of the reference pilot is measured by the BTS during the first access. Later, if the MS movement exceeds the threshold, the BTS reports the latest value of the Tr and uses it as the one way delay. After the call is set up, the BTS repeatedly checks the broadcast delay with the MS. If the change of the delay exceeds 17/8 chip, the BTS sends the BSC the Abis broadcast delay report with the RTD value between the BTS and the MS. The internal processing delay of the BTS is deducted. The BSC saves the RTD value. The following figure shows the RTD measurement by the BTS.
2009-11-6
Page 338 of 438

Figure 1-1 RTD measurement by the BTS
Internal
When receiving the PSMM from the MS, the BTS calculates OneWayDelay. For the reference pilot, the RTD is set to RefDelay and remains unchanged. For another pilot, when the phase of reporting the PSMM is set to PnPhase_i and the ideal PN offset corresponding to the pilot is PnOffset_i, the RTD value is calculated again according to the following formula: Rtd_i = RefDelay + (PnPhase_i 64 x PnOffset_i)
8.12.4 NEARABSTHRS (Handdown HHO EC/IO Intensity Anomalistic Handoff Absolute Threshold)
Description
This parameter specifies the EC/IO intensity absolute threshold of triggering local handdown hard handoffs. When the pilot strength of the soft handoff target active set is higher than the value of this parameter and the minimum RTD of the pilot in the current active set is lower than the handdown local hard handoff minimum loop delay threshold, the local handdown hard handoff is triggered.
Type
Related Commands
2009-11-6
Page 339 of 438
Internal
Value Range
63 to 0 (unit: 0.5 dB)
Default Value
0
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
If the local handdown hard handoff is enabled for a carrier, the remote handdown hard hand should be disabled: Set the handdown hard handoff EC/IO intensity absolute threshold to 63 and set the handdown hard handoff maximum loop delay threshold to 200.
8.12.5 MINRTD (Handdown HHO Anomalistic Handoff Min. Loop Delay Threshold)
Description
This parameter specifies the minimum loop delay threshold for triggering local handdown hard handoffs. The local handdown hard handoff is triggered when the following two conditions are met: 1. The pilot strength of the target active set for a soft handoff is above the handdown HHO EC/IO intensity anomalistic handoff absolute threshold. 2. The minimum RTD of the pilot in the active set is below the value of this parameter.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
Default Value
0
Setting Tradeoff
None.
2009-11-6
Page 340 of 438
Internal
Remarks
If the local handdown hard handoff is enabled for a carrier, the remote handdown hard hand should be disabled: Set the handdown hard handoff EC/IO intensity absolute threshold to 63 and set the handdown hard handoff maximum loop delay threshold to 200.

Example 1: The cell ID, sector ID, and frequency point of carrier A and carrier B are (300-2-283) and (301-3-160) respectively. Carrier C (300-2-160) is in the same sector with carrier A and shares the same frequency point with carrier B. To configure the Handdown hard handoff from carrier A to carrier C and the soft handoff from carrier C to carrier B, run the following scripts: /*Switch on the Handdown algorithm switch*/ MOD PHOALG: CN=300, SCTID=2, CRRID=0, HDHHOSW =ON; /*Configure Handdown hard handoff parameters, and the handdown target of carrier A is carrier C*/ ADD HNDDWNTRG: CCDMACH="300-300-2-283", NBRCDMACHS="300-300-2-160"; /*Set carrier B to be adjacent to carrier C*/ ADD NBRCDMACH: CCDMACH = "300-2-160", NBRCDMACHS = "301-3-160", SFFLAG = SINGLE, DFFLAG = SINGLE, NBFLAG = SINGLE; /*Configure the triggering threshold of Handdown remote hard handoff (based on drive test)*/ MOD HNDDWN: CN = 300, SCTID = 2, CRRID = 0, ABSTHRS = -16, MAXRTD = 10;
8.13 Intra-Frequency Hard Handoff

8.13.1 SFHHOSW (Same-Frequency HHO Switch)
Description
This parameter determines whether calls under a carrier can perform intra-frequency hard handoffs. If a switch of a leg in the active set is on, the algorithm is enabled. The first carrier whose switch is on in the active set is used to obtain handoff parameters. The first carrier may not be the strongest pilot or the reference pilot.
Type
Related Commands
MOD PHOALG LST HOINF: QRYINF = PHOALG
2009-11-6
Page 341 of 438
Internal
Value Range
ON or OFF.
Default Value
OFF.
Setting Tradeoff
The value of this parameter is set based on the actual situations. If the current carrier has intra-frequency neighboring cells that are under another BSC and no A3/A7 interfaces exist between the carrier and the BSC, the switch of this algorithm must be turned on if intra-frequency hard handoffs are required.
Remarks
The system uses intra-frequency hard handoffs only when a call meets the following conditions: The active set where the call originates has at least one carrier of the current BSC, and the intra-frequency hard handoff algorithm switch of the carrier is turned on. External carriers used by the MS to perform intra-frequency hard handoffs are configured in the intra-frequency neighboring cell of the MS. The service type of this call supports hard handoffs, such as SMS and the hard handoffs that are not supported by Markov calls as specified in the protocols.
8.13.2 TADDHHOSF (Same-Frequency HHO Serving Carrier Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the intra-frequency hard handoff serving carrier threshold. Intra-frequency hard handoffs are triggered if one of the following two requirements is met: The strength (integrated Ec/Io) of the soft handoff target active set is not higher than the value of this parameter, and the strength of the intra-frequency hard handoff target active set is not lower than the value of this parameter. In addition, the minimum RTD of the pilots in the current active set is not lower than THHOSFRTD. The difference between the integrated strength of the pilots in the intra-frequency hard handoff target active set and the integrated strength of the pilots in the soft handoff target active set is not lower than THHOSFRELTHRS, and the minimum RTD of the pilots in the current active set is not lower than THHOSFRTD.
Type
2009-11-6
Page 342 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
MOD HHOSF LST HOINF: QRYINF=HHOSF
Value Range
63 to 0 (unit: 0.5 dB).
Default Value
-22.
Setting Tradeoff
The smaller the value of this parameter (for example, smaller than -32), the poorer is the signal strength of the source cell side is when the MS performs hard handoffs from the source cell to the target cell, and the later the intra-frequency hard handoff is triggered. Because heavy intra-frequency interference exists in the hard handoff band, if the signal of the source cell is poor, the MS may not receive the handoff direction message (HDM) sent by the BTS in the source cell. In such cases, the hard handoff fails. If the value of this parameter is too large (for example, lager than -14), the triggering conditions of intra-frequency hard handoffs can be easily met. In this case, hard handoffs are triggered depending on the intra-frequency hard handoff absolute threshold.
Remarks
None.
8.13.3 THHOSFABSTHRS (Same-Frequency HHO Target Carrier Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the intra-frequency hard handoff absolute threshold of target carriers.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
63 to 0 (unit: 0.5 dB).
2009-11-6
Page 343 of 438
Internal
Default Value
-18.
Setting Tradeoff
The smaller the value of this parameter (for example, smaller than 28), the lower is the signal strength for triggering the intra-frequency hard handoff in the target cell. In this case, the intra-frequency hard handoff can be easily triggered. But if the signals in the target cell are very poor, the MS cannot capture the target cell, and thus the hard handoff fails. The larger the value of this parameter (for example, larger than 10), the higher is the signal strength for triggering the intra-frequency hard handoff in the target cell. In this case, the MS can easily capture a channel of the target cell during the intra-frequency hard handoff, but the intra-frequency hard handoff may not be easily triggered.
Remarks
For details on the triggering conditions of intra-frequency hard handoffs, see the description of TADDHHOSF. Generally, the signal strength of the target cell must be higher than that of the source cell, that is, THHOSFABSTHS > TADDHHOSF.
8.13.4 THHOSFRELTHRS (Same-Frequency HHO Relative Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the intra-frequency hard handoff relative threshold. If the strength of the intra-frequency hard handoff target active set minus the strength of the soft handoff target active set is higher than the value of this parameter, and the minimum RTD of the pilots in the current active set is not lower than THHOSFRTD, intra-frequency hard handoffs can be triggered.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 63 (unit: 0.5 dB; indicating 0 to 31.5 dB).
Default Value
5.
2009-11-6
Page 344 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
The larger the value of this parameter, the stronger are the signals in the target cell for hard handoff, compared with those in the source cell. In this case, the MS can easily capture a forward channel in the target cell. Because the signals in the source cell are poor during hard handoffs, the MS may not be able to receive the HDM of the source cell. The smaller the value of this parameter, the easier are hard handoffs to be triggered. In this case, the signals on the forward channels of the source cell side do not deteriorate dramatically, which helps the MS to receive the HDM of the original cell, but the MS may not successfully capture a forward channel of the source cell.
Remarks
For details on the triggering conditions of intra-frequency hard handoffs, see the description of TADDHHOSF. When a call is related to hard handoffs, the system orders the MS to periodically report pilot strength measurement messages (PSMMs). Thus, the pilot strength of the source cell active set is closely traced, and hard handoffs can be triggered in time. If the value of THHOSFRELTHRS is equal to or lower than that of TCOMP, the signal strength of the hard handoff target pilot is higher than the TCOMP of the active set, the MS automatically reports a PSMM to trigger the intra-frequency hard handoff in time. In this case, the system does not need the mechanism that is used to periodically report the pilot strength.
8.13.5 THHOSFRTD (Same-frequency HHO Max. Loop Delay Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the maximum round trip delay threshold for intra-frequency hard handoffs.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 65535 (unit: chip).
Default Value
0.
2009-11-6
Page 345 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
The larger the value of this parameter, the later are the intra-frequency hard handoffs to be triggered.
Remarks
For details on the triggering conditions of intra-frequency hard handoffs, see the description of THHOSFABSTHRS.

The current BSC has carrier A, whose cell ID, sector ID, and frequency point are 300, 2, and 283, respectively. Another BSC has carrier B, whose cell ID, sector ID, and frequency point are 301, 3, and 283, respectively. To configure intra-frequency hard handoffs between carrier A and carrier B, run the following scripts (excluding the scripts configured on the external carrier): /*Carrier A and carrier B are with the same frequency and adjacent to each other*/ ADD NBRCDMACH: CENFRE = "300-2-283", NBRPILOT = "301-3-283"; /*Enable the intra-frequency hard handoff of the source side*/ MOD PHOALG: CN = 300, SCTID = 2, CRRID = 0, SFHHOSW = ON; /*Use the default triggering threshold, and do not need to run the MOD HHOSF command to the parameters*/
8.14 Load Balancing Hard Handoff

8.14.1 OLBHHOFLTHRESH (Outgoing Load Balance HHO Forward Load Threshold)
Description
This parameter specifies the outgoing load balancing HHO forward load threshold. A carrier is overloaded if one of the following two conditions is met:
Absolute condition: The forward load of the carrier is not lower than OLBHHOFLTHRESH, and the number of reverse equivalent subscribers is not lower than OLBHHOUNTHRESH. Relative condition: The difference between the forward load of the source carrier and the forward load of the load balancing hard handoff target carrier that has the least forward load is not lower than LBHHOFLRTHRESH, and the difference between the number of reverse equivalent subscribers of the source carrier and the number of reverse equivalent subscribers of the load balancing hard handoff target carrier that has the least reverse equivalent subscribers is not lower than LBHHOUNRTHRESH.
If the source carrier is overloaded and there is one target carrier that is not overloaded, the load balancing hard handoff is triggered.
2009-11-6
Page 346 of 438
Internal
Type
Related Commands
MOD HHOLOAD LST HOINF: QRYINF=HHOLOAD
Value Range
0 to 1000 (unit: %).
Default Value
100.
Setting Tradeoff
Related parameters must be set according to the load information of the source carrier and the target carrier.
Remarks
None.
8.14.2 ILBHHOFLTHRESH (Incoming Load Balance HHO Forward Load Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the incoming load balancing HHO forward load threshold. If the forward load of a carrier is not higher than ILBHHOFLTHRESH and the number of reverse equivalent subscribers is not higher than ILBHHOUNTHRESH, the carrier is not overloaded. If the source carrier is overloaded and there is one target carrier that is not overloaded, the load balancing hard handoff is triggered.
Type
Related Commands
MOD HHOLOAD LST HOINF: QRYINF = HHOLOAD
2009-11-6
Page 347 of 438
Internal
Value Range
0 to 1000 (unit: %).
Default Value
80.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
8.14.3 LBHHOFLRTHRESH (Load Balance HHO Forward Load Relative Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the forward load relative threshold of load balancing hard handoff.
Type
Related Commands
MOD HHOLOAD LST HOINF: QRYINF = HHOLOAD
Value Range
0 to 1000 (unit: %).
Default Value
40.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
2009-11-6
Page 348 of 438
Internal
8.14.4 OLBHHOUNTHRESH (Outgoing Load Balance HHO User Number Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the subscriber number outgoing threshold of load balancing hard handoff.
Type
Related Commands
MOD HHOLOAD LST HOINF: QRYINF= HHOLOAD
Value Range
0 to 1000 (unit: 0.1).
Default Value
300.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
8.14.5 ILBHHOUNTHRESH (Incoming Load Balance HHO User Number Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the subscriber number incoming threshold of load balancing hard handoff.
Type
2009-11-6
Page 349 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 1000 (unit: 0.1).
Default Value
240.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
8.14.6 LBHHOUNRTHRESH (Load Balance HHO User Number Relative Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the subscriber number relative threshold of load balancing hard handoff.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 1000 (unit: 0.1).
Default Value
120.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
2009-11-6
Page 350 of 438
Internal
Remarks
None.
8.15 Hard Handoff Based on Link Quality

Hard handoff based on link quality: Whether hard handoff is required is determined based on the forward or reverse radio link conditions. This hard handoff algorithm is available only for CDMA2000 1X. The algorithm is a supplementary for the hard handoff algorithms in CDMA2000 1X. This algorithm is only a triggering algorithm, and it can select a suitable hard handoff opportunity. The target of this hard handoff algorithm needs to be configured. The hard handoff algorithm based on link quality and the direct hard handoff algorithm share the same target carriers.
8.15.1 THHOLQABSTHRESH (EcIo Trigger Threshold of Link Quality HHO)

Description
This parameter specifies the Ec/Io trigger threshold of link quality HHO. When the serving pilot strength (integrated Ec/Io) reported by the MS is lower than the value of this parameter and the forward PER is higher than THHOLQFWDFERTHRESH, the handoff to the target carrier is triggered.
Type
Related Commands
MOD HHOLQ LST HOINF: QRYINF = HHOLQ
Value Range
-63 to 0 (unit: 0.5 dB).
Default Value
-24.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
2009-11-6
Page 351 of 438
Internal
Remarks
None.
8.15.2 THHOLQFWDFERTHRESH (Forward FER Trigger Threshold of Link Quality HHO)

Description
This parameter specifies the forward FER trigger threshold of link quality HHO. When the serving pilot strength (integrated Ec/Io) reported by the MS is lower than THHOLQABSTHRESH and the forward PER is higher than the value of this parameter, the handoff to the target carrier is triggered.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 31 (unit: %).
Default Value
10.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
8.15.3 THHOLQREVFERTHRESH (Reverse FER Trigger Threshold of Link Quality HHO)

Description
This parameter specifies the reverse FER trigger threshold of link quality HHO. When the serving pilot strength reported by the MS is lower than THHOLQABSTHRESH and the reverse integrated PER is higher than the value of this parameter, the handoff to the target carrier is triggered.
2009-11-6
Page 352 of 438
Internal
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 31 (unit: %).
Default Value
10.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
8.16 Coverage of Ultra-Remote Cells

8.16.1 NSRCHWINOFFSETINC (NeighborSearchWindowOffsetIncluded)
Description
This parameter determines whether the search window offset of the neighbor set leg is valid.
Type
Related Commands
MOD SFNBRPARA (intra-frequency)/MOD DFNBRPARA (inter-frequency) LST SFNBRPARA (intra-frequency)/LST DFNBRPARA (inter-frequency)
2009-11-6
Page 353 of 438
Internal
Value Range
Included/Not included.
Default Value
Not included.
Setting Tradeoff
If this parameter is set to Not included, the search window offset of the neighbor set is 0 by default.
Remarks
None.
8.16.2 NSRCHWINOFFSET (NeighborSearchWindowOffset)

Description
This parameter specifies the search window offset of the neighbor set. The value of this parameter plus the size of the search window is the range of the distance to the reference pilot where the MS can search.
Type
Related Commands
MOD SFNBRPARA (intra-frequency)/MOD DFNBRPARA (inter-frequency) LST SFNBRPARA (intra-frequency)/LST DFNBRPARA (inter-frequency)
Value Range
OFFSET0, OFFSET1, OFFSET2, OFFSET3, OFFSET4, OFFSET5, or OFFSET6. Table 1-1 lists the actual offset values corresponding to the values of this parameter.
Table 1-1 Offset values corresponding to the offset indexes
Offset Index OFFSET0 OFFSET1 OFFSET2 OFFSET3 OFFSET4
Offset ( PN chips) 0 0.5*Search Window 1*Search Window 1.5*Search Window -0.5*Search Window
2009-11-6
Page 354 of 438
Internal
OFFSET5 OFFSET6
-1*Search Window -1.5*Search Window
Default Value
OFFSET0.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None. Parameters Related to Universal Neighboring Cell List Messages BandClass 5 uses the GNLM instead of the NLM. In the versions later than R002B03, you can make dynamic changes in the AirBridge so that the system sends the GNLM.
8.16.3 SRCHMD (Search Mode)

Description
This parameter specifies the search mode. The following table lists the values of this parameter. Value (bin) 00 01 10 11 Description No search priority or search window Search priority Search window Search priority or search window
Type
Air interface parameter (universal neighboring cell list message) Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
MOD GNLM LST SYSMSGPARA: CCMINF=GNLM
2009-11-6
Page 355 of 438
Internal
Value Range
NOPRI (no search priority or search window). PRI (search priority). SERWIN (search window). WINPRI (search priority or search window).
Default Value
PRI.
Setting Tradeoff
This parameter is set based on the actual situations.
Remarks
None.
8.16.4 NBRCFGPNINCL (Neighbor Configuration and Pseudo Noise Code Offset Included)
Description
This parameter determines whether neighboring cell configuration and PN offset are included.
Type
Air interface parameter (universal neighboring cell list message) Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
MOD GNLM LST SYSMSGPARA: CCMINF=GNLM
Value Range
YES (included)/NO (not included).
Recommended Value
YES.
Setting Tradeoff
If neighboring cell configuration and PN offset are included, the BTS sets this parameter to YES. If not, the BTS sets this parameter to NO.
2009-11-6
Page 356 of 438
Internal
Remarks
None.
8.16.5 FRQFLDINCL (Frequency Fields Included)

Description
This parameter determines whether frequency fields are included.
Type
Air interface parameter (universal neighboring cell list message)
Related Commands
MOD GNLM LST SYSMSGPARA: CCMINF = GNLM
Value Range
YES/NO.
Default Value
YES.
Setting Tradeoff
If frequency fields are included, the BTS sets this parameter to YES. If not, the BTS sets this parameter to NO.
Remarks
None.
8.16.6 USETM (Use Timing Indicator)

Description
This parameter determines whether timing information is used.
Type
Air interface parameter (universal neighboring cell list message). Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
MOD GNLM
2009-11-6
Page 357 of 438
Internal
LST SYSMSGPARA: CCMINF = GNLM
Value Range
YES, or NO.
Default Value
NO.
Setting Tradeoff
If the timing information of the current BTS is used for the neighboring BTS, the current BTS sets this parameter to YES. If not, the current BTS sets this parameter to NO.
Remarks
None.
8.16.7 SRCHOFS (Neighbor PICH Search Window Size Offset Included)

Description
This parameter specifies the neighbor PICH search window size offset included. If SRCH_OFFSET_NGHBR is included in the related records, the BTS sets this parameter to 1. Otherwise, the BTS sets this parameter to 0.
Type
Air interface parameter (universal neighboring cell list message).
Related Commands
MOD GNLM LST SYSMSGPARA: CCMINF = GNLM
Value Range
YES (included)/NO (not included).
Default Value
NO.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
2009-11-6
Page 358 of 438
Internal
Remarks
None.
8.17 Hopping Pseudo Pilot (Newly Added)

This section describes only the private parameters of the HPB. For the parameters related to pseudo pilot hard handoff configuration, see the section on pseudo pilot hard handoff.
8.17.1 HPBFLG (Frequency Hopping and Pseudo Pilot Flag)

Description
This parameter identifies whether the current carrier is a hopping pseudo pilot.
Type
Related Commands
ADD CBTSSECTORCARRIER DSP CBTSCFG
Value Range
NO (common carrier), HPB (Hopping pseudo pilot), or PB (static pseudo pilot).
Default Value
This parameter has no default value. The value of this parameter is set based on the actual situations.
Setting Tradeoff
Remarks
None.
8.17.2 TXONDUR (HPB Transmission Sending Time)

Description
This parameter specifies the HPB transmit duration. As shown in the following figure, in each hopping period (TX_PERIOD), the duration at which the frequency signal can be received is
2009-11-6
Page 359 of 438
Internal
TX_ONDUR x 80 ms. When hopping occurs between two frequencies, the duration at which the frequency signal cannot be received is (TX_ONDUR + 2*TX_OFFDUR) x 80 ms.
TX_PERIOD
F1
TX_ONDUR TX_OFFDUR
F2
TX_ONDUR TX_OFFDUR
F1......
Type
Related Commands
SET CBTSHPBPARA DSP CBTSCFG: CFGID = CBTSHPBPARA
Value Range
3 to 255 (unit: 80 ms).
Default Value
3.
Setting Tradeoff
In service state, the transmit duration must be larger than the neighboring cell search period, but cannot be too large. Otherwise, it affects the hard handoff being performed on time. The signal quality cannot immediately recover to the normal state when the HPB changes. The transmit duration can be set to the value with a certain margin (such as 20 ms) based on the neighboring cell search period. If the transmit duration is lower than the neighboring cell search period, certain PNs of the neighboring cell cannot be searched out, and thus the PNs fall into TX_OFFDUR. In this case, if the neighboring cell search period is an integral multiple of TX_ONDUR + TX_OFFDUR, certain PNs can never be searched out. If the transmit duration is too large, the HPB function cannot timely guide the MSs of other frequencies to search the related HPBs. Thus, hard handoff timeliness is affected, and call drop probability increases. In idle state, considering the search behavior of MSs, you cannot set TX_ONDUR to an integral multiple of the sleep period (T = 1.28*2^slotcycleindex) or set the sleep period to an integral multiple of TX_PERIOD.
Remarks
The neighboring cell search period relates to the number of active sets, number of neighboring cells, and terminal search rate. Based on the gear model, the transmit duration of the HPB signal must be higher than (N + 1) x (A + 1) x T if the time for searching each PN is T ms.
2009-11-6
Page 360 of 438
Internal
Here, "A" indicates the number of active sets, and the "N" indicates the number of neighbor sets. Generally, the value of the "T" is about 10 ms.
8.17.3 TXOFFDUR (HPB Transmission Closing Time)

Description
This parameter specifies the HPB transmit shutdown duration. For details, see TXONDUR.
Type
Related Commands
SET CBTSHPBPARA DSP CBTSCFG: CFGID = CBTSHPBPARA
Value Range
1 to 255 (unit: 80 ms).
Default Value
1.
Setting Tradeoff
Currently, the higher the change interval (TX_OFFDUR) between two frequencies is, the more the hard handoff timeliness is affected. It is recommended that you set this parameter to 1, that is, 80 ms.
Remarks
None.
8.18 Parameters for Handoff Message Sending Policies (Newly Added)

8.18.1 CHANTYPE (Channel Type)
Description
This parameter specifies the channel type. Um interfaces have two channel types, that is, common channels and dedicated channels.
2009-11-6
Page 361 of 438
Internal
Type
Related Commands
MOD LACCTRL LST LACCTRL
Value Range
CSCH (F-CSCH): common channel. DSCH (F-DSCH): dedicated channel.
Default Value
Setting Tradeoff
Remarks
To modify common channel messages on the LAC layer, you should select CSCH-0 (F-CSCH); to modify dedicated channel messages on the LAC layer, you should select DSCH-0 (F-DSCH).
8.18.2 MSGID1 (Message Name)

Description
This parameter specifies the message names when dedicated channel messages on the LAC layer are modified.
Type
Related Commands
2009-11-6
Page 362 of 438
Internal
Value Range
Name of the Message over F-DSCH Alert With Information Message (AWIM) Assured Bs Ack Order (ABSACK) Authentication Challenge Message (AUCM) Candidate Frequency Search Control Message (CFSCNM) Candidate Frequency Search Request Message (CFSRQM) Data Burst Message (DBM) Extended Flash With Information Message (EFWIM) Extended Handoff Direction Message (EHDM) Extended Neighbor List Update Message (ENLUM) Extended Supplemental Channel Assignment Message (ESCAM) Flash With Information Message (FWIM) General Handoff Direction Message (GHDM) In-Traffic System Parameters Message (ITSPM) Neighbor List Update Message (NLUM) Order Message (ORDRM) Power Control Message (PCNM) Power Control Parameters Message (PCNPM) Send Burst DTMF Message (BDTMFM) Service Connect Message (SCM) Service Option Control Message (SOCM) Service Request Message (SRQM) Service Response Message (SRPM) SSD Update Message (SSDUM) Status Request Message (STRQM) Message ID 0 x 03 0 x FE 0 x 02 0 x 1C 0 x 1B 0 x 04 0 x 2A 0 x 11 0 x 1A 0 x 23 0 x 0E 0 x 1F 0 x 07 0 x 08 0 x 01 0 x 19 0 x 0A 0 x 09 0x14 0 x 15 0 x 12 0 x 13 0 x 0D 0 x 10 Remarks None. Must be set to Acknowledged. None. None. None. Must be set to Acknowledged. Must be set to Acknowledged. None. None. None. Must be set to Acknowledged. None. None. None. None. None. None. None. None. Must be set to Acknowledged. None. None. None. None.
2009-11-6
Page 363 of 438
Internal
Name of the Message over F-DSCH Unassured Bs Ack Order (UNBSACK) Universal Soft Handoff Direction Message (USHDM) MEID Universal Soft Handoff Direction Message (MUSHDM) Universal Hard Handoff Direction Message (UHHDM) MEID Universal Hard Handoff Direction Message (MUHHDM)
Message ID 0 x FD 0 x 22 0 x 35 0 x 62 0 x 75
Remarks Must be set to Unacknowledged. None. None. None. None.
Default Value
Setting Tradeoff
Remarks
In V3R6C03, soft handoff and hard handoff use different messages. Soft handoff uses universal soft handoff direction messages (USHDMs). Hard handoff uses universal hard handoff direction messages (UHHDMs).
8.18.3 ASSMODE (Assured Mode)

Description
This parameter specifies the acknowledged or unacknowledged mode. In terms of the sending mechanism, Um interfaces have two sending modes, that is, acknowledged mode and unacknowledged mode. In acknowledged mode, if the system does not receive a response from the peer LAC layer after sending a message, the system retransmits the message. In unacknowledged mode, the system directly retransmits the message, without waiting for the response from the peer LAC layer.
Type
2009-11-6
Page 364 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
Value Range
YES (acknowledged), or NO (unacknowledged).
Default Value
Acknowledged.
Setting Tradeoff
Remarks
The acknowledged or unacknowledged mode of certain messages cannot be changed. For details, see MSGID1.
8.18.4 TRANSINTERVAL (Transmission Times)

Description
This parameter specifies the specific transmission times of the messages on the LAC layer.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
1 to 20.
Default Value
1.
Setting Tradeoff
You can improve the reliability of receiving messages by increasing the number of retransmit times of messages. The system load, however, increases.
2009-11-6
Page 365 of 438
Internal
Remarks
Checking for the copies of a message over a common channel in unacknowledged mode requires the control parameter to meet the following requirement: (LAC message transmission times 1) x LAC transmission interval < T4m (2200 ms). The check for the copies of a message over a dedicated channel in unacknowledged mode requires the control parameter to meet the following requirement: (LAC message transmission times 1) x LAC transmission interval < T3m (320 ms).
8.18.5 TRANSINTERVAL (Transmission Interval)

Description
This parameter specifies the transmission interval of the messages on the LAC layer. For a message in acknowledged mode, if the system does not receive the ACK message, it retransmits the message once after each transmit interval until it receives the ACK message or reaches the transmit limit. For a message in unacknowledged mode, the system sends the message once after each specified transmission interval until reaching the transmission times.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
50 to 8000 ms.
Default Value
50 ms.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
8.18.6 SIGPRIO (Signaling Priority)

Description
This parameter specifies the signaling priority. The priorities of the messages over common channels determine the assembly mode of the common channel signaling on the MAC layer.
Internal
The signaling with a high priority can independently occupy an entire 20 ms frame on the MAC layer.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
LOW (low priority), HIGH (high priority), or DELAY (delay priority).
Default Value
LOW.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
Neighbor cell update is required after a handoff. There are multiple incumbent neighbor cells, and extended neighbor update messages (ENLUMs) are very long. Therefore, the priorities of the ENLUMs cannot be high. Otherwise, the voice quality may be affected because of frequent handoffs.
2009-11-6
Page 367 of 438
Internal
1X Data Service Parameters
9.1 SCH Rate Assignment Policy Parameters

9.1.1 FWDCENPLTTHRS (Forward Central Pilot Threshold)/FWDTRANPLTTHRS (Forward Transition Pilot Threshold)/FWDBDR4XPLTTHRS (Forward Border 4X Pilot Threshold)/FWDBDR2XPLTTHRS (Forward Border 2X Pilot Threshold)/FWDBDR1XPLTTHRS (Forward Border 1X Pilot Threshold)
Description
FWDCENPLTTHRS: The pilot strength of the assigned forward SCH over 8X cannot be lower than this threshold, which is the minimum Ec/Io threshold of assigning 16X SCH or 32X SCH. FWDTRANPLTTHRS: The pilot strength of the assigned forward SCH over 4X cannot be lower than this threshold, which is the minimum Ec/Io threshold of assigning 8X SCH. FWDBDR4XPLTTHRS: The pilot strength of the assigned forward SCH over 2X cannot be lower than this threshold, which is the minimum Ec/Io threshold of assigning 4X SCH. FWDBDR2XPLTTHRS: The pilot strength of the assigned forward SCH over 1X cannot be lower than this threshold, which is the minimum Ec/Io threshold of assigning 2X SCH. FWDBDR1XPLTTHRS: The pilot strength of the assigned forward SCH that is equal to or over 1X cannot be lower than this threshold, which is the minimum Ec/Io threshold of assigning 1X SCH.
Type
Related Commands
MOD SCH LST CHMINF: QRYINF = SCH
Value Range
-63 to 0 (unit: 0.5 dB).
Internal
Default Value
Rate FWDBDR1XPLTTHRS FWDBDR2XPLTTHRS FWDBDR4XPLTTHRS FWDTRANPLTTHRS FWDCENPLTTHRS Default Value -30 (-15 dB) -28 (-14 dB) -26 (-13 dB) -22 (-11 dB) -18 (-9 dB)
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
9.1.2 Reverse 1X SCH Duration (R1XDRT)/Reverse 2x SCH Duration (R2XDRT)/Reverse 4x SCH Duration (R4XDRT)/Reverse 8x SCH Duration (R8XDRT)/Reverse 16x SCH Duration (R16XDRT)/Reverse 32x SCH Duration (R32XDRT)
Description
REVCENPLTTHRS: The pilot strength of the assigned reverse SCH over 8X cannot be lower than this threshold, which is the minimum Ec/Io threshold of assigning 16X SCH or 32X SCH. REVTRANPLTTHRS: The pilot strength of the assigned reverse SCH over 4X cannot be lower than this threshold, which is the minimum Ec/Io threshold of assigning 8X SCH. REVBDR4XPLTTHRS: The pilot strength of the assigned reverse SCH over 2X cannot be lower than this threshold, which is the minimum Ec/Io threshold of assigning 4X SCH. REVBDR2XPLTTHRS: The pilot strength of the assigned reverse SCH over 1X cannot be lower than this threshold, which is the minimum Ec/Io threshold of assigning 2X SCH. REVBDR1XPLTTHRS: The pilot strength of the assigned reverse SCH that is equal to or over 1X cannot be lower than this threshold, which is the minimum Ec/Io threshold of assigning 1X SCH.
Type
2009-11-6
Page 369 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
Value Range
-63 to 0 (unit: 0.5 dB).
Default Value
Rate REVBDR1XPLTTHRS REVBDR2XPLTTHRS REVBDR4XPLTTHRS REVTRANPLTTHRS REVCENPLTTHRS Default Value -30 (-15 dB) -28 (-14 dB) -26 (-13 dB) -24 (-12 dB) -18 (-9 dB)
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
9.1.3 R1XDRT (Reverse 1X SCH Duration)/R2XDRT (Reverse 2X SCH Duration)/R4XDRT (Reverse 4X SCH Duration)/R8XDRT (Reverse 8X SCH Duration)/R16XDRT (Reverse 16X SCH Duration)/R32XDRT (Reverse 32X SCH Duration)
Description
This parameter specifies the data burst durations of reverse SCHs at different rates.
Type
Internal algorithm parameter of the carrier level. Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
Internal
Value Range
Parameter FRAME1 FRAME2 FRAME3 FRAME4 FRAME5 FRAME6 FRAME 7 FRAME8 FRAME16 FRAME32 FRAME64 FRAME96 FRAME128 FRAME256 STATIC Number of Frames 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 16 32 64 96 128 256 Static allocation
Default Value
Rate R1XDRT R2XDRT R4XDRT R8XDRT R16XDRT R32XDRT Default Value FRAME256 FRAME256 FRAME256 FRAME128 FRAME128 FRAME128
Setting Tradeoff
None.
2009-11-6
Page 371 of 438
Internal
Remarks
None.
9.1.4 FWDMINDRT (Min. Duration of F-SCH)

Description
This parameter specifies the minimum duration assigned to forward SCHs.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
See R1XDRT.
Default Value
FRAME8 (eight frames).
Setting Tradeoff
You should set this parameter by referring to the delay overhead of SCH assignment. Generally, the value of this parameter should be equal to or larger than eight.
Remarks
None.
9.1.5 FWDMAXDRT (Max. Duration of F-SCH)

Description
This parameter specifies the maximum duration assigned to forward SCHs.
Type
2009-11-6
Page 372 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
Value Range
See R1XDRT.
Default Value
FRAME64 (64 frames).
Setting Tradeoff
If the value of this parameter is large, the SCH transmission efficiency of the MSs in good radio environment is improved, but the SCH transmission of the MSs in mobile scenarios is disrupted.
Remarks
None.
9.1.6 FWD32XMINDRT (Min. Duration of Forward 32X SCH)

Description
This parameter specifies the minimum duration assigned to forward 32X SCHs.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
See R1XDRT.
Default Value
FRAME32 (32 frames).
Setting Tradeoff
None.
2009-11-6
Page 373 of 438
Internal
Remarks
None.
9.1.7 FWD32XMAXDRT (Max. Duration of Forward 32X SCH)

Description
This parameter specifies the maximum duration assigned to forward 32X SCHs.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
See R1XDRT.
Default Value
STATIC (static allocation).
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
9.1.8 SCHRELDTXDUR (DTX Duration)

Description
This parameter specifies the allowed duration of reverse SCH discontinuous transmission (DTX). If the MS stops sending the data on a reverse SCH and does not resend the data within the specified duration, the MS automatically releases the reverse SCH. This parameter helps to optimize R-SCH resources. If this parameter is set to 15, the MS does not release the reverse SCH.
Type
Air interface parameter (ESCAM). Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
2009-11-6
Page 374 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
MOD CHM LST CHM
Value Range
Default Value
9.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
9.1.9 SPT16XREVSCHSW (16X R-SCH Support Switch)

Description
This parameter determines whether the maximum rate that can be assigned to reverse SCHs is 16X or 8X. When this switch is on, the maximum rate is 16X.
Type
Related Commands
MOD CHM LST CHM
Value Range
OFF, or ON.
Default Value
ON.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
2009-11-6
Page 375 of 438
Internal
Remarks
None.
9.1.10 SIGDL (SCH Signaling Delay)

Description
This parameter specifies the interval from the SCH request (or the SCH extension decision) moment to the SCH transmission start time. This parameter ensures the interval that the BSC, BTS and MS finish the SCH setup for each SCH request and allocation.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
Default Value
10.
Setting Tradeoff
If the value of this parameter is too small, SCH transmission may be asynchronous, and thus the transmission efficiency is very low. If the value of this parameter is too large, there may be certain timeslots to wait to start SCH transmission when all network elements provide SCH channels, and thus the timeslots are wasted.
Remarks
The setting of this parameter must meet the following condition: FWDSCHEXTDURATION SCHEXTOVERLAP > SIGDL.
9.1.11 FWDSTOBTHR (F-SCH to Basic Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the offset of the forward SCH admission threshold to the forward basic admission threshold when the EcIor algorithm is used.
2009-11-6
Page 376 of 438
Internal
Type
Related Commands
MOD FLDCTRL V3R1/V3R6- LST RSMINF: QRYINF=FLDCTRL
Value Range
-10000 to 0 (unit: 0.1%).
Default Value
-100 (-10%).
Setting Tradeoff
Generally, you need not modify this parameter.
Remarks
This parameter is effective only when the EcIor algorithm is used for forward load control.
9.2 Forward SCH Soft Handoff Parameters

9.2.1 FWDSCHSHOSW (F-SCH Soft Handoff Switch)
Description
This parameter specifies the forward SCH soft handoff algorithm switch. This function is applicable to forward data service transmission in soft handoff areas.
Type
Versions earlier than V3R6C08: Internal algorithm parameter of the BSC level. V3R6C08: Internal algorithm parameter of the carrier level. Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
MOD CHM LST CHM V3R6C08:
2009-11-6
Page 377 of 438
Internal
MOD SCH LST CHMINF
Value Range
OFF, or ON.
Default Value
OFF.
Setting Tradeoff
When the forward SCH soft handoff is enabled, the soft handoff gain can improve link reliability and reduce the impact of radio link changes on SCH performance. More forward code resources and forward power, however, are consumed, and thus forward interference increases.
Remarks
To improve the downloading rate for subscribers in multi-pilot areas, it is recommended that you enable this function and turn on the switch for the forward SCH to limit the rate according to the integrated Ec/Io (changing bit 28 of soft parameter 59 of the RRM to 1).
9.2.2 FWDSASTHR (F-SCH Soft Handoff Initial Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the integrated threshold for the initial active set leg selection of the forward SCH. When selecting the legs for the forward SCH active set, first select all the legs whose pilot strength is not higher than this threshold (legs stronger than this threshold) from the FCH active set, and the strongest leg must be added to the forward SCH active set.
Type
Internal parameter of the module level. Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
MOD CHM LST CHM
Value Range
-6300 to 0 (unit: 0.005 dB).
Default Value
-1600 (-8 dB)
2009-11-6
Page 378 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
If the value of this parameter is very large, initial active set leg selection of the forward SCH is not implemented. In this case, all FCH active sets are directly used as SCH active sets.
Remarks
None.
9.2.3 FWDSASMAXNUM (F-SCH Soft Handoff Max. Leg Number)

Description
This parameter specifies the maximum allowed number of legs in a forward SCH active set.
Type
Related Commands
MOD CHM LST CHM
Value Range
1 to 6.
Default Value
3.
Setting Tradeoff
If the value of this parameter is too large, the proportion of SCH soft handoffs increases. Thus, too many forward resources are occupied, and forward capacity is wasted. If the value of this parameter is too small, the proportion of SCH soft handoffs decreases. Thus, soft handoff gain cannot be used properly, and the transmission performance of data services may decrease.
Remarks
It is similar to MAXSHO.
2009-11-6
Page 379 of 438
Internal
9.3 Forward SCH Extension Parameters

9.3.1 FWDSCHEXTSW (F-SCH Extension Switch)
Description
This parameter specifies the forward SCH extension algorithm switch.
Type
Related Commands
MOD CHM LST CHM
Value Range
ON, or OFF.
Default Value
ON.
Setting Tradeoff
When the SCH extension function is enabled, the throughput can be improved. Because the overhead of extension signaling is large, the CPU usage of the SPU increases to a certain extent. When the SCH extension function is disabled, only dynamic assignment is used. In this case, SCH release and reallocation cause a big gap of data transmission, and thus the utilization of the timeslots for data transmission decreases.
Remarks
SCH extension is applicable to scenarios with stable pilot strength and sustainable load. When the pilot strength fluctuates to a great extent or the load changes to a great extent, SCH extension should not be enabled.
9.3.2 FWDSCHVARRATESW (F-SCH Variety Rate Switch)

Description
This parameter specifies the switch for the forward SCH extension algorithm with variable rates.
2009-11-6
Page 380 of 438
Internal
Type
Related Commands
MOD CHM LST CHM
Value Range
ON, or OFF.
Default Value
OFF.
Setting Tradeoff
When this function is enabled, the throughput can be improved. Because the overhead of variable rate extension signaling is large, the CPU usage of the SPU increases to a certain extent. When this function is disabled, only dynamic assignment is used. In this case, SCH release and reallocation cause a big gap of data transmission, and thus the utilization of the timeslots for data transmission decreases.
Remarks

You need to enable FWDSCHEXTSW when enabling this parameter. You need to enable this parameter when the forward scheduling switch is on. SCH extension is applicable to scenarios with stable pilot strength and sustainable load. When the pilot strength fluctuates to a great extent or the load changes to a great extent, SCH extension should not be enabled. When this parameter is enabled, the SCH fixed rate extension function is disabled, that is, the SCH extension switch does not take effect. In this case, only variable rate extension is enabled.
on decision.
9.4 Reverse SCH Soft Handoff Parameters

9.4.1 REVSCHSHOSW (R-SCH Soft Handoff Switch)
Description
This parameter specifies the reverse SCH soft handoff algorithm switch. This function is applicable to reverse data service transmission in overlapping coverage areas of the BTS.
2009-11-6
Page 381 of 438
Internal
Type
Versions earlier than V3R6C08: Internal algorithm parameter of the BSC level. V3R6C08: Internal algorithm parameter of the carrier level. Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
Versions earlier than V3R6C08: MOD CHM LST CHM V3R6C08: MOD SCH LST CHMINF
Value Range
ON, or OFF.
Default Value
OFF.
Setting Tradeoff
When the reverse SCH soft handoff is enabled, the soft handoff gain can improve link reliability and reduce the impact of radio link changes on SCH performance. Reverse soft handoff, however, occupies more CEs and Abis link resources.
Remarks
To improve the uploading rate for subscribers in multi-pilot areas, it is recommended that you enable this function and turn on the switch to adjust R-SCH active set and rate with reverse Ec/Io (changing bit 0 of soft parameter 59 of the RRM to 1).
9.4.2 REVSASTHR (R-SCH Soft Handoff Judging Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the threshold for reverse SCH active set decision. If the difference between a leg and the strongest leg exceeds this threshold, the leg can be added to the active set. If the difference is lower than this threshold, the leg cannot be added to the active set.
Type
2009-11-6
Page 382 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
MOD CHM LST CHM
Value Range
-255 to 0 (unit: 0.25 dB).
Default Value
-32 (-8 dB).
Setting Tradeoff
The greater the value of this parameter, the higher is the threshold, the lower is the strength difference of the legs to be added to the active set, and the more difficult it is to add the legs to the active set. The smaller the value of this parameter, the lower is the threshold, and the easier can the legs be added to the active set.
Remarks
None.
9.4.3 REVSASMAXNUM (R-SCH Soft Handoff Max. Leg Number)

Description
This parameter specifies the maximum number of legs of the reverse SCH active set. A softer handoff has one leg.
Type
Related Commands
MOD CHM LST CHM
Value Range
1 to 6.
Default Value
3.
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
The smaller the value of this parameter, the less are the resources being occupied. The larger the value of this parameter, the more is the soft handoff gain being used.
Remarks
When all reverse soft handoffs are softer handoffs, few system resources are occupied, and softer handoff gain is available. In the current version, you can set REVSCHSHOSW to ON and set REVSASMAXNUM to 1 to enable the softer handoff only.
9.5 Reverse SCH Extension Parameters

9.5.1 REVSCHEXTSW (R-SCH Extension Switch)
Description
This parameter specifies the reverse SCH extension switch. When this switch is on, you need to disable the SCH release function, including the SCH release based on the FER, pilot strength, and load.
Type
Related Commands
MOD CHM LST CHM
Value Range
ON, or OFF.
Default Value
ON.
Setting Tradeoff
When this function is disabled, only dynamic assignment is used. In this case, SCH release and reallocation cause a big gap of data transmission, and thus the utilization of the timeslots for data transmission decreases.
Remarks
This function is applicable to scenarios with stable pilot strength and sustainable load. When the pilot strength fluctuates to a great extent or the load changes to a great extent, this function should not be enabled.
Internal
9.5.2 REVSCHEXTFOREDURSW (R-SCH Extension Forever Duration Switch)

Description
This parameter specifies the reverse SCH extension forever duration switch.
Type
Related Commands
MOD CHM LST CHM
Value Range
OFF, or ON.
Default Value
OFF.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
9.5.3 REVSCHVARRATESW (R-SCH Variety Rate Switch)

Description
This parameter specifies the switch for the forward SCH extension with variable rates.
Type
Internal parameter of the module level. Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
MOD CHM LST CHM
2009-11-6
Page 385 of 438
Internal
Value Range
OFF, or ON.
Default Value
OFF.
Setting Tradeoff
When SCH extension with variable rates is enabled, the reverse throughput can be improved. The overhead of extension signaling is large, and thus the CPU usage of the SPU increases to a certain extent.
Remarks
When this parameter is enabled, you need to enable REVSCHEXTSW.
9.6 1X Data Service QoS Parameters

9.6.1 QOSFUNSW (1X Data Service QoS Function Switch)
Description
This parameter specifies the 1X data service QoS function switch. The QoS of 1X subscribers limits the highest subscriber rate according to the subscriber level and provides the authority with various priorities to occupy resources. The subscriber with a higher level has a higher scheduling priority and enjoys a higher air interface rate in the case of the same channel condition. The highest rate of the subscribers with a low level is restricted within a certain range.
Type
Internal algorithm parameter of the BSC level. Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
MOD QoS LST QoS
Value Range
OFF, or ON.
Default Value
OFF (QoS function is disabled).
2009-11-6
Page 386 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
When this function is enabled, the system provides data services of different QoS to subscribers with different priorities, and the system capacity is effectively used. When this function is disabled, the system cannot provide differentiated services according to the subscriber priorities.
Remarks
1. Currently, this function is available to only forward SCHs, instead of reverse SCHs. 2. In CDMA2000 1X networks, if the HLR and the MSC are not Huawei products or the HLR and the
MSC are of an old version and do not support the QoS, the dedicated line and the QoS should be disabled. (The HLR that supports this function is of V66.)
3. The WLL has the QoS function similar to the BSC, but method of setting subscriber level is different.
In the case of the BSC, the subscriber level is set on the HLR. In the case of the WLL, the subscription data is in the BSC, and thus the subscriber level is set on the BSC.
4. When the QoS function is disabled, all data service subscribers are processed as ordinary subscribers.
If the DATASW is enabled, the system schedules 1X data services regardless of the subscriber level and provides fair data services for the subscribers. If the DATASW is disabled, the subscribers are served on the first-come first-served basis.
9.6.2 GOLDFSCHRATE (FSCH Limited Rate of Gold Subscriber)/SILVERFSCHRATE (FSCH Limited Rate of Silver Subscriber)/BRONZEFSCHRATE (FSCH Limited Rate of Bronze Subscriber)
Description
This parameter specifies the highest forward SCH rate allowed for gold, silver, or bronze subscribers.
Type
Related Commands
MOD QoS LST QoS
Value Range
RATE0 (1X), RATE1 (2X), RATE2 (4X), RATE3 (8X), RATE4 (16X), and RATE5 (32X).
Default Value
RATE4 (16X).
2009-11-6
Page 387 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
The larger the value of this parameter, the higher is the highest forward SCH rate allowed for gold, silver, or bronze subscribers. The smaller the value of this parameter, the lower is the highest forward SCH rate allowed for gold, silver, or bronze subscribers.
Remarks
In terms of the forward SCH limited rate, the following criterion must be met: Gold subscribers >= Silver subscribers >= Bronze subscribers.
9.6.3 GOLDRSCHRATE (RSCH Limited Rate of Gold Subscriber)/SILVERRSCHRATE (RSCH Limited Rate of Silver Subscriber)/BRONZERSCHRATE (RSCH Limited Rate of Bronze Subscriber)
Description
This parameter specifies the highest reverse SCH rate allowed for gold, silver, or bronze subscribers.
Type
Related Commands
MOD QoS LST QoS
Value Range
RATE0 (1X), RATE1 (2X), RATE2 (4X), RATE3 (8X), RATE4 (16X), and RATE5 (32X).
Default Value
RATE4 (16X).
Setting Tradeoff
The larger the value of this parameter, the higher is the highest reverse SCH rate allowed for gold, silver, or bronze subscribers. The smaller the value of this parameter, the lower is the highest reverse SCH rate allowed for gold, silver, or bronze subscribers.
Remarks
In terms of the reverse SCH limited rate, the following criterion must be met: Gold subscribers >= Silver subscribers >= Bronze subscribers.
2009-11-6
Page 388 of 438
Internal
Though the current QoS scheduling function is unavailable for reverse SCHs, you can set the highest reverse rate of gold, silver, or bronze data service subscribers when the QoS function is enabled.
9.6.4 DATASW (Data Service Scheduler Switch)

Description
This parameter specifies the 1X data service scheduler switch.
Type
Related Commands
MOD QoS LST QoS
Value Range
OFF, or ON.
Default Value
OFF.
Setting Tradeoff
When the value of this parameter is set to ON, the parameters FWDSCHVARRATESW and FWDSCHEXTSW cannot be manually configured, and the two parameters are enabled by default. When the value of this parameter is changed to OFF, the parameters FWDSCHVARRATESW and FWDSCHEXTSW cannot be changed automatically, but they can be configured manually.
Remarks
The relation between this parameter and the QOSFUNSW is as follows:

When the value of the QOSFUNSW is set to ON, the value of this parameter is set to ON by default and cannot be changed manually. When the value of the QOSFUNSW is set to OFF, the value of this parameter can be configured manually. If the value of this parameter is set to ON, 1X data services are scheduled regardless of the subscriber level. When the value of the QOSFUNSW is OFF, the rate weight, satisfaction factor weight, and forward/reverse limited rate use the default values. Thus, all subscribers are scheduled as ordinary subscribers.
2009-11-6
Page 389 of 438
Internal
9.7 1X RLP
9.7.1 SCHLOCKTHRESHOLD (SCH Request Threshold)
Description
This parameter specifies the SCH request threshold. When the size of the RLP forward buffer area exceeds this threshold, the RLP requests forward SCHs.
Type
Internal algorithm parameter of the module level. Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
MOD SDU1XRLP LST SDUINF: SDUINFO = SDU1XRLP
Value Range
500 to 9000 (unit: byte).
Default Value
1000.
Setting Tradeoff
A small value of this parameter ensures timely request for SCHs. But if the value of this parameter is too small, frequent SCH requests and releases are likely to occur in the case of light flow. If the value of this parameter is too large, SCH requests cannot be triggered in time. SCH requests and releases, however, may not occur very frequently in the case of light flow.
Remarks
The value of this parameter must be equal to or higher than SCHSTOPTHRESHOLD.
9.7.2 SCHRETRYTIME (SCH Request Retry Interval)

Description
This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two SCH requests initiated by the RLP.
2009-11-6
Page 390 of 438
Internal
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
Default Value
30.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
9.7.3 INACTIVETIMERLEN (Active-to-Dormant Inactive Timer Duration)

Description
This parameter specifies the active-to-dormant inactive timer duration. If the RLP receives no new data within the duration specified by this parameter, the MS releases the air interface and enters the dormant state.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
5 to 1000 (unit: second).
2009-11-6
Page 391 of 438
Internal
Default Value
20.
Setting Tradeoff
A small value of this parameter enables the MS to release the air interface resources and enter the dormant state in time in the case of no data transmission. But if the value is too small, it is too easy for the MS to enter the dormant state when short-term discontinuous transmission occurs, thus causing frequent SCH requests and releases. A large value of this parameter avoids frequent SCH requests and releases in the case of short-term discontinuous transmission. But if the value is too large, the MS occupies the air interface when no data is transmitted and cannot enter the dormant state in time, thus wasting air interface resources.
Remarks
In the case of China Telecom networks, this parameter is set to 180s (inheriting the value of the original network). If the PS call drop ratio is very high, you can reduce the value of this parameter to reduce the call drop ratio.
9.7.4 REXMITFRAMETHRESHOLD (Retransmit Frame SCH Apply Threshold)

Description
This parameter specifies the retransmit frame SCH apply threshold. When no SCHs are available, the RLP requests SCHs when the number of the frames that the MS requires the RLP to retransmit exceeds this threshold, regardless of how much new data is in the forward buffer area of the RLP.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
Default Value
300.
2009-11-6
Page 392 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
9.7.5 SCHSTOPTHRESHOLD (Threshold for Stopping Extension Check on the SCH)

Description
This parameter specifies the threshold for stopping extension check on the SCH. When forward SCHs are extended, an SCH extension must be stopped if the size of the BSC forward buffer area is lower than the value of this parameter within the specified duration (referring to SCHSTOPCHECKCOUNT for the duration) and the number of the frames required to be retransmitted is lower than REXMITFRAMETHRESHOLD.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 9000 (unit: byte).
Default Value
500.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
The value of this parameter must be equal to or lower than SCHLOCKTHRESHOLD.
2009-11-6
Page 393 of 438
Internal
9.7.6 SCHSTOPCHECKCOUNT (Times of Stopping Extension Check on the SCH)

Description
This parameter specifies the times of stopping extension check on the SCH. When forward SCHs are extended, the BSC detects the forward buffer area and the number of the frames required to be retransmitted once each 20 milliseconds. The SCH extension must be stopped if the size of the BSC data buffer area is lower than SCHSTOPTHRESHOLD and the number of the frames required to be retransmitted is lower than REXMITFRAMETHRESHOLD. If the number of the stopped SCH extensions exceeds the value of this parameter, the BSC delivers a command to stop the forward SCH extension.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
1 to 500.
Default Value
25.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
9.7.7 RLPBLOBSWTICH (RLP BLOB Switch)

Description
This parameter specifies the RLP BLOB switch. This parameter specifies whether to use the default parameters related to the RLP_BLOB function. When this switch is on, the parameters related to the RLP_BLOB function can be modified.
Type
Internal algorithm parameter of the module level.
2009-11-6
Page 394 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
MOD RLPBLOB LST RLPBLOB
Value Range
ON, or OFF.
Default Value
ON.
Setting Tradeoff
When the RLP_BLOB function is enabled, the default parameters are not used, and the parameters related to the RLP_BLOB function can be modified. When the RLP_BLOB function is disabled, the RTT is automatically updated on the RLP layer, the forward and reverse NAKs are retransmitted in (1, 2, and 3) mode.
Remarks
None.
9.7.8 RTT (Estimate of Round Trip Delay Between Peer RLPs)

Description
This parameter specifies the overtime timer for sending NAKs. If the receiver on the RLP layer does not receive retransmitted frames after the timer expires, the receiver sends another NAK.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 15.
2009-11-6
Page 395 of 438
Internal
Default Value
0.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
This parameter is effective only when RLPBLOBSWTICH is enabled.
9.7.9 NAKROUNDSFWD (Number of NAK Rounds to Send Forward)

Description
This parameter specifies the maximum number of rounds for retransmitting forward NAKs in the retransmission mechanism on the RLP layer. This parameter is effective only for the forward transmission on the RLP layer, and the MS is informed of this parameter during RLP setup negotiation.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 3.
Default Value
3.
Setting Tradeoff
If the value of this parameter is large, the FER of the frames delivered to the upper layer can be reduced after several rounds of error frame retransmission on the RLP layer. But if the value is too large, the transmission delay increases due to multiple retransmission times. If the value of the parameter is small, the retransmission times decrease. Thus, the RLP can deliver the data to the upper layer in time, and the transmission delay decreases. But the FER of the frames delivered to the upper layer increases.
2009-11-6
Page 396 of 438
Internal
Remarks
9.7.10 NAKROUNDSREV (Number of NAK Rounds to Send Reverse)

Description
This parameter specifies the maximum number of rounds for retransmitting reverse NAKs in the retransmission mechanism on the RLP layer. This parameter is effective only for the reverse transmission on the RLP layer.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 3.
Default Value
3.
Setting Tradeoff
If the value of this parameter is large, the FER of the frames delivered to the upper layer can be reduced after several rounds of error frame retransmission on the RLP layer. But if the value is too large, transmission delay increases due to multiple retransmission times. If the value of the parameter is small, the retransmission times decrease. Thus, the RLP can deliver the data to the upper layer in time, and the transmission delay decreases. But the FER of the frames delivered to the upper layer increases.
Remarks
2009-11-6
Page 397 of 438
Internal
9.7.11 NAKPERROUNDFWD0 (Number of 1st-Round NAKs to Send Forward)/NAKPERROUNDFWD1 (Number of 2nd-Round NAKs to Send Forward)/NAKPERROUNDFWD2 (Number of 3rd-Round NAKs to Send Forward)/NAKPERROUNDREV0 (Number of 1st-Round NAKs to Send Reverse)/NAKPERROUNDREV1 (Number of 2nd-Round NAKs to Send Reverse)/NAKPERROUNDREV2 (Number of 3rd-Round NAKs to Send Reverse)
Description
This parameter specifies the maximum number of NAKs to be sent in each round. This parameter specifies the maximum times for retransmitting the forward and reverse frames in each round.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
1 to 7.
Default Value
Parameter NAKPERROUNDFWD0 NAKPERROUNDFWD1 NAKPERROUNDFWD2 NAKPERROUNDREV0 NAKPERROUNDREV1 NAKPERROUNDREV2 Default Value 1 2 3 1 2 3
2009-11-6
Page 398 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
If the value of this parameter is large, the times for retransmitting the frames in each round increase. Thus, the probability of the NAK to be received can be improved, and the FER of the frames delivered to the upper layer can be reduced. But if the value is too large, lower transmission efficiency and prolonged link delay are caused by the redundant NAKs. If the value of this parameter is small, the times for retransmitting the frames in each round decrease. Thus, the transmission efficiency can be improved, and link delay can be reduced. But the probability of the NAK to be received decreases, and thus the FER of the frames delivered to the upper layer increases.
Remarks
9.8 Inter-BSC SCH Soft Handoff Parameters (Newly Added)

9.8.1 SCHPREV (SCH Rate Request Supported)
Description
This parameter determines whether to support inter-BSC SCH rate query during A3/A7 soft handoffs.
Type
Related Commands
ADD NBRBSC / MOD NBRBSC LST NBRBSC
Value Range
YES (supported) or NO (not supported).
Default Value
NO.
Setting Tradeoff
The query occupies A3/A7 bandwidths and delays SCH assignment. Therefore, this function is disabled by default, thus reducing A3/A7 message exchanges and saving A3/A7 signaling bandwidths.
2009-11-6
Page 399 of 438
Internal
Remarks
None.
9.8.2 INTERSCH (CDMA2000 1X Data Call Inter BSC SCH SHO Supported)
Description
This parameter determines whether CDMA2000 1X data calls support inter-BSC SCH soft handoffs.
Type
Related Commands
ADD OUTCDMACH/MOD OUTCDMACH LST CDMACH
Value Range
YES, or NO.
Default Value
YES.
Setting Tradeoff
The value of this parameter is set based on actual situations. It is recommended that you enable this parameter in cases where BSC boundary data service traffic is large.
Remarks
This parameter is effective only when the DHOTP parameter supports inter-BSC soft handoffs.
2009-11-6
Page 400 of 438
Internal
10
10.1.1 PLTTP (Pilot Type)
Description
Service Redirection
Under the overlapping coverage of two or multiple networks, the service redirection function guides the MS to enter the corresponding network. When congestion occurs in a network, this function provides traffic leading and receiving and redirects unauthorized subscribers to other networks. Service redirection takes place during MS registration or call origination.
10.1 Service Redirection Parameters (SR_CFG)
This parameter specifies the current pilot type. The MS determines how to perform service redirection according to the current pilot type.
Type
Air interface parameter (SRDM). Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
MOD SRCFG LST RSMINF: QRYINF = SRCFG
Value Range
IS95A95B IS95A/IS95B cell (IS2000 MSs are redirected). IS2000 IS2000 cell (IS95A and IS95B MSs are redirected). IS95B2000 IS95B/IS2000 mixed cell (IS95A MSs are redirected). IS95A95B2000 IS95A/IS95B/IS2000 mixed cell (No redirection is performed).
Default Value
The value of this parameter is set based on actual situations.
2009-11-6
Page 401 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
10.1.2 IFCELLTP (Allow Service Redirection Based on Current Cell Type)

Description
This parameter specifies the allow service redirection based on current cell type. This parameter is used together with the PLTTP parameter. The parameter takes effect only when the PLTTP parameter is enabled.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
YES, or NO.
Default Value
NO.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
10.1.3 SRLODSWT (Redirection on Congestion Switch)

Description
This parameter determines whether to perform redirection when congestion occurs.
2009-11-6
Page 402 of 438
Internal
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
OFF, or NO.
Default Value
OFF.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
10.1.4 SRSWT1 (Redirection on Illegal MS Switch)

Description
This parameter determines whether to redirect illegal MSs.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
OFF, or NO.
Default Value
OFF.
2009-11-6
Page 403 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
10.1.5 SRSID (Target Cell System ID)

Description
If an MS is to be redirected to a specified system (the system SID is specified), the BTS sets the value of this parameter to the SID of the system. Otherwise, the BTS sets the value of this parameter to 0.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 32767.
Default Value
0
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
10.1.6 SRNID (Target Cell Network ID)

Description
This parameter specifies the NID of the network to which the MS is redirected. If the MS is to be redirected to a specified network, the BTS sets the value of this parameter to the NID of the network. Otherwise, the BTS sets the value of this parameter to 65535.
2009-11-6
Page 404 of 438
Internal
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
0 to 65535.
Default Value
0.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
The NID is the network ID at the BSC side.
10.1.7 BNDCLS (Band Class)

Description
This parameter specifies the band class of redirection target cell.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
BC800, BC1900, BCTAC, BCJTACS, BCKOREAN, BC450, BC2000, BC700, BC1800, BC900, BCSEC800, BC400, BCPAMR800, IMT2000, USPCS, AWS, US2500, and US2500FL.
2009-11-6
Page 405 of 438
Internal
Default Value
The value of this parameter is based on the actual situation.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
The band of each BandClass is clearly listed in the drop-down menu on the interface of the AirBridge maintenance console. You can select the BandClass directly in the drop-down menu.
10.1.8 SRFRQ1 (Service Redirection Target Channel No. 1)/SRFRQ2 (Service Redirection Target Channel No. 2)/SRFRQ3 (Service Redirection Target Channel No. 3)/SRFRQ4 (Service Redirection Target Channel No. 4)/SRFRQ5 (Service Redirection Target Channel No. 5)/SRFRQ6 (Service Redirection Target Channel No. 6)
Description
This parameter specifies the target frequencies of service redirection. In total, there are six target frequencies, which are numbered from 1 to 6. The valid value of the target frequencies ranges from 0 to 2074. The target frequency that is not required to be configured is set to 65535. The value of the target frequencies is based on actual situations. If a target frequency is set to 65535, the target frequency and the following ones are invalid. Therefore, you must set the target frequencies in sequence.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
A value from 0 to 2047 represents a valid frequency, and the value 65535 represents an invalid target frequency.
Default Value
The value of this parameter is set according to the actual situations.
2009-11-6
Page 406 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
You should configure the frequencies of the redirection target cells according to the actual requirements.
Remarks
None.
10.2 GSRDM (Global Service Redirection Message)

10.2.1 RDRCTACCOLC (Redirected Access Overload Classes)
Description
This parameter specifies the redirected access overload classes of global service redirection messages. There are 16 bits, which are BIT0 through BIT15. Each BIT corresponds to an access overload class. If service redirection is allowed to be performed for the MS of an access overload class, you should set the corresponding bit to 1. If not, you should set the corresponding bit to 0.
Type
Air interface parameter (GSRDM). Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
MOD GSRDM LST SYSMSGPARA: CCMINF = GSRDM
Value Range
0 x 0 to 0 x FFFF.
Default Value
0 x 0.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
The access overload class of the MS corresponds to the last digit of the decimal value of the IMSI. For example, if the IMSI of an MS is 460030912120003, the access overload class of the MS is 3. Table 1-1 shows the relations between the bits, access overload classes, and IMSIs.
2009-11-6
Page 407 of 438

Table 1-1 Relations between the bits, access overload classes, and IMSIs
Internal
BIT BIT15 (Most significant bit) BIT14 BIT13 BIT12 BIT11 BIT10 BIT9 BIT8 BIT7 BIT6 BIT5 BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0 (Least significant bit)
Access Overload Class Access overload class 0 Access overload class 1 Access overload class 2 Access overload class 3 Access overload class 4 Access overload class 5 Access overload class 6 Access overload class 7 Access overload class 8 Access overload class 9 Access overload class 10 Access overload class 11 Access overload class 12 Access overload class 13 Access overload class 14 Access overload class 15
IMSI xxxxxxxxxxxxxx0 xxxxxxxxxxxxxx1 xxxxxxxxxxxxxx2 xxxxxxxxxxxxxx3 xxxxxxxxxxxxxx4 xxxxxxxxxxxxxx5 xxxxxxxxxxxxxx6 xxxxxxxxxxxxxx7 xxxxxxxxxxxxxx8 xxxxxxxxxxxxxx9 MS used for testing MS used for emergencies Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
10.2.2 RETFAIL (Return if Fail Indicator)

Description
This parameter specifies the error return indicator. When an MS fails to select the target system by using the reselection rule of a message, the value of this parameter is set to 1 if the MS is allowed to return to the system. Otherwise, this parameter is set to 0. If the parameter can be set to YES or NO.
Type
Related Commands
2009-11-6
Page 408 of 438
Internal
Value Range
YES, or NO.
Default Value
NO.
Setting Tradeoff
If the value of this parameter is YES, the MS may return to the original carrier, thus causing the ping-pong effect.
Remarks
None.
10.2.3 EXCPREVMS (Exclude Redirection Indicator)

Description
This parameter determines whether the MS is excluded from redirection. To exclude the MSs which satisfy the condition: MOB_P_REV 6 from being affected by the GSRDM, you can set the value of this parameter to 1 or 0.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
YES, or NO.
Default Value
NO.
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
None.
2009-11-6
Page 409 of 438
Internal
10.2.4 RECTP (Redirection Record Type)

Description
Table 1-1 lists the redirection record types.
Table 1-1 Redirection record type
Description NDSS close direction Redirected to a simulation system Redirected to a CDMA system Redirected to a TACS simulation system Redirected to a JTACS simulation system Other record type values are reserved
Record Type (bin) '00000000' '00000001' '00000010' '00000011' '00000100'
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
YES (redirected to a CDMA system), or NO (no redirection).
Default Value
NO (no redirection).
Setting Tradeoff
None.
Remarks
Network Directed System Selection (NDSS): A feature that allows the mobile station to automatically register with a preferred system while roaming, or to be automatically directed by a service provider, typically the home service provider, to a suggested system, regardless of the frequency band class, cellular band, or PCS frequency block.
2009-11-6
Page 410 of 438
Internal
10.3 EGSRDM (Extended Global Service Redirection Message)

10.3.1 RDRCTPREVINCL (Redirection Mobile Protocol Revision Included)
Description
This parameter defines whether the redirection message is effective only for the MSs of specified protocol revisions.
Type
Air interface parameter (EGSRDM). Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Related Commands
MOD EGSRDM LST SYSMSGPARA: CCMINF = EGSRDM
Value Range
YES, or NO.
Default Value
NO.
Setting Tradeoff
If the redirection message is effective only for the MSs of specified protocol revisions, set the parameter to YES (included); otherwise, set the parameter to NO (excluded).
Remarks
None.
10.3.2 EXCPREV (Excluding Mobile Protocol Revision Indicator)

Description
This parameter is the indicator specifying the protocol versions of the MSs that are not affected by the redirection message.
Type
Air interface parameter (EGSRDM).
2009-11-6
Page 411 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
Value Range
YES, or NO.
Default Value
NO.
Setting Tradeoff
If the value of RDRCTPREVINCL is set to YES, the BTS must include the parameter. Otherwise, the BTS must neglect this parameter. If the MOB_P_REV of an MS ranges from MINRDPREV to MAXRDPREV and the MS is excluded from global service redirection, this parameter must be set to YES. If the MOB_P_REV of the MS is beyond the range from MINRDPREV to MAXRDPREV and the MS is controlled by service redirection, this parameter must be set to NO.
Remarks
The identifier of this parameter in the maintenance console command is EXCPREV.
10.3.3 MINRDPREV (Min. Redirection Protocol Revision)

Description
This parameter specifies the minimum redirection protocol revision.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
1 to 7.
Default Value
6.
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
It is the minimum protocol revision used to perform the operation (redirection or redirection exclusion) specified by the EXCL_P_REV_IND.
Remarks
None.
10.3.4 MAXRDPREV (Max. Redirection Protocol Revision)

Description
This parameter specifies the maximum redirection protocol revision.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
1 to 7.
Recommended Value
6.
Setting Tradeoff
It is the maximum protocol revision used to perform the operation (redirection or redirection exclusion) specified by the EXCL_P_REV_IND.
Remarks
None.
2009-11-6
Page 413 of 438
Internal
11
Description Type
Performance Data Collection Function
11.1 CDR Tracing

11.1.1 BAMCDR (Whether BAM Is CDR Server)
This parameter determines whether the BAM serves as the CDR Server.
Related Commands
MOD CDRFILTER LST CDRFILTER
Value Range
YES, or NO.
Default Value
None.
Setting Tradeoff
The value of this parameter is set according to the actual situations. To trace network calls (including normal and abnormal releases), you should set the value of this parameter to NO. To trace abnormal network calls, you should set the value of this parameter to YES.
Remarks
This parameter relates to the BAMCFC parameter.
2009-11-6
Page 414 of 438
Internal
11.1.2 TTYPE (Tracing Type)

Description
This parameter specifies the CDR tracing type.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
CRR_CLASS (carrier-level trace). SPUO_CLASS (subsystem-level trace). USER_CLASS (subscriber-level trace).
Default Value
None.
Setting Tradeoff
Remarks
Only one of the three tracing types can take effect at a time. For the carrier-level tracing, run the following commands to add or delete the traced carriers. ADD CDRCARRIER RMV CDRCARRIER For the subscriber-level tracing, run the following commands to add or delete the traced subscribers by entering the subscribers' IMSIs. ADD CDRUSER RMV CDRUSER
11.1.3 BAMCFC (Abnormal Call Release Type)

Description
This parameter defines the calls that are released due to exceptions.
Internal
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
MS_REJ_ORD (releases caused by MS rejection messages). OAM_CAUSE (releases caused by the OAM). RADIO_CAUSE (releases caused by radio environment factors). BTS_ABNORMAL (abnormal releases initiated by the BTS). MSC_ABNORMAL (abnormal releases initiated by the MSC). PDSN_ABNORMAL (abnormal releases initiated by the PDSN). A3/A7_ABNORMAL (abnormal releases initiated by A3/A7 interfaces). OTHER_CAUSE (releases caused by other reasons). VOICE_ABNORMAL (abnormal voice service releases). SMP_ABNORMAL (abnormal releases initiated by the SMP).
Default Value
None. Generally, all the preceding values are selected.
Setting Tradeoff
Remarks
Set a value to this parameter only when the parameter BAMCDR is set to YES.
11.1.4 NBAMCFC (Call Release Type)

Description
This parameter specifies the calls of which release type (including the normal release type and the abnormal release type) should be released.
Type
BSC internal parameter.
2009-11-6
Page 416 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
Value Range
MSC_NORMAL (normal releases initiated by the MSC). MS_NORMAL (normal releases initiated by the MS). MS_REJ_ORD (releases caused by MS rejection messages). OAM_CAUSE (releases caused by the OAM). DORMANT_NORMAL (normal releases in the dormant state). PDSN_NORMAL (normal releases initiated by the PDSN). RADIO_CAUSE (releases caused by radio environment factors). HHO_NORMAL (normal releases on the hard handoff source side). SMP_NORMAL (normal releases initiated by the SMP). BTS_ABNORMAL (abnormal releases initiated by the BTS). MSC_ABNORMAL (abnormal releases initiated by the MSC). PDSN_ABNORMAL (abnormal releases initiated by the PDSN). A3/A7_ABNORMAL (abnormal releases initiated by A3/A7 interfaces). OTHER_CAUSE (releases caused by other reasons). VOICE_ABNORMAL (abnormal voice service releases). SMP_ABNORMAL (abnormal releases initiated by the SMP). Other values are reserved.
Default Value
None. Generally, all the preceding values are selected.
Setting Tradeoff
Remarks
Set a value to this parameter only when the parameter BAMCDR is set to NO.
2009-11-6
Page 417 of 438
Internal
11.1.5 SWT (Call Release Type Filter Switch)

Description
This parameter specifies the statuses of the CDR filter switch.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
ON, or OFF.
Default Value
OFF.
Setting Tradeoff
Remarks
None.
2009-11-6
Page 418 of 438
Internal
12
12.1 Voice Enhancement Parameters
12.1.1 ALCEN (ALC Mode)
Description Type
Internal voice parameter of the subrack level. Parameter layer: ordinary parameter.
Voice Parameters
This parameter specifies the selection mode for level gain control.
Related Commands
MOD TCPARA LST TCPARA
Value Range
Fixed gain mode (FGM). In this mode, the gain size is equal to that of the forward and reverse level gain. Automatic gain mode (AGM). In this mode, the gain size can be automatically adjusted according to the signal size and the expected level, thus enabling the signal amplitude to reach the expected level.
Default Value
FGM.
Setting Tradeoff
Remarks
None.
2009-11-6
Page 419 of 438
Internal
12.1.2 FWDVGAIN (Forward Level Gain)

Description
This parameter specifies the forward level gain. You can adjust the volume by adjusting the forward and reverse level gain.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
FWDGAIN0 (-6 dB), FWDGAIN1 (-5 dB), FWDGAIN2 (-4 dB), FWDGAIN3 (-3 dB), FWDGAIN4 (-2 dB), FWDGAIN5 (-1 dB), FWDGAIN6 (0 dB), FWDGAINM1 (1 dB), FWDGAINM2 (2 dB), FWDGAINM3 (3 dB), FWDGAINM4 (4 dB), and FWDGAINM5 (5 dB).
Default Value
FWDGAIN6 (0 dB). In this case, the forward level gain is not changed.
Setting Tradeoff
If the volume is too large during a conversation, you can first set the ALC FWDVGAIN to FWDGAIN3 (-3 dB). If the volume is too small, you can first set the ALC FWDVGAIN to FWDGAINM3 (3 dB).
Remarks
None.
12.1.3 REVVGAIN (Reverse Level Gain)

Description
This parameter specifies the reverse level gain. You can adjust the volume by adjusting the forward and reverse level gain.
Type
2009-11-6
Page 420 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
Value Range
REVGAIN0 (-6 dB), REVGAIN1 (-5 dB), REVGAIN2 (-4 dB), REVGAIN3 (-3 dB), REVGAIN4 (-2 dB), REVGAIN5 (-1 dB), REVGAIN6 (0 dB), REVGAIN7 (1 dB), REVGAIN8 (2 dB), REVGAIN9 (3 dB), REVGAIN10 (4 dB), REVGAIN11 (5 dB), REVGAIN12 (6 dB), REVGAINM1 (7 dB), REVGAINM2 (8 dB), REVGAINM3 (9 dB), REVGAINM4 (10 dB), REVGAINM5 (11 dB), and REVGAINM6 (12 dB).
Default Value
REVGAIN6 (0 dB). In this case, the reverse level gain is not changed.
Setting Tradeoff
Remarks
None.
12.1.4 AECEN (AEC Enable Switch)

Description
This parameter determines whether to enable the acoustic echo cancellation (AEC) function. It is recommended that you disable the AEC function in normal cases. Because the terminal is provided with the AEC function, double-speak discontinuity may occur if the AEC function is enabled for the BSC.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
ON, or OFF.
Default Value
OFF.
2009-11-6
Page 421 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
According to the experiences of China Telecom, it is recommended that you enable this function and set the AECAEBW parameter to 16 dB.
Remarks
The isolation of the MS vocal cavity coupler is not enough. In this case, the voice entering to the microphone may leak to the handset, thus causing acoustic echoes. Huawei AEC algorithm can eliminate such acoustic echoes.
12.1.5 AECDL (AEC Delay)

Description
This parameter specifies the AEC delay. When the value of this parameter is equivalent to the actual acoustic echo delay in the network, you can obtain the best cancellation effect.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
100 to 300 (unit: ms).
Default Value
140 ms.
Setting Tradeoff
Remarks
None.
12.1.6 AECAEBW (AEC Acoustic Echo Return Loss)

Description
This parameter specifies the AEC acoustic echo return loss. This parameter is used to cancel echoes.
2009-11-6
Page 422 of 438
Internal
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
6 to 40 (unit: dB).
Default Value
24 dB.
Setting Tradeoff
If the echo path loss is small, the echo cancellation effect is good. That is, the echoes within wide amplitude can be cancelled. But the probability of double-speak discontinuity increases. If the echo path loss is great, only the echoes within narrow amplitude can be cancelled, but the probability of double-speak discontinuity decreases.
Remarks
None.
12.1.7 EECSWITCH (EEC Switch)

Description
This parameter specifies the EEC switch. This parameter is used to cancel echoes.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
ON, or OFF.
2009-11-6
Page 423 of 438
Internal
Default Value
OFF.
Setting Tradeoff
Remarks
According to the experiences of China Telecom, it is recommended that you enable this function and set the EECRETURNLOSS parameter to 24 dB and the EECWORKTIME parameter to 255s.
12.1.8 EECRETURNLOSS (EEC Return Loss)

Description
This parameter specifies the EEC return loss.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
6 to 30 (unit: dB).
Default Value
12 dB.
Setting Tradeoff
Remarks
This parameter can be enabled only when the EECSWITCH parameter is set to ON.
12.1.9 EECWORKTIME (EEC Work Time)

Description
This parameter specifies the EEC work time after the EEC switch is turned on.
2009-11-6
Page 424 of 438
Internal
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
2 to 255 (unit: second).
Default Value
3.
Remarks
This parameter can be enabled only when the EECSWITCH parameter is set to ON.
12.1.10 EVRCNSSW (EVRC Algorithm Noise Suppression Switch)

Description
This parameter specifies the EVRC algorithm noise suppression switch. The EVRC algorithm can reduce the background voice to a certain extent, thus making the voice clearer. This parameter only affects the speech path that uses the EVRC algorithm.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
ON, or OFF.
Default Value
OFF.
2009-11-6
Page 425 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
Remarks
According to the experiences of China Telecom, it is recommended that you enable this function.
12.1.11 TFOEN (TFO Enabled)

Description
This parameter determines whether to enable the TFO. The TFO function can reduce one coding/decoding algorithm when the calling party and the called party use the same algorithm, thus improving the voice quality. You can enable or disable the TFO function through this parameter.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
YES, or NO.
Default Value
NO.
Setting Tradeoff
Remarks
None.
12.1.12 RNGBKTNDCT (Whether to Check Ring Back Tone)

Description
This parameter determines whether to check ring back tone. Coding/decoding algorithms cause great damages to single-frequency voices of certain frequencies. Therefore, a scheme is provided on the TC to prevent the ring back tones of these frequencies from being damaged.
2009-11-6
Page 426 of 438
Internal
The scheme is detection and replacement, that is, the detected ring back tone of a specified frequency is replaced by the ring back tone generated by the TC.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
ON, or OFF.
Default Value
OFF.
Setting Tradeoff
Remarks
None.
12.1.13 DCTDUR (Duration of Checking Ring Back Tone)

Description
This parameter specifies the duration of checking ring back tone.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
5s to 300s.
2009-11-6
Page 427 of 438
Internal
Default Value
60s.
Setting Tradeoff
Remarks
None.
12.1.14 RNGTSTCFRQ (Frequency of Ring Back Tone Check)

Description
This parameter specifies the frequency of ring back tone check. Coding/decoding algorithms process single-frequency voices as noises, and the quality of ring back tones of certain frequencies becomes very poor after coding/decoding. Thus, the system uses the detection and replacement scheme. This parameter specifies the frequency of the ring back tone to be detected.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
FREQENT0(400Hz)/FREQENT0(400Hz)/FREQENT1(410Hz)/FREQENT2(420Hz) /FREQENT3(430Hz)/FREQENT4(440Hz)/FREQENT5(450Hz)/FREQENT6(460Hz) /FREQENT7(470Hz)/FREQENT8(480Hz)/FREQENT9(490Hz)/FREQENT10(500Hz)
Default Value
FREQENT2(420Hz)
Setting Tradeoff
Remarks
None.
2009-11-6
Page 428 of 438
Internal
12.1.15 RNGTSTFRQOFFSET (Pilot Offsets of the Ring Back Tone)

Description
This parameter detects the bandwidths of ring back tones.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
FRQOFFSET0(0Hz)/FRQOFFSET1(5Hz)/FRQOFFSET2(10Hz)
Default Value
FRQOFFSET2(10Hz)
Setting Tradeoff
Remarks
None. If the TC board used on the BSC is an ECUOa board, the following parameters can be configured.
12.1.16 NLP (Nonlinear Processor)

Description
This parameter specifies the nonlinear processor. This parameter is used to detect the performance of the nonlinear processor.
Type
2009-11-6
Page 429 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
MOD ECPARA LST ECPARA
Value Range
ON, or OFF.
Default Value
ON.
Setting Tradeoff
Remarks
None.
12.1.17 TD (Tone Detection)

Description
This parameter specifies the tone detection. Generally, this parameter is set to G.164, which corresponds to facsimile and data services. The EC can automatically detect the tone signals in the handshake phase. G.164 corresponds to 2100 Hz tones, and G.165 corresponds to the 2100 Hz tones with periodic inverse phase signals.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
ON, or OFF.
Default Value
OFF.
Setting Tradeoff
Internal
Remarks
None.
12.1.18 AUMD (A/mu Law Mode)

Description
This parameter specifies the A/mu Law mode. The A and the mu indicate two nonlinear quantitative coding methods, which ensure good communications quality for all signals. The A/mu law mode should be consistent in a communication system. If not, a conversion process is required. Otherwise, load noises may take place.
Type
Related Commands
MOD ECPARA / MOD TCPARA LST ECPARA / LST TCPARA
Value Range
A (A law), or mu (mu law).
Default Value
A.
Setting Tradeoff
Remarks
The A/mu law mode must be consistent with the PCM coding mode of the A interface. For example, the A law code is generally used in China. Otherwise, the voice has load noises.
12.1.19 CNGMD (CNG Mode)

Description
Comfort noise generation (CNG) mode.
Type
2009-11-6
Page 431 of 438
Internal
Related Commands
Value Range
NOISE (noise matching mode), or VARLOSS (variable attenuation mode).
Default Value
NOISE.
Setting Tradeoff
Remarks
According to the experiences of China Telecom, it is recommended that you change the CNG mode to VARLOSS.
12.2 Service Parameters

12.2.1 DTEN (DTMF Check Switch)
Description
DTMF check switch. The DTMF check function detects whether the PCM signals at the A interface contains DTMF signals and reports the detected DTMF signals. You can enable or disable the DTMF check function through this parameter. This parameter is used when numbers are transmitted between the calling party and the called party. For example, this parameter is used when the subscriber enters a number to select a service on the voice-guide console. Generally, this parameter is not used when both the calling party and the called party are MSs.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
ON, or OFF.
Internal
Default Value
OFF.
Setting Tradeoff
When this parameter is set to ON, the system automatically processes DTMF signals, that is, it detects whether the calling party and the called party perform keystroke operations. When this parameter is set to OFF, the system does not perform this detection. By default, this parameter is set to OFF.
Remarks
None.
12.2.2 SIGLEN (DTMF Signal Length)

Description
Duration and interval of DTMF messages. You can obtain the duration and the interval of DTMF messages from this parameter only when the duration or interval carried in reverse DTMF messages is 0 x FF. Otherwise, the SIGLEN parameter carried in DTMF messages are used directly.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
DTMF40 (40 ms)/DTMF60 (60 ms)/DTMF80 (80 ms)/DTMF100 (100 ms)/DTMF120 (120 ms)/DTMF140 (140 ms)/DTMF160 (160 ms)/DTMF180 (180 ms)/DTMF200 (200 ms)/DTMF220 (220 ms)/DTMF240 (240 ms)/DTMF260 (260 ms).
Default Value
DTMF120 (120 ms).
Setting Tradeoff
The larger the value of this parameter is, the longer are the duration and the interval. You can control the duration and the interval by changing this parameter.
2009-11-6
Page 433 of 438
Internal
Remarks
Generally, the duration and the level of DTMF signals use the default values. You should adjust this parameter according to the actual situation when finding that the DTMF signals detected by certain interconnected devices are inaccurate.
12.2.3 SIGHIFRQ (DTMF Sends Signal Level)

Description
Level of DTMF tone signals generated according to the DTMF number carried in reverse DTMF messages.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
HIFRQ1 (-4 dB)/HIFRQ2 (-5 dB)/HIFRQ3/(-6 dB)/HIFRQ4 (-7 dB)/HIFRQ5 (-8 dB).
Default Value
HIFRQ1 (-4 dB).
Setting Tradeoff
The larger the value of this parameter is, the smaller is the amplitude of the generated DTMF tones .
Remarks
None.
12.2.4 TTYSWITCH (TTY Switch)

Description
Determining whether to enable Teletex typing. The Teletex typing function can transmit TTY characters in real time when supported by the terminal.
Type
Internal
Related Commands
Value Range
ON, or OFF.
Default Value
OFF.
Setting Tradeoff
Remarks
The text Tel. (TTY) and the Telephonic Device for the Deaf (TDD) for the hearing impaired are the telephonic communication devices designed for people who are hearing and speech impaired.
12.2.5 TTYLEVEL (Baudot Level)

Description
Baudot level. The A interface converts TTY characters into TTY tones before sending the TTY characters. This parameter determines the amplitude of the generated TTY tones.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
LEVEL0 (-10 dB)/LEVEL1 (-15 dB)/LEVEL2 (-20 dB)/LEVEL3 (-25 dB)/LEVEL4 (-30 dB).
Default Value
LEVEL1 (-15 dB).
2009-11-6
Page 435 of 438
Internal
Setting Tradeoff
The larger the value of this parameter is, the smaller is the amplitude of the generated TTY tones.
Remarks
None.
12.2.6 TTYVOTTHRESH (TTY Voting Threshold)

Description
TTY voting threshold.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
1 to 11.
Default Value
5.
Setting Tradeoff
Remarks
None.
12.2.7 V110SW (V110 Switch)

Description
This parameter specifies the V110 protocol switch of circuit data services. It is recommended that you enable this function when the system interconnects with the MSC of another company.
2009-11-6
Page 436 of 438
Internal
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
ON, or OFF.
Default Value
OFF.
Setting Tradeoff
Remarks
None.
12.2.8 CEDSW (CED Detection Switch)

Description
This parameter specifies the facsimile preamble signal detection. The electrograph sends CED signals before starting facsimile services, thus notifying the related device to perform service handoffs.
Type
Related Commands
Value Range
ON, or OFF.
2009-11-6
Page 437 of 438
Internal
Default Value
OFF.
Setting Tradeoff
Remarks
None.
2009-11-6
Page 438 of 438

CDMA Performance Parameters (1X) V3.3 For Customers

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

CDMA Performance Parameters (1X) V3.3 For Customers

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

CDMA Performance Parameters (1X) V3.

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2009. All rights reserved.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

CDMA Performance Parameters (1X)

Added the new algorithms of BSCV3R6C08.

Huawei Confidential No Spreading Without Permission

CDMA Performance Parameters (1X)

2 Basic System Parameters............................................................................................................27

Huawei Confidential No Spreading Without Permission

CDMA Performance Parameters (1X)

Huawei Confidential No Spreading Without Permission

CDMA Performance Parameters (1X)

3 Forward Power Distribution Parameters................................................................................87

4 Power Estimation and Control Parameters ............................................................................98

Huawei Confidential No Spreading Without Permission

CDMA Performance Parameters (1X)

Huawei Confidential No Spreading Without Permission

CDMA Performance Parameters (1X)

Huawei Confidential No Spreading Without Permission

CDMA Performance Parameters (1X)

5 Load Control and Management Parameters ........................................................................157

Huawei Confidential No Spreading Without Permission

CDMA Performance Parameters (1X)

Huawei Confidential No Spreading Without Permission

CDMA Performance Parameters (1X)

6 Paging and Access Parameters................................................................................................203

CDMA Performance Parameters (1X)

7 1X Call Drop Mechanism ........................................................................................................258

Huawei Confidential No Spreading Without Permission

CDMA Performance Parameters (1X)

8 Handoff Algorithm ...................................................................................................................267

CDMA Performance Parameters (1X)

Huawei Confidential No Spreading Without Permission

CDMA Performance Parameters (1X)

Huawei Confidential No Spreading Without Permission

CDMA Performance Parameters (1X)

9 1X Data Service Parameters.....................................................................................................368

Huawei Confidential No Spreading Without Permission

CDMA Performance Parameters (1X)

10 Service Redirection .................................................................................................................401

Huawei Confidential No Spreading Without Permission

CDMA Performance Parameters (1X)

11 Performance Data Collection Function...............................................................................414

12 Voice Parameters .....................................................................................................................419

Huawei Confidential No Spreading Without Permission

CDMA Performance Parameters (1X)

Huawei Confidential No Spreading Without Permission

CDMA Performance Parameters (1X)

Huawei Confidential No Spreading Without Permission

CDMA Performance Parameters (1X)

5 Load Control and Management Parameters

Huawei Confidential No Spreading Without Permission

CDMA Performance Parameters (1X)

Section 6 Paging and Access Parameters

7 1X Call Drop Mechanism 8 Handoff Algorithm

9 1X Data Service Parameters

10 Service Redirection 11 Performance Data Collection Function 12 Voice Parameters

Huawei Confidential No Spreading Without Permission

CDMA Performance Parameters (1X)

1.2 Conventions and Descriptions